JP2018192204A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can generate a specific game state for executing a conversion operation in which an opening/closing member 990 is converted between a closed state and an open state and comprises: detection means for detecting a game ball entered a winning area; setting means for setting an effective time value corresponding to an effective period in which detection of the game ball by the detection means is effective; control means capable of executing a conversion control for controlling a conversion operation of the opening/closing member 990; and effective period notification means capable of notifying the effective period by a prescribed notification performance. The effective time value is set so that, the effective period is started at a start time of the conversion control by the control means, and the effective period is finished after finish of the conversion control, the open time value corresponding to a period in which the opening/closing member 990 is in the open state is selected from a predetermined plural kinds of open time values, in which the plural kinds of open time values are all equal to or higher than a prescribed time value, and a residual time value which is a time value of difference obtained by subtracting the open time value from the effective time value is a time value higher than the prescribed time value.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 183

Description

The present invention includes a variable winning device having an opening / closing member that can be converted into a closed state in which a winning area into which a game ball can flow is closed and an open state in which the winning area is opened, and a game result is a special result. In this case, the present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a round game in which the opening / closing member performs a conversion operation is executed a plurality of times.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine equipped with a winning device that can win a game ball, the winning device includes a winning space that can receive a gaming ball, and an opening and closing member that can open and close a ball receiving port of the winning space. In the closed state, the opening space wider than the game ball is formed in front of the winning space, so that the gaming ball is sandwiched between the ball receiving port and the opening / closing member when winning the winning device to the winning device A gaming machine that avoids the problem is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2015-136556A

However, even if it is configured such that the game ball is not easily sandwiched between the opening and closing members as in a conventional gaming machine, the game balls may be sandwiched between the opening and closing members. In that case, there is a possibility that the detection of the game ball becomes invalid (that is, the winning of the game ball is invalid) and the interest of the game is lowered. In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a variable prize having an opening / closing member that can be converted into a closed state in which a winning area into which a game ball can flow is closed and an open state in which the winning area is opened. In a gaming machine comprising a device and capable of generating a special game state in which the opening / closing member performs a conversion operation to convert between the closed state and the open state when a game result is a special result, the winning area Detecting means for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the device, setting means for setting an effective time value corresponding to an effective period during which detection of the game ball by the detecting means is effective, and conversion for controlling the conversion operation of the opening / closing member Control means capable of executing control, and effective period notifying means capable of notifying the effective period by a predetermined notification effect, wherein the setting means is provided when the control means starts the conversion control. The effective time value is set so that the effective period ends after the period is started and the conversion control ends, and the control means is an open time corresponding to a period during which the open / close member is in the open state. A value is selected from a plurality of predetermined opening time values, and the plurality of opening time values are all equal to or greater than a predetermined time value, and the opening time value is subtracted from the effective time value. The residual time value that is the time value of the difference is a time value longer than the predetermined time value.

According to the present invention, the interest of games can be enhanced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the back component. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the lower movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining operation | movement of a 1st lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation | movement of a 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation | movement of a 2nd lower movable member. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view of an upper movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of an upper movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of an upper movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the center movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a center movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a center movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a front view of a special variation winning device. It is a top view of a special variation winning device. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of an opening-and-closing member, Comprising: (a) A closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the special variation winning device. It is a back view of a front wall member. It is a figure which shows a rear wall member, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the main-body part. It is the figure seen from the left explaining operation | movement of an opening-and-closing member unit, Comprising: (a) A closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is a figure which shows an opening-and-closing member, Comprising: (a) Top view, (b) It is a front view. (A) Front view of opening / closing member unit, (b) AA sectional view. It is a bottom view explaining operation | movement of an opening-and-closing member unit, Comprising: (a) A closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variation winning device, (a) a top view and (b) a perspective view seen from the right side. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variation winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure explaining behavior of a game ball at the time of opening an opening-and-closing member. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a process shift setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2. FIG. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process for small hitting fanfare, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process for setting transition for small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a normal process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process during normal map change, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process transition setting process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the ordinary electric power remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining a process for setting a transition process for end of ordinary figure. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the normal chart end process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the usual chart normal process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of a state suggestion display. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a count effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a round production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an interval effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an ending effect setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production | presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production | presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in the special game state in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count effect setting process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in the special game state in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the reset table of the state suggestion display in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the production button operation production processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in the special game state in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count effect setting process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the production | presentation point control process in a 3rd modification. It is a top view of the guidance | induction part in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the special variation winning apparatus in a 4th modification, Comprising: (a) Top view, (b) The figure seen from the left side. It is a figure explaining the special variation winning apparatus in a 4th modification, Comprising: (a) Top view, (b) The figure seen from the left side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the special variation prize-winning apparatus in the 5th modification. It is a reverse view of the rear wall member in a 5th modification. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the main-body part in a 5th modification. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the body part in the 5th modification, and (a) a door part is a blocking state, and (b) a door part is a permissive state. It is a reverse view of the main-body part in a 5th modification, Comprising: (a) A door part is a blocking state, (b) A door part is a permission state. (A) The front view of a main-body part in a 5th modification, (b) BB sectional drawing in a blocking state, (c) BB sectional drawing in the permissible state of a door part. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the operation state of the special variation prize-winning apparatus in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability change operation area | region switch monitoring process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the lever solenoid control process in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of the induction | guidance | derivation flow path in a 5th modification, Comprising: (a) The reverse view of a rear wall member, (b) The enlarged view of the bending part in a 1st aspect, (c) 2nd It is an enlarged view of the bending part in the aspect. It is a front view of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in a 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in a 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in a 6th modification. It is a front view of the game board in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the image on the reflective surface in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the operation state of the special variation prize-winning apparatus in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening switch monitoring process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during the big winning opening in the eighth modified example. It is a flowchart explaining the special winning opening open process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening remaining ball processing in the eighth modification. It is a flowchart explaining the small hitting process transfer setting process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit operation | movement transfer setting process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining the signal during operation of the special electric accessory. It is a figure explaining a special electric accessory release signal. It is a figure explaining the production in the 8th modification.

First Embodiment A preferred embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12. In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. On the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 to form a guide path 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition of the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32). In the game area 32, two general winning holes 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning hole is located on the lower right side of the special variable winning device 38 arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 32).

Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special figure change display that give start conditions for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). A winning device 90 having a second start winning port 97 (start winning port, start winning area) for providing a game (special figure 2 variable display game) start condition is provided. The winning device 90 includes a sorting member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls flowing into the upper inflow port 91 into the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97. The distribution member 92 is rotatable about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction, and the direction in which the distribution member 92 tilts is changed by the weight of the inflowing game ball, and the first start winning opening 36 on the left side and the second on the right side. The game balls are distributed alternately to the start winning opening 97. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32), and a game ball won in the second start winning opening 97 is in the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 32). Is detected. Further, below the winning device 90, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like.

Also, on the right part of the center case 40, there is provided an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a start condition for the second special figure changing display game. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the right. A closed state (disadvantageous for the player) is maintained in which the game ball cannot flow in almost vertically. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric fluctuation is caused by turning the upper end side to the right side by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 32) as a driving device. The game device can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 32). The normal variation winning device 37 may be awarded even in the closed state, and it may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a flow down path 615 is formed that is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates with the upper and lower sides. A game ball that has not won the normal variation winning prize device 37 passes through the flow down passage 615 and moves downward. Flow down. A guiding portion 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The guiding portion 616 has an inclined surface with the upper surface 617 descending to the left. The game ball flowing downward is received by the upper surface 617 and guided to the left where the special variable winning device 38 is present. In addition, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

The information display device 630 includes a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first special figure variable display game, and a second start memory that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game. The 2nd information display part which displays the number of these is provided. In addition, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41. The decorative special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure variable display game by the fourth symbol separately from the third special display variable display game displayed by the first information to the third symbol on the third information display unit or the display device 41. A fourth information display unit for displaying a display game is provided.

The first information display section and the second information display section are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right row constitute a first information display portion, and the upper two light emitting members in the left row constitute a second information display portion. Further, the lower one light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display portion, and the lower one light emitting member in the left row constitutes a fourth information display portion.

Each of the first information display unit and the second information display unit is composed of two light emitting members, but a design is applied around each information display unit to show that the two light emitting members are related. At first glance, it can be seen that one information display unit is composed of two light emitting members. In addition, each of the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit is composed of a single light emitting member, but the design around these information display units is designed to be understood to be independent. At first glance, it can be seen that the information display unit is composed of one light emitting member. In addition, the design around the light-emitting member has a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine so that the aesthetic appearance is not impaired. Further, the design around the light emitting member is not a sticker or the like, but is formed on a member constituting the guiding portion 616, so that labor and cost in manufacturing can be reduced.

Further, in the lower right portion of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning port) 38 that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game is arranged. It is installed. Although the details of the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described later, the open / close member 990 is closed from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) depending on the result of the special figure changing display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 990 is retracted and converted into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) that can accept a game ball flowing down the game area 32. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a special winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 990 that is driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 32) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (first special gaming state). During the small hit game state (second special game state), the game ball is easily flown into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, Game value (prize ball) is given. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and fires a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, and the general winning port 35 of the winning device 90 are obtained. It is possible to aim for a prize at the normal start gate 34, the normal variable prize device 37, and the special variable prize device 38 by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed). It has become.

In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), a special figure fluctuation display game, a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and a special figure start gate 34 that make a special figure fluctuation display game are awarded. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game as a trigger and displaying various information.

The collective display 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 fluctuation display for a special figure 1 fluctuation display game constituted by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. The game is provided with a special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 for games and various types of display constituted by LED lamps. The various displays include a special figure 1 hold display for informing the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 hold display for informing the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game. . In addition, a round display unit that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable prize-winning device), a first game state display unit that informs whether the time is short (during normal power support, during a specific game state), left A second game state display section is provided for notifying a player of a strike (normal strike) and a right strike which is advantageous to the player (a strike corresponding to the game state). Also, a third game state display unit (third game state display unit, probability state display unit) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a general-purpose variable display game A general-purpose display display, and a general-purpose hold display for notification of the start memory number of the general-purpose variable display game.

In the special figure 1 display 51, during the fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 1 changing display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result form form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 2 display 52, during the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 2 changing display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result form form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure fluctuation display game.

In the map display, during the variation time of the map variation display game, the display during the variation of the map for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the normal fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the display during normal map display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result form form identification information (normal map, normal symbol) for displaying the general map display game.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of first start memories (first hold number), which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the number of second start memories (second hold number) that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The universal figure hold display device displays the number of universal figure start memories (the universal figure hold number) that is the right to execute the universal figure display game by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units.

The round display unit turns off all the light emitting units when not in the special gaming state, and turns on the lighting state corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special gaming state. The first game state display unit (short time state notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal game state where the short time state does not occur (when the variable time shortening function is not activated), and the short time state occurs. If the lamp is on (when the variable time reduction function is activated), turn the lamp on. The second gaming state display unit (right-handed notifying unit) 57 turns off the lamp in a gaming state in which it is more advantageous for the player to be left-handed than right-handed (normally-hit), and to turn off the lamp. When a right-handed game is more advantageous to the player (right-handed), the lamp is turned on. The third game state display unit turns on the LED if the high probability state is present when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED if the high probability state is not present.

Next, the details of the game board 30 in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 constitutes a substantially rectangular plate-like game board main body 80, a front component member 600 constituting the front side portion of the center case 40, a rear side portion of the center case 40 and a game board. 30 and a rear component member 700 to which various members necessary for the device 30 are attached.

The front component member 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side into an opening 81 penetrating in the front-rear direction formed in the game board main body 80. The front component member has an annular base member 610, and various members are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is inserted into an opening 81 penetrating in the front-rear direction formed in the game board main body 80, and a peripheral wall 611 that forms a front side portion of an inner peripheral wall in a concave chamber-like space recessed rearward from the game area 32. A plate-like hook-shaped attachment portion 612 formed perpendicular to the peripheral wall 611 at the front end of the peripheral wall 611.

A portion of the attachment portion 612 that is formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 611 is formed when the front component member 600 is inserted into the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 from the front side. The back surface of the game board main body 80 is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80. Thereby, the front-rear position of the front component member 600 with respect to the game board main body 80 is set to a predetermined front-rear position. The mounting portion 612 is formed with a plurality of screw holes so that the front component member 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. Further, a part of the mounting portion 612 is disposed on the front side of the game board main body 80 and is visible to the player, and the front is decorated. In addition, the base member 610 is further formed with screw holes, screwing portions, positioning bosses, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It has become.

A regulating wall 613 is provided on the front surface of the base member 610 except for a portion where a stage portion 620, a warp flow path forming member 614, and a normal variation winning device 37 described later are arranged. This regulation wall 613 is forward of the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30) from the attachment portion 612. It is designed to extend. Therefore, by attaching the front component member 600 to a predetermined position of the game board main body 80, the regulation wall 613 positioned in front of the attachment portion 612 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is centered. Inflow into the case 40 is restricted. Thereby, the visibility of the display device 41 is ensured and the number of game balls flowing into the stage unit 620 is limited.

Also, a warp flow that forms a warp flow path for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guiding it to the stage portion 620 on the left side when viewed from the front side of the base member 610. A path forming member 614 is attached. The warp flow path forming member 614 is attached to the front surface of the attachment portion 612, and the front-rear width of the game area 32 than the attachment portion 612 (cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30 from the front surface of the game board main body 80. It is designed to extend forward by the amount of the width up to the back surface. Further, the upper end of the warp flow path forming member 614 is continuous with the lower end of the restriction wall 613 attached so as to extend further forward than the attachment portion 612 on the left side when viewed from the front side of the base member 610. It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40, A game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. This upstream end forms the inlet of the warp flow path. Furthermore, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball flowing in from the upstream end to the lower right and then guides it backward. The downstream end is opened rearward, and the game ball is guided to the left end of the stage unit 620.

The stage unit 620 is configured such that a game ball can roll back and forth, and right and left, and the left and right sides are inclined surfaces that descend toward the center, and the central part directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. In addition, although the center part of the stage part 620 protrudes upwards, it is lower than both right and left ends. A game ball that has passed through the warp channel from the left end flows into the stage portion 620 and rolls along the left-right direction. In addition, a game ball bounced below the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, an inclined surface 621 that descends forward is formed at the lowest portion located on both sides of the center portion protruding upward. Due to the inclined surface 621, the game ball whose flow-down force is weakened on the stage unit 620 is guided from the front end of the stage unit 620 to the game area 32 below.

Further, in the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, a groove-like flow path 622 that extends along the front-rear direction and descends rearward is formed at the apex of the center portion protruding upward. Is formed. The downflow path 622 is a shallow groove, and many game balls roll to the left and right without being fitted into the groove. The game ball fitted in the flow down path 622 is guided backward, flows into an inflow port (not shown), and flows into a guide channel 623 formed below the stage portion 620. The guide channel 623 is a channel that descends forward, and the downstream end is located immediately above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 and flows into the winning device 90 with a high probability.

Further, on the right side when viewed from the front side of the front component member 600, a general-purpose starting gate 34 through which a game ball can pass up and down is provided. The usual start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting a passing game ball. Further, an ordinary variable winning device 37 having a movable member 37 b is provided below the usual start gate 34. The game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is guided to the rear of the front component member 600 and flows into a discharge passage (not shown). The normal variation winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a general electric solenoid 37c for driving the movable member 37b.

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a flow down path 615 is formed that is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates with the upper and lower sides. A game ball that has not won the normal variation winning prize device 37 passes through the flow down passage 615 and moves downward. Flow down. A guiding portion 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The upper surface 617 of the guiding portion is an inclined surface that descends to the left, and a game ball that flows down the flow path 615 is received by the upper surface 617 and guided to the left. In addition, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear component member 700 includes a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess 711 that opens forward. The rear base member 710 includes a screw hole or a screw. A stop, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving the rib, and the like are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. In addition, a hook-shaped fixing portion 713 that extends outwardly perpendicularly to the side wall 712 is formed at the front end of the rear base member 710, and the rear component member 700 is attached to a predetermined rear surface of the game board main body 80. It can be fixed in position. A through hole 715 is formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The through-hole 715 allows the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710 to be visible.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface that can cover the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. Yes. The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface is on the front side, so that the image on the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710. Has been. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with the liquid crystal display device, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT, for example.

A lower movable accessory unit 730, an upper movable accessory unit 800, and a central movable accessory unit 880 are provided in the recess 711 of the rear base member 710 to form a board rendering device 44 that produces a game by operating. ing.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is disposed below the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 simulating a heel and a second lower movable member 770 simulating a heel. The first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are operable to appear on the front side of the display device 41. Further, the lower movable accessory unit 730 has a first lower portion disposed on the front side as a base portion to which a drive mechanism and various members for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are attached. A base portion 731, a second lower base portion 732 disposed in the center, and a third lower base portion 733 disposed on the back surface side are provided.

The motor 734 serving as a drive source for driving the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 has a drive shaft in the front-rear direction at the lower right portion as viewed from the front side of the third lower base portion 733. It is attached along. The lower movable accessory unit 730 is provided with first lower movable members 740 and 741 and a second lower movable member 770, which are driven by a single motor 734. The driving force from the motor 734 is applied to a first gear 735 that can rotate about an axis along the front-rear direction, and a second gear 737 that meshes with the first gear 735 and can rotate about an axis along the front-rear direction. Transmitted at the same time. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and a first drive shaft 736 for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741 extends forward on the front side. It is provided to do.

The second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and a second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward on the back side. Is provided. As will be described later, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 operate when the driving force is transmitted via the first driving shaft 736 when the motor 734 is driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise as viewed from the front side here). The second lower movable member 770 receives the driving force via the second drive shaft 738 when the motor 734 is driven in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise when viewed from the front side). Configured to work.

As shown in FIG. 6, one first lower movable member 740 includes a bearing portion 742 at the lower end portion, and this bearing portion 742 is provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 and has a rotation shaft 751 along the front-rear direction. Is pivotally supported. The bearing portion 742 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 740 can operate around the rotation shaft 751 by receiving a driving force from the motor 734. Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 is also provided with a bearing portion 743 at its lower end, and this bearing portion 743 is rotated by a rotation shaft 752 provided in the upper part of the second lower base portion 732 along the front-rear direction. It is pivotally supported. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 741 can operate around the rotation shaft 752 under the driving force from the motor 734.

The gear of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 that is pivotally supported by the left rotation shaft 751 when viewed from the front is double front and rear, and the driving force from the motor 734 by the front gear. Have come to receive. The rear gear transmits a driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741, and the two first lower movable members 740, 741 can operate simultaneously.

A gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 that is pivotally supported by the left rotation shaft 751 when viewed from the front is arranged below the bearing portion 742 and centered on an axis along the front-rear direction. Meshing with a rotatable gear 753. The gear 753 meshes with a rack gear 761 provided on an upper portion of a slide member 760 provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 so as to be slidable to the left and right with respect to the second lower base portion 732. The first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated by moving the slide member 760 left and right.

The slide member 760 is a flat plate-like member and is arranged so that the plate surface is along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. The slide member 760 is formed with an oval supported portion 762 that penetrates forward and backward and extends to the left and right, and a support shaft that protrudes forward from the supported portion 762 and is formed on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. By inserting 754, it supports so that a slide to the left-right direction is possible. Further, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760 so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to drop forward.

The slide member 760 is formed with a linear through hole 763 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The through hole 763 includes an arc-shaped portion and a linear portion extending downward from the right end of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front side. A first drive shaft 736 provided in the first gear 735 is inserted into the through hole 763 from the rear, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760.

FIG. 6A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial position. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at a connection portion between the arc-shaped portion and the straight portion in the through hole. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736. In the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through-hole 763 are aligned in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the first gear 735 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side, the first drive shaft 736 moves the linear portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 leftward. 6B, the slide member 760 slides to the left, and the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753, whereby the first lower movable members 740 and 741 rotate upward. Thus, the state appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. As will be described later, the second lower movable member 770 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 763, the slide member 760 is not pressed, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 do not operate. The same applies when returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operated state to the initial state.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 includes a rotation shaft 771 along the front-rear direction at the lower end, and the rotation shafts are the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733. It is supported so that it can rotate. Further, a linear through hole 772 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 771. This through-hole 772 includes an arc-shaped portion and a linear portion extending from the left end of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front side in the state shown in FIG. A second drive shaft 738 provided in the second gear 737 is inserted into the through hole 772 from the front, and the drive force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770.

FIG. 7A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial position. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is located at a connection portion between the arc-shaped portion and the straight portion in the through hole 772. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738. In the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through-hole 772 are aligned in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven so that the second gear 737 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes the second lower movable member 770 upward, Move the straight part. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. As described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 772, the second lower movable member 770 is not pressed and the second lower movable member 770 does not operate. The same applies to returning the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the operated state to the initial state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, when the second lower movable member 770 is rotated upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41, an effect display that emphasizes the second lower movable member 770 is performed on the display device 41. It is possible. Of course, the effect display may be performed in the same manner even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear on the front side of the display device 41. The display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and any display that emphasizes the movable member that appears on the front side of the display device 41 may be used.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the second lower movable member 770 simulating a ridge so that decoration by light emission can be performed. In addition, the letters “dealka” are also lit. These four characters are designed to emit light independently, but for “le”, the “no” part and the “le” part emit light further independently. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B and FIG. 8, only “de” and “no” in “le” can be caused to emit light, and “dere” can be displayed. Yes. In this way, it is possible to display novel information by dividing the characters, so that a novel effect can be performed. In addition, the display of “deletion” notifies that it is a dere mode which is one of a plurality of effect modes. As described above, the effect mode is notified by the display on the movable member, so that the set effect mode can be easily communicated to the player.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper movable accessory unit 800 is disposed above and on both sides of the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848 and a second upper movable member 860 simulating a tiger's hand, and these first upper movable members. In 848, the second upper movable member 860 is operated to produce an effect.

The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 801 attached to the rear base member 710, and a movable member unit 820 that is operable in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 801 and includes the first upper movable member 848. . The base member 801 is U-shaped when viewed from the front side, and an upper base portion 802 disposed above the through hole 715 and a left base portion disposed on the left side when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715. 803 and a right base portion 804 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front surface side of the through hole 715.

A guide portion 805 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the right end portion of the left base portion 803 and the left end portion of the right base portion 804. The guide unit 805 guides the movable member unit 820 along the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are respectively provided with drive mechanisms 806 for driving the movable member unit 820 up and down. Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and the arm 808 is rotated by driving the motor 807. A drive shaft 809 is provided at the tip of the arm 808. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820. By driving the motor 807, the link member 830 is operated to drive the movable member unit 820 up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base portion 841 for attaching various members, a first upper movable member 848 disposed on the front side of the unit base portion 841, and a unit base. A drive unit 850 that is disposed on the back side of the unit 841 and drives the first and second movable members, a back cover 849 that covers the back of the unit base unit 841 from the rear of the drive unit 850, and a back cover 849 And a guided member 842 guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804.

The link members 830 are rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804, respectively, and are arranged so as to extend in directions facing each other. The link member 830 includes a rotation shaft 810 extending forward along the front-rear direction provided on the left base portion 803 or a rotation shaft extending forward along the front-rear direction provided on the right base portion 804. A bearing portion 831 into which 810 is inserted is provided at one end portion, and is pivotally supported by the left base portion 803 or the right base portion 804 so as to be rotatable. The link member 830 is formed with a first guide portion 832 that is a long hole through which the drive shaft 809 provided in the arm 808 of the drive mechanism 806 is inserted, and the motor 807 is driven to rotate the arm 808. By doing so, the link member 830 is rotated up and down while the drive shaft 809 moves along the first guide portion 832.

Further, a connecting shaft 833 for connecting to the unit base portion 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided at the other end of the link member 830 facing the one end where the bearing portion 831 is provided. ing. The link member 830 is a second guide portion that is a long hole through which a support shaft 861 provided at one end of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached to cover the front side of the link member 830 can be inserted. 834 is formed, and one end portion of the second upper movable member 860 is guided and supported by the second guide portion 834.

The unit base portion 841 includes a circular main body portion 844 and a supported portion 845 extending from the main body portion 844 to the left and right. The supported portion 845 is formed with a third guide portion 846 which is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending to the left and right. The connection shaft 833 of the link member 830 can slide on the third guide portion 846. The unit base portion 841 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the drive of the motor 807. Further, an insertion portion 847 through which a drive shaft (not shown) extending rearward from the center of the circular first upper movable member 848 can be inserted at the center of the main body portion 844. The insertion portion 847 rotatably supports the first upper movable member 848 by rotatably supporting the inserted drive shaft.

The drive unit 850 includes a motor 851 serving as a drive source, a rotation drive unit 852 connected to the first upper movable member 848, and a drive arm 853 that drives the second upper movable member 860. By driving the motor 851, the rotation driving unit 852 rotates around an axis along the front-rear direction. The drive arm 853 has one end connected to a connection shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 that rotates by driving the motor 851, and the drive arm 853 swings left and right by driving the motor 851. It is like that.

At the rotation center of the rotation drive unit 852, the insertion portion 8 of the unit base portion 841 is provided.
The drive shaft of the first upper movable member 848 inserted through 47 is connected, and the drive shaft is rotated by rotation of the rotation drive unit 852 so that the first upper movable member 848 rotates. The other end of the drive arm 853 is connected to a connecting shaft 862 provided on the back surface of the other end of the second upper movable member 860, and the drive arm 853 swings left and right to move the second upper movable. The member 860 swings left and right.

Further, the back cover 849 is fixed to the back side of the unit base portion 841 so as to cover the drive unit 850. A guided member 842 is fixed to the back surface of the back cover 849, thereby fixing the guided member 842 and the unit base portion 841. The guided member 842 is a plate-like member arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction, and is guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 at the left and right ends. A portion 843 is provided.

10 to 12 show the operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800. For the sake of explanation, some members are omitted. FIG. 10 shows an initial state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end of the operating range, and FIGS. 11 and 12 show an operating state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range. In the initial state shown in FIG. 10, the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end position in the operating range. When the drive mechanism 806 is operated from this initial state and the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm 808 is rotated toward the display device 41 side, the link member 830 is rotated downward, and the movable member unit 820 is rotated. Moves downward. In the operation state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operation range, as shown in FIG. 11A, the drive shaft 809 is positioned at the lower end in the rotation range, and the link member 830 is also at the lower end in the rotation range. Is located. That is, the first upper movable member 848 forms a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 operate the first effect movable body. These constitute the first effect device.

When the driving unit 850 is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the second upper movable member 860 is close to the first upper movable member 848 side as shown in FIG. 12, the operation of moving left and right between the first upper movable member 848 and the separated state is repeated. In the state where the second upper movable member 860 is closer to the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 11A, the connecting shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 is shown in FIG. Thus, the drive arms 853 are brought closer to each other, and the second upper movable member 860 is drawn toward the first upper movable member 848 side. When the gear 855 rotates from this state, the connecting shaft 856 pushes the drive arm outward, and the second upper movable member 860 operates to move away from the first upper movable member 848.

Then, in the state where the second upper movable member 860 is farthest from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 12A, the connecting shaft provided on the back surface of the gear 855 as shown in FIG. 856 are in the most distant state from each other, and the drive arm 853 is in the state in which the second upper movable member 860 is farthest from the first upper movable member 848. When the gear 855 rotates from this state, the connection shaft 856 pulls the drive arm inward, and the second upper movable member 860 operates so as to approach the first upper movable member 848. This operation is repeated as the gear 855 continues to rotate in one direction, and the second upper movable member 860 moves left and right. That is, the second upper movable member 860 is a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive unit 850 is a second drive mechanism unit for operating the second effect movable body. These constitute the second effect device.

Further, the second upper movable member 860 is arranged so as to cover and hide the link member 830 at the initial position shown in FIG. 10 and the position after the operation shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. The operation is to be performed. By covering the link member 830 with the moving second upper movable member 860, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the link member 830 and simply operate. High concealment effect can be obtained compared with the case of covering with a decorative member that does not. Further, particularly at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 2, the link member 830 covers the player so that the player cannot see it. Thereby, in the state which is in the initial position which occupies most of a game, an unnecessary part cannot be seen from a player, and decorativeness improves.

As described above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game-related effects are controlled in the gaming machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result. Production control means (production control device 300), a first production device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) and second production device that produces and controls the game by being controlled by the production control means. An effect device (second upper movable member 860, drive unit 850), the first effect device is capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, the first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848), A first drive mechanism (drive mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, and the second effect device is capable of performing a predetermined effect operation. (Second top Moving member 860) and a second drive mechanism section (drive section 850) for operating the second effect movable body, and the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism section. It will be.

Accordingly, since the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism, it is difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts, and the effect of the effect by the operating effect device can be enhanced. Can be improved. By covering the first drive mechanism part with the second effect movable body that operates in particular, it is possible to attract the player's consciousness to the second effect movable body and effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the first drive mechanism part. A high concealment effect can be obtained as compared with the case of simply covering with a decorative member that does not operate.

The second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860) is a game in which the first drive mechanism section (link member 830) is at least in a state where the first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848) is in the initial position. So that it cannot be seen by the person. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to see unnecessary portions in the initial position that occupies most of the game, and the effect of the effect device can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable accessory unit 880 is arranged so as to surround the periphery of the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the central movable accessory unit 880 operates such that a plurality of central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 divided into four are combined in front of the display device 41. This is what makes the production.

The central movable accessory unit 880 includes a movable effect base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710. Also, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that are arranged and operated on the upper front side of the movable effect base member 881, and the third that is arranged and operated on the lower front side of the movable effect base member 881. A central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930.

The movable effect base member 881 is configured such that the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located above the display device 41. In this portion, the first rotation shaft 882 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the first central movable effect member and the operation of the first central movable effect member are guided. For this purpose, a first guide portion 883 that is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided. Moreover, the 2nd rotation axis 884 extended ahead along the front-back direction for pivotally supporting a 2nd center movable production | presentation member, and the front and rear for guiding operation | movement of a 2nd center movable production | generation member A second guide portion 885 that is a long hole penetrating through the second guide portion 885 is provided.

A drive source for operating the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 is located on the right side when viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41. An eggplant motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears and the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 are provided on the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 from the first rotation shaft 882 to the motor 886. A drive mechanism is arranged, and a back cover 896 is attached so as to cover the back surface of the drive mechanism.

In addition, the movable effect base member 881 is configured such that the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located below the display device 41. In this part, the third rotation shaft 891 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the third central movable effect member and the operation of the third central movable effect member are guided. For this purpose, a third guide portion 892 that is a long hole penetrating forward and backward is provided. Also, a fourth rotation shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and a front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the fourth central movable effect member The 4th guide part 894 which is an elongate hole penetrated in is provided. And the motor which makes the drive source which operate | moves the 3rd center movable effect member 920 and the 4th center movable effect member 930 on the left side seeing from the front side of the part located in the lower side of the display apparatus 41 in the movable effect base member 881. 895 is provided.

The first central movable effect member 900 arranged in the upper right part includes a decoration part 901 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Moreover, the 1st center movable production | generation member 900 is provided with the 1st bearing part 902 penetrated before and after the 1st rotation shaft 882 is inserted in the one end part of the 1st central movement production member 900, and the 1st center movable production | generation member 900 is 1st time. It is pivotally supported around a moving shaft 882 so as to be rotatable.

Further, in the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a fan-shaped first sector gear 903 and a second sector gear 904 centering on the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The first sector gear 903 faces the back side of the movable effect base member 881 through a through-hole 887 that passes through the front and rear formed on the right side of the first rotation shaft 882 of the movable effect base member 881. Yes. The movable effect base member 881 meshes with the gear that transmits the driving force from the motor 886 on the back side.

The second sector gear 904 is provided to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The second sector gear 904 meshes with a third sector gear 913 provided on the second central movable effect member 910 disposed adjacent to the left side of the first central movable effect member 900. As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first sector gear 903 is also transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second sector gear 904. A guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the first central movable effect member 900. The guided shaft 905 is inserted through the first guide portion 883 and is guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883 when the first central movable effect member 900 rotates. Thus, the first central movable effect member 900 can be smoothly operated.

The second central movable effect member 910 disposed in the upper left portion includes a decoration portion 911 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. The second central movable effect member 910 is provided at one end of the second central movable effect member 910 with a second bearing portion 912 penetrating before and after the second rotation shaft 884 is inserted. It is pivotally supported about a moving shaft 884 so as to be rotatable.

Further, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a fan-shaped third sector gear 913 centering on the rotation center of the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The third sector gear 913 meshes with the second sector gear 904 provided on the first central movable effect member 900 disposed adjacent to the right side of the second central movable effect member 910. In addition, a guided shaft 914 that extends rearward is provided on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910. The guided shaft 914 is inserted into the second guide portion 885 and is guided along the extending direction of the second guide portion 885 when the second central movable effect member 910 rotates. Thus, the second central movable effect member 910 can be smoothly operated.

Further, an engaging portion 915 extending backward is provided in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912. The engaging portion 915 faces the back side of the movable effect base member 881 through a through portion 888 that passes through the front and rear formed on the left side of the second rotation shaft 884 in the movable effect base member 881. Yes. And as shown in FIG.14 (b), the one end part of the torsion coil spring 889 is engaged in the back surface side of the movable production | generation base member 881. As shown in FIG. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked to a locking portion 890 formed on the movable effect base member 881, and the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable effect member 910 is biased upward. It is like that. As a result, the biasing force of the torsion coil spring 889 assists in holding the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 at the initial position, which is the upper end position in the operation range, and downward. The first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that have been operated assist in returning to the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 13, the third central movable effect member 920 arranged in the lower left portion includes a decoration portion 921 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. The third central movable effect member 920 is provided at one end of the third central movable effect member 920 with a third bearing portion 922 penetrating before and after the third rotation shaft 891 is inserted. It is pivotally supported around a moving shaft 891 so as to be rotatable.

Further, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a sector-shaped fourth sector gear 923 and a fifth sector gear 924 centering on the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided to face the lower left side when viewed from the front side. The fourth sector gear 923 meshes with the gear of the motor 895 arranged at the lower left portion of the third rotation shaft 891 in the movable effect base member 881.

The fifth sector gear 924 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The fifth sector gear 924 meshes with a sixth sector gear 933 provided on a fourth central movable effect member 930 disposed adjacent to the right side of the third central movable effect member 920. As a result, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth sector gear 923 is also transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth sector gear 924. In addition, a guided shaft 925 that extends rearward is provided on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920. The guided shaft 925 is inserted through the third guide portion 892, and is guided along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892 when the third central movable effect member 920 rotates. Thus, the smooth operation of the third central movable effect member 920 is enabled.

The fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged in the lower right portion includes a decoration portion 931 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. The fourth central movable effect member 930 is provided at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930 with a fourth bearing portion 932 penetrating before and after the fourth rotation shaft 893 is inserted. It is pivotally supported around a moving shaft 893 so as to be rotatable.

Further, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a fan-shaped sixth sector gear 933 and a seventh sector gear 934 are provided around the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The sixth sector gear 933 meshes with a fifth sector gear 924 provided on a third central movable effect member 920 disposed adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable effect member 930. In addition, a guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The guided shaft 935 is inserted into the fourth guide portion 894, and is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894 when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates. Thus, the fourth central movable effect member 930 can be smoothly operated.

The seventh sector gear 934 is provided to face the lower right side when viewed from the front side. The seventh sector gear 934 meshes with an eighth sector gear 942 provided in an urging mechanism 940 disposed on the lower right side of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The urging mechanism 940 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 941 along the front-rear direction, and includes an eighth sector gear 942. The urging mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend to the left from the rotating shaft when viewed from the front side, and is urged downward (counterclockwise direction) by an urging member (not shown). As a result, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are biased in the direction toward the initial position, which is the position of the lower end in the operating range. Therefore, the urging force by the urging mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 at the initial position, and the third central movable effect member 920 that operates upward and The fourth central movable effect member 930 is an assist when returning to the initial position.

The central movable accessory unit 880 configured as described above can be converted into the initial state shown in FIG. 14 and the operation completion state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 14, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are in the initial position, which is the upper end of the operation range, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930. Is at the initial position, which is the lower end of the operating range, and is in a state of being substantially retracted from the front surface of the display device 41. When the motor 886 is operated from this initial state, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are rotated so as to be lowered, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third central movable effect member 920 and The fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates so as to rise.

15, the decorative portion 901 of the first central movable effect member 900, the decorative portion 911 of the second central movable effect member 910, the decorative portion 921 of the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth center. The decorative portion 931 of the movable effect member 930 is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. Further, the end surfaces of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 are opposed to and close to the end surfaces of the adjacent decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931, and form a single annular shape as a whole. ing. Each of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 is made of a material that can transmit light, and the display device 41 can be visually recognized through the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931.

Next, the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 16 to FIG. A flow path 38f is provided between the flow path front wall 952 so that game balls can flow in a row. The flow down path 38f is inclined so as to go down to the left when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down in a line toward the left in a line.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the flow down path 38 f is configured by an opening / closing member 990 that can slide in the front-rear direction. The open / close member 990 protrudes forward as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18A, and is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the special variable winning device 38 (large winning port 38d), and FIG. 18B. As shown in FIG. 4, the game can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can be won by retreating backward to the special winning opening 38d. That is, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state and passes through the big prize opening 38d, and when the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state. It flows into the big prize opening. Note that when the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, there is a gap between the flow path front wall 952 but the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 19, the special variation winning apparatus 38 includes a front wall member 950 having a flow path front wall 952, a rear wall member 960 having a flow path rear wall 962, a main body 970 to which an opening / closing member 990 and the like are attached. And a cover member 979 that covers the back surface of the main body 970.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-like front surface portion 951. The front surface of the front portion 951 is arranged close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15 so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. In addition, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a lens that is decorated and partially transmits light. On the back surface of the front wall member 950, an LED (not shown) is arranged as a decoration means, and the special variable prize winning device 38 can be decorated with light. Note that the color of the light that decorates the special variable winning device 38 is a color different from the light emission color of the collective display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent collective display device 50 from becoming obscure. Further, the upper part of the plate-like front surface portion 951 is a flow path front wall 952 that forms the front side wall of the downflow path 38f.

As shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of front wall protrusions 954 protruding rearward are provided on the back surface side of the flow path front wall 952. The front wall protrusion 954 is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion whose left and right side surfaces are inclined, and is slightly upstream from the protrusion 992 in front of each of the plurality of protrusions 992 provided on the opening / closing member 990. It is provided so that it may be located in. The front wall protruding portion 954 and the protruding portion 992 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow down path 38f as will be described later. That is, it forms a contact portion with which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f can come into contact. Since the front wall protrusion 954 is positioned slightly upstream, the game ball flowing down to the left is guided backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and then further backward by the protrusion 992. The game ball can be effectively guided.

As shown in FIG. 20, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like front surface portion 951 are provided on the back surface side of the front wall member 950. The extension wall 953 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and includes a bottom face portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the downflow passage 38f, a big prize opening forming portion 953b that forms the side walls and the bottom face of the big prize opening 38d, and a big prize. A guide channel forming portion 953c for forming a guide channel 955 for guiding a game ball won in the mouth 38d, a switch mounting portion forming portion 953d for forming a mounting portion 956 for mounting the large winning port switch 38a, and a general winning port 35 are formed. And a function as a surrounding wall 953f that prevents the game ball flowing down around the special prize winning device 383e and the special variable winning device 38 from entering the inside.

A bottom surface portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the downflow path 38f is an inclined surface that is inclined to the right side when viewed from the back surface side. Further, the special winning opening forming portion 953b is inclined so as to collect the game balls that have flowed into the special winning opening 38d into the guiding channel 955. The game balls can flow into the guide channel 955 in a single line, and a large prize opening switch 38a is provided at the inflow portion to the guide channel 955. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 38d are detected by the big winning opening switch 38a and then flow into the guide channel 955. The guide channel 955 formed by the guide channel forming unit 953c is a channel that guides the game ball from the prize winning opening 38d to the back side of the game board 30. Ribs 957 are formed to guide the Further, the general winning opening forming portion 953e forms the general winning opening 35 that opens to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variable winning apparatus 38. A rib 958 is formed on the back surface of the front portion 951 to guide the game ball that has flowed into the general winning opening 35 to the rear.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the rear wall member 960 includes a plate-like rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 that forms a rear side wall of the downflow path 38f. In addition, an opening / closing member insertion portion 963 that penetrates the opening / closing member 990 through the front and rear sides for inserting the opening / closing member 990 from the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 962.

A plurality of rear wall protrusions 964 that protrude forward are provided on the front surface side of the flow path rear wall 962. As shown in FIG. 17, the rear wall protruding portion 964 is a triangular columnar protruding portion whose left and right side surfaces are inclined, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recessed portions 993 provided in the opening / closing member 990. As will be described later, the rear wall protrusion 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f. That is, it forms a contact portion with which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f can come into contact. By providing the rear wall protrusion 964 adjacent to the recess 993, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side portion of the flow down path 38f at the portion where the recess 993 is not provided, and to securely play the game ball. It is possible to meander.

Returning to FIG. 21, the guide channel 955 communicates with the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961 at the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 and the portion of the front wall member 950 facing the portion where the guide channel 955 is formed. A penetrating portion 968 penetrating back and forth is formed. Further, a switch mounting portion 965 penetrating forward and backward so as to accommodate the rear portion of the big prize opening switch 38a is formed above the guide channel 955. Further, in the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 and the portion of the front wall member 950 facing the portion where the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game ball won in the general winning opening 35 is transferred to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A through portion 966 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed so as to communicate the general winning opening channel 966 to be guided to the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

As shown in FIG. 21B, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 967 extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-like rear surface portion 961 are provided on the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960. The extending wall 967 has a different function depending on the place where it is provided, a guiding channel forming part 967a that forms the guiding channel 955, a general winning opening channel forming part 967b that forms the general winning port channel 966, It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special variable winning device 38.

The guide channel forming part 967a forms the guide channel 955 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating part 968 to the back surface side downward. In addition, a rib 969 for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end of the guide channel 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961. The general winning opening channel forming section 967b forms the general winning opening channel 966 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 966a to the back surface side downward. In addition, a rib 966b for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the rear surface portion 961.

The peripheral wall 967c is formed in accordance with the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates the front and rear formed in the portion to which the special variation winning device 38 is attached in the game board main body 80, and the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. In this case, the peripheral wall 967c is inserted into the through portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 961 positioned outside the peripheral wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. In this portion, a plurality of positioning bosses and screw holes for screwing are formed.

As shown in FIG. 22, the main body 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that coincides with the peripheral wall 967 c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 includes a rear wall portion 972 that is opposed to the guide channel forming portion 967 a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and forms the rear wall of the guide channel 955. In the rear wall portion 972, the game ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the through portion 968 is placed in a guide channel 955 at a position facing the through portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960. A rib 973 that guides to the right is formed. Further, a through portion 974 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position facing the downstream end portion of the guide channel 955 formed in the rear wall member 960 in the rear wall portion 972. The game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 955 is guided rearward by a rib 969 formed in the rear wall member 960, passes through the penetration portion 974, and is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970 to the outside of the game machine. It flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the gas.

Further, in a portion facing the downstream end portion of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the rear wall member 960, there is a penetration for guiding the game ball flowing down the general winning port channel 966 to the back side of the main body portion 970. A portion 975 is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the general winning opening channel 966 is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970 through the penetration portion 975 and detected by the winning port switch 35a, and then discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. It flows into the road.

An opening / closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports the opening / closing member 990 that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960. The opening / closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-like through portion that passes through the front and rear of the main body portion 970, can contact the upper and lower surfaces of the opening / closing member 990, and can guide and support the opening / closing member 990. A guide wall 977 is provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

An opening / closing member unit 980 having an opening / closing member 990 and an operation mechanism for operating the opening / closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body 970. The opening / closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member 981 for attaching various members, an opening / closing member 990 that can be slid in the front-rear direction, and a big prize opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening / closing member 990.

The opening / closing member unit 980 has a state in which the opening / closing member 990 protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 23 (a) and the special variable winning device 38 is closed, and an opening / closing member as shown in FIG. 23 (b). The opening / closing member 990 can be converted into a state in which the special variable prize-winning device 38 is in an open state with the member 990 retracted rearward. Note that the opening / closing member 990 can appear above the prize winning opening 38d via an opening / closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body portion 970 and an opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960.

The opening / closing member 990 is slidably arranged back and forth on a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the opening / closing member 990 is a flow path forming portion 991 that forms a bottom surface of the downflow path 38f such that the front end portion extending upward from the large winning opening 38d on the upper surface is lowered by one step. ing.

The flow path forming portion 991 is formed with a plurality of protruding portions 992 that protrude upward in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990. The upstream side surface of the protrusion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side can be smoothly guided rearward toward the recess 993. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the upstream side, so that it can be guided in the downstream direction when a game ball that flows out forward from the recess 993 comes into contact.

In addition, a recessed portion 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed backward is formed in a stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 that is lowered by one step and facing the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction. The distance between the side surface of the stepped portion forming the recess 993 and the side surface of the protrusion 992 is such that the game balls can flow down in a row at any position. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surface of the step portion forming the recess 993 is formed obliquely so that the front side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball can smoothly flow out from the recess 993 to the front. Yes.

That is, undulations such as the protruding portion 992 and the recessed portion 993 are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. As will be described later, the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 is extended by such undulations.

As shown in FIG. 24 (b), the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface that goes down to the left, and allows the game ball to flow down to the left. Sliding portions 994 extending downward are formed on the left and right sides of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. The sliding portion 994 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction, and the opening / closing member 990 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981 so that the opening / closing member 990 is moved on the holding portion 982. It becomes slidable.

As shown in FIG. 23A, the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996 that is inclined so that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. By forming the inclined surface 996 in this way, when a game ball exists between the opening / closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952 when the opening / closing member 990 is closed, the game ball is moved upward. Alternatively, the game ball can escape downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, a connecting portion 995 to which a driving arm 983 for transmitting a driving force from the big prize opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening / closing member 990 is connected is formed at the central portion of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. ing. The drive arm 983 is located below the holding portion 982. As shown in FIG. 25B, the holding portion 982 is formed with a through portion 982a into which a connection pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted, and the connection pin 983a is opened and closed through the through portion 982a. 990 is connected to a connection portion 995. As shown in FIG. 25A, the holding portion 982 is formed with guide ribs 982b that are located on the left and right sides of the connecting portion 995 and extend in the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening / closing member 990 along the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 26, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the special prize opening solenoid 38b. Further, the drive arm 983 is provided with a rotation shaft 983b along the vertical direction, and can be rotated about the rotation shaft 983b. The rotation shaft 983b is sandwiched from the front and rear by the main body 970 and the rear wall member 960 and is rotatably held (see FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the state where the special variation winning device 38 is in the closed state, the driving shaft 38g of the large winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the driving arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range. . In this state, the drive arm 983 is most pivoted clockwise as viewed from the back side about the pivot shaft 983b, and the connection pin 983a is located at the front end of the movement range.

When the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened from this state, the driving arm 983 is retracted counterclockwise when viewed from the back side with the rotation axis 983b as the center by retracting the driving shaft 38g of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Rotating in the direction, the connection pin 983a is moved backward to retract the opening / closing member 990 backward. Thereby, as shown in FIG.26 (b), it will be in the state which makes the special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 38 an open state. When the special variable winning device 38 is closed, an operation reverse to the above-described operation is performed.

27 to 30 show the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device 38. FIG. In FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a part of the front wall member 950 is seen through for explanation. A game ball that flows down from the right to the left on the downflow path 38f is first guided obliquely forward by the rear wall protrusion 964 located on the most upstream side, and flows into the flow path forming part 991 in the opening / closing member 990. Then, it is guided obliquely rearward by the front wall projecting portion 954 and is guided obliquely rearward by the projecting portion 992 of the opening / closing member 990 and flows into the concave portion 993. The game ball that has flowed into the recessed portion 993 is guided obliquely forward again by the downstream side surface of the recessed portion 993 formed obliquely toward the downstream side and the front wall protruding portion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

Thereafter, guidance in the obliquely backward direction by the front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 and guidance in the obliquely forward direction by the recessed portion 993 and the rear wall projecting portion 964 are repeated, and the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f meanders back and forth. It starts to flow down. As a result, the staying time on the opening / closing member 990 is longer than when the flow down straight without flowing up and down such as the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 in the downflow path 38 f. It will be. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 (a), a game ball always exists on the opening / closing member 990, and the opening / closing member 990 is opened even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), it is highly likely that the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 will fall and win the big prize opening 38d, and even if it is a short opening, the player wins the prize. Can give you a sense of expectation. In addition, it is preferable to secure the time required for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 for the interval time for closing the special variable winning device 38 before the short opening round. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31A, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened comes into contact with the protrusion 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990. As shown in 31 (b), it jumps and is guided in a direction away from the big winning opening 38d. Further, the bounced game ball may further move away from the big prize opening 38d by contacting the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the projecting portions 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990 are arranged with an interval through which the game ball can pass, the projecting portions 992 may fall without contacting the projecting portion 992 through this interval. Note that the opening time of the special variable prize-winning device 38 in the case of a short opening, which will be described later, is a time during which even a game ball that has bounced in contact with the projecting portion 992 or the like can flow into the big winning opening 38d. ing. Thereby, even if it is short-opening, the inflow to the big winning opening 38d is possible.

By providing the protrusion 992, the front wall protrusion 954, and the rear wall protrusion 964 in this manner, the rolling manner of the game ball when opening the opening / closing member 990 becomes diverse, and the entertainment of the game can be improved. . In addition, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the timing of inflow of the plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the big winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the big winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

In addition, although the front wall protrusion part 954, the rear wall protrusion part 964, the protrusion part 992, and the recessed part 993 were provided in the downflow path 38f as undulations, other things may be used. For example, a meandering groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as an undulation, and the game ball may flow down while meandering along the groove. In addition, a rib-like protrusion or groove is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as an undulation so that the game ball flows down while being moved up and down by the protrusion or groove when the game ball flows down. Anyway.

As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start prize port 36, the normal variable prize device 37, the second start prize port) 97) A game in which a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine includes a special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in a special gaming state. An opening / closing member that allows a game ball to be won from an opening facing upward, closes the opening in the closed state to disable the winning of the game ball, and opens the opening in the open state to allow the winning of the game ball 990 is ready In the closed state, the game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990, and the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations (protruding portions 992, recesses 993) on the upper surface. The time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the member 990 is made longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game balls during the special game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, contact portions (a front wall protruding portion 954 and a rear wall protruding portion 964) that can contact a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38 f are provided around the downflow path 38 f configured by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. Will be. Therefore, when the contact portion comes into contact, the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer, so that the decrease of the game ball in the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

Further, in the closed state, the game ball is configured to flow down from one of the left and right end portions of the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 to the other, and the undulations formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 It is formed to meander. Therefore, the time that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer, and the decrease of the game ball in the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The special variation winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction. However, in the closed state, the upper surface is in a parallel state so as to cover the large winning opening 38d, and the open state is opened. May be configured to rotate downward.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 through which game balls can flow down is provided, and to a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start prize port 36, ordinary variable prize device 37, second start prize port 97). In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of a game ball, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, A special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in a special gaming state. Game balls can be won from the facing opening, and in the closed state it projects forward and closes the opening to make it impossible to win the game ball, and in the open state it retracts backward to open the opening and win the game ball Enable In addition, an opening / closing member 990 that slides back and forth is provided, and in a closed state, the game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990, and the opening / closing member 990 has undulations (projections 992, recesses 993) on the upper surface. It is provided so that the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is longer than when there is no undulation, and the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is perpendicular to the sliding direction toward the front end. The inclined surface 996 is formed so that the thickness in the various directions decreases.

Therefore, the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations on the upper surface, and the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member is longer than when there is no undulation, so that the game ball in the special game state Can be reduced, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the inclined surface 996 is formed at the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught during closing.

In addition, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is a flat surface along the sliding direction, and the portion below the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched at the time of closing, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state (short-time operation state (general power support state)), the starting memory number, etc., any one of a plurality of variation pattern tables Select and obtain the fluctuation pattern table. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the first starting winning award port 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variation winning device 37. 37a, a start port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning port 97, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a, and a large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, these switches Is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the terminal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a and the big winning port switch 38a are the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening / closing data. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 450. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 450 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 and the information display device 630 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The first start winning opening 36 wins the second start winning opening 97, the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37 or the special variable winning apparatus 38, or flows into the out opening 30a provided at the lowermost part of the gaming area 32 and from the gaming area 32. Discharged. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning apparatus 37 or the special variable winning apparatus 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening that has been won The prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 32).

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball thrown in passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure start memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four pieces). If it is less than (), the usual figure start memory number is added (+1), and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display of the collective display device 50. Further, in the normal figure start memory, a random number value for hit determination (per random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It has come to be.

Then, when there is a general map start memory and the normal map variable display game can be started, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed, the normal map variable display game is hit and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the winning state is not the winning state, the winning judgment random number value stored in the first stored base map start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether or not the hitting of the base map variable display game is lost. Then, a process for starting the normal map change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

In addition, as a process for executing the normal variation display game, the game control device 100 is predetermined with a plurality of lighting patterns that are predetermined over a predetermined variation time on the general diagram display provided in the collective display device 50. After the normal map change display which is repeatedly displayed in the same order, the process of displaying the normal map change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is performed. The general map display is configured by the display device 41. For example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like are used as normal identification information, and after this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed by stopping the display. You may do it.

When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, the lighting pattern that is one of the first per-stop symbols to the third per-stop symbol that makes a special result form corresponding to the type of the hit is stopped. While displaying, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, a control is performed to display a lighting pattern as a result of the shift on the general map display.

Also, the winning ball to the first starting winning port 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning port 97, and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively a starting port 1 switch 36a and a starting port 2 provided therein. It is detected by the switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) is set as the first start memory that makes a start memory (special drawing start memory) based on winning in the first start winning opening 36. In addition to storing the limit, the second start memory for making the start memory (special drawing start memory) based on the winning to the second start winning prize port 97 and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). To remember. Based on the winnings to the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, and the normal variation winning device 37, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as the starting storage information, respectively. Thus, the extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The number of start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator and the special figure 2 hold indicator of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display. Is displayed. Further, the information is displayed on the information display device 630.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The jackpot determination random number value thus determined is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

When the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the special figure 1 display 51 (fluctuation display device). After performing the special figure 1 fluctuation display, the first special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is displayed. When the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the special figure 2 display 52 (fluctuation display device). After performing the special figure 2 fluctuation display, the second special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is displayed.

In addition, in the production control device 300, based on a control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a display device 41 (variable display device) or an information display device 630 corresponding to the special figure variable display game) (for example, A process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game for variably displaying numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) is performed. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game in the information display device 630, the light emitting member blinks during the variable display, and when the stop time comes, the light emitting member (lights up, blinks, goes off) corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game. Etc.). That is, the result mode is displayed by a decorative special symbol (fourth symbol) configured by the light emission mode of the light emitting member.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. A lighting pattern is displayed and processing for generating a special gaming state or a small hit gaming state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 630 also becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning port solenoid 38b, for example, to play the game into the large winning port. Control to enable inflow of spheres. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. When the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a short time state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal gaming state.

Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first stop symbol opening time (general power release time) and the number of releases (for example, 500 msec × 1), Opening time (general power opening time) of the second per stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), opening time of the third per stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms ×) 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the time-short state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be a second variation time shorter than the first variation time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display. However, each special figure variation display is not performed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 a in the first start winning prize port 36, the start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, and the start port 3 in the second start winning prize port 97. The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the prize opening switch 35a, and the big prize opening switch 38a are provided with a magnetic detection coil, and contactlessness is detected by using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. A type of magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 38 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main Process] First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35, first, processing for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and a command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 35 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 35, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the game board 30 is saved. ON (lighted) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit random number) After saving to the area (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the winning symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated on the basis of a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) for reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum Calculation Processing] FIG. 36 shows the checksum calculation processing (steps S19 and S43) in the main processing described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not been completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial Value Random Number Update Process] FIG. 37 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the small bonus symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, “Round initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the normal variation display game, and “Hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the universal variation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process. Naturally, the small hit design random number does not exist in a model without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is a gaming machine in which a random symbol initial value does not exist.

[Timer Interrupt Processing] Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 38 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) or the like is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a. Or, a prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input Processing] Next, details of the input processing (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), a switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is terminated.

Note that unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port. Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data. As a result, there is a possibility that the data has the same value. is there. In addition, the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data. is there.

[Switch Reading Process] Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S144). After that, it waits for a delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) to elapse until the second reading (step S145).

When the delay time elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step S150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt is calculated. The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S155). The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process and compared with the result of the previous reading. Although there is a method of determining whether or not there has been a change, in such a case, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that correct determination cannot be performed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output Process] Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). S164). In the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, “door / frame open” data, “security signal” data) is output to the digit / external information output port. It outputs to 136 (step S166). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, the universal display, the special display 1 hold display, and the special display 2 hold, which are various displays provided in the collective display device 50. The indicator, the universal figure hold indicator, the round indicator, and the second game state indicator are turned on dynamically.

Subsequently, various output data of external information is synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, “big hit signal 1” data, “big hit signal 2” data, “big hit signal 3” data, “big hit signal” 4 ”,“ design determination frequency signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and firing permission output data are synthesized (step S170). The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information / firing permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout Command Transmission Processing] Next, details of the payout command transmission processing (step S105) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in this embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count number in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in each of the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 1. The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes respectively.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1. Then, the subtraction result is saved in the award ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted. Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Is done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interruption, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out a prize ball. In the state, the payout command is transmitted. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, a ball lending operation, a shot ball outage error, an overflow error, a frame radio fraud occurrence, a payout ball detection switch (paid out The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormal state of a switch for monitoring a ball, an underpayment error, an excessive payout error, or the number of unpaid award balls = the number of game balls remaining ), Etc. (when not = 0).

If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. The payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

[Random Number Update Process 1] FIG. 43 shows random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211). If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is handled. A random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). Thereafter, it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

If the normal random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial value of the loaded normal random hit random number is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

If the normal symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. If the normal symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the hit initial symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221), and the loaded normal symbol random number is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S222), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random Number Update Process 2] FIG. 44 shows random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (the reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to be.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). In the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is “3”, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Next, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for DRAM refresh or the like. In addition, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) Is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as an addition value ( Step S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value (1 of the random area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number area is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated. In the case of this embodiment, on the effect random number update table, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, the type information of the random number area to be updated (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) The address of the update area is defined for the number of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Winning Port Switch / Status Monitoring Processing] FIG. 45 shows the winning port switch / status monitoring processing (step S108) in the timer interrupt processing. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is opened. Regardless of whether or not there is an illegal winning at the big winning opening, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the illegal winning prize Number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), address of winning prize switch table, information of notification timer update information (permit / update) are defined. The winning table of the winning mouth monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, a winning number counter area 2 for each switch, in addition to the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches). The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S305), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S307). The winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the number is performed.

Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the shot ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. The

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The state monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame open detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not “0” (step S314; N), the winning prize switch / state monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and a gaming machine for judging a state such as whether an error has occurred or not. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like A state monitoring based on two signals is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is “1” to “3”.

Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing from step S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing from step S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Injustice & Winning Monitoring Processing] FIG. 46 shows the fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. This fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process performed for the big prize opening switch 38 a of the special variable prize winning device 38 and the start opening 2 switch 37 a of the normal variable prize winning device 37. With regard to the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), since it is easy to perform fraud in which the open / close member is forcibly opened and a game ball is inserted and the prize ball is paid out, detection of the winning is performed. In addition to monitoring fraud.

In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the special variable prize device 38 is opened when the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is the large prize prize switch 38a, and the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is started. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the usual figure.

If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated illegal winning number is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325).

In the present embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning prize switch to be monitored for error, but the number of fraud occurrences defines a different number for each kind of winning prize switch. You can also. The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

If the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; N), a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326) and the initial value is stored in the target fraud winning notification timer area. (For example, 60000 milliseconds) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), an illegal win occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. Do. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333). If the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S334), and the fraud win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step S337, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S338). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S338).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step S338; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S339), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winning Number Counter Update Processing] FIG. 47 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning mouth switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change) Determination is made (step S352).

If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In this embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the case of this embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Game Machine State Check Process] FIG. 48 shows the game machine state check process (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitor process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not on (step S372; N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, a target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). When the target signal is on (step S372; Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S379; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S379; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S384). The status flag thus set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S387), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout Busy Signal Check Processing] FIG. 49 shows the payout busy signal check processing (step S317) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring processing. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on-determined monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S395). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interruptions.

If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (Step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). The payout busy signal check process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately. It is hard to be affected by such as.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Process] Next, details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the display of the special figure is set.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the special game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins at the first start winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the second start winning port 97, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, A game result preliminary determination is performed in advance to determine a game result based on a prize in a stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the game.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning prize switch 38a provided in the special variable winning apparatus 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed. In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening and a big hit end process are performed. A big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the process during the small hit A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed. In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “8”, a small hitting process (step A16) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. . In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed. In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and a special figure game process is complete | finished. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starting Port Switch Monitoring Process] Next, details of the starting port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a in this case), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is sent. The information indicating that there has been a prize is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the first start port which is the start port of FIG. 1 (step A103). If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36) will not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 will not win unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300. Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (first start winning opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, the start port 2 switch 37a), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port The information indicating that there has been a winning is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the second start port, which is the start port of FIG. 2 (step A111). If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

In step A113, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). After performing the special figure starting port switch common process (step A115), the process proceeds to the process of step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the third starting port (second starting winning port 97) (step A116), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when there is an input to the target start port switch (start port 3 switch 97a in this case), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is sent. The information indicating that there has been a winning is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the third starting port which is the starting port of FIG. 2 (step A118). If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning at the third starting port (step A118; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning at the third starting port (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is being shortened (medium power support is in progress) (step A119). ).

If it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is not short (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is short (step A119; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third starting port (second starting winning port 97) will not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 will not win if it is not right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than the left-handed state, but when the third starting port is won during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300. Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third start port (second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special start port switch common processing (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. The process ends.

[Hard Random Number Acquisition Processing] Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102, A110, A117) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning port). No winning information of the monitoring target starting port is set (step A131), and the monitoring target starting port among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a is set. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch (step A132). When there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A135). Of the first start port (first start winning port 36), the second start port (normally variable winning device 37), and the third start port (second start winning port 97), the start target to be monitored is selected. Existence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special Figure Start Port Switch Common Process] Next, details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch The start port signal output count, which is the number of times information related to the management device external to the gaming machine 10, is output (step A141), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A142), and the output count overflows. Is determined (step A143). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows, so that it is not saved.

Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitored start port switch is less than the upper limit value. Determine (step A145). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A145; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), update the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 or number 2) (+1) ( Step A146), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), and a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the target start opening winning flag is set. Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A150), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110, A117 is calculated as RWM. Is saved in the big hit random number storage area (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure hold information determination process (step A160).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (in the present embodiment, variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A154). And it is determined whether it is a prize to the 1st starting opening (the 1st starting winning opening 36) (Step A155). If it is determined in step A155 that the winning is not for the first start port (step A155; N), the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A155 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A155; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A156), and the RWM small bonus symbol is obtained. Save in the random number storage area (step A157). In step A158, the address of the change order flag storage area (any location from hold 1 to 8) corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is calculated (step A158), and the calculated area Then, the change order flag of the object (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) is saved (Step A159), the special figure hold information determination process (Step A160) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, and the normal variable winning device 37. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start storage that is the right to execute the variable display game is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) is a first random number value extracted based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 36 which is the starting opening of FIG. 2nd start with a predetermined number as the upper limit of various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of FIG. Memorize as memory.

[Special Figure Holding Information Determination Process] Next, details of the special figure holding information determination process (step A160) in the above-described special figure start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 54, first, a big hit determination process (step A161) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. If the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152 is corresponded. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether or not the first start port (start winning port 36) is won (step A165). If it is determined in step A165 that the winning is not to the first start opening (step A165; N), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A165 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A165; Y), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. A small hit determination process (step A166) is performed to determine whether or not. If the determination result is not a small hit (step A167; N), the stop symbol information of the detachment is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A167; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 is displayed. (Step A169), and the process proceeds to Step A171.

Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A172). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A173) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed (step A173), and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step A174).

Thereafter, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A175), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A176), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Large Winner Exit Switch Monitoring Process] Next, the details of the special prize exit switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special prize opening process is in progress (step A201). . When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S201). A202).

When the winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step A202; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205. Further, when the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting is being processed (step A203). . When the small hitting process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hitting process is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress (step A204). Since the special figure game process number does not move to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. If the small hit remaining sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205. Then, “0” is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch (step A206).

If there is no input to the big winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207) and an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214), when the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is not “0” (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216). If the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is set to the big winning prize. It is added to the mouth count number (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the big winning mouth count number is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (step A218).

When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or larger than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (Step A221). When it is not under mid-hit processing (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and when under middle hit processing (step A221; Y), the big win mouth control pointer area is small hit. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the big prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special Figure Normal Process] Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A8) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301). In step A301, if it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for the hold number total 1). Then (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is that of FIG. 1 (step A303). When it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A304). An effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, a command (decoration special figure hold number command) corresponding to the updated value of -1 is prepared.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A303 that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of special figure 2, it corresponds to the special figure 2 holding number. A decoration special figure hold number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), an effect command setting process (step A308) is performed, a special figure 2 variation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated. At this time, the special figure 2 hold number is not updated by -1, but in step A307, a command (decoration special figure hold number command) corresponding to the updated value of -1 is prepared.

In step A301, if it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started ( In step A310), if the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311). Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed. Next, “0” for the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A314), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A315), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Process] Next, the details of the special figure 1 change start process (step A306) in the above-described special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 57, first, a special figure fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), and the first special figure is displayed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information of variation start of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed. Next, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 52 ms) is saved (step A333), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Start Process] Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

As shown in FIG. 58, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure is displayed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed. Next, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 104 ms is saved (step A353), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big Hit Flag 1 Setting Process] FIG. 59 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A361), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A362). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A363), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A364). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A365) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value prepared matches the jackpot determination value.

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is a big hit (step A366; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A362 (step A367). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A368) is performed to determine.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A361. (Step A370), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not a small hit (step A369; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process] FIG. 60 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A375). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit determination processing] FIG. 61 shows the big hit determination processing (steps A161, A365, A374) in the above-described special figure hold information determination processing, big hit flag 1 setting processing, and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process (step A365) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of place. Therefore, “other than big hit (out of line)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A383).

If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process (step A365) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of place. Then, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387). If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small Hit Determination Processing] FIG. 62 shows the small hit determination processing (steps A166 and A368) in the special figure hold information determination processing and the big hit flag 1 setting processing described above. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), a small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A392).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. To do.

[Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Setting Process] FIG. 63 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). If it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination is performed. The data area is saved (step A408), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409).

These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to the hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). Also, when a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) in the special figure 1 becomes a special big winning symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol), the transition destination production mode is determined to be certain probability variation depending on whether or not the gaming state is in certain probability variation. It is determined whether to shift to the production mode, which is difficult to distinguish whether it is the production mode or the probability variation. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). If it is a small hit (step A410; Y), the special figure 1 small hit is determined. The small hit design random number is loaded from the design random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413). Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step A417), and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and an effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Stop Symbol Setting Process] FIG. 64 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination is performed. The data area is saved (step A438), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step A441), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A442). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and an effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2. The stop symbol setting process ends.

In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning opening 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special Figure Information Setting Process] Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A173, A324, A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. To do. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of the short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452). Next, the first-half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold count and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454). Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458). Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460). Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation Pattern Setting Process] Next, the details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A174, A326, and A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of step (step A474). Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is not out of step (step A474; N), a sorting process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1), Prepare (Step A478). Then, a sorting process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). (Step A484). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[Distribution Processing] FIG. 67 shows the distribution processing (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting processing. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the distribution process selects the latter half fluctuation selection table of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation group table, or the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2. For selecting the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

In this distribution process, first, the first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483). Is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2201). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are associated with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If the first data of the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distribution result is stored. The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is not an unsorted code (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) The first distribution value specified in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (step A2203).

Subsequently, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random value prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484 (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3). Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter Process.

In other words, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then determined in the previous step A2205. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number) or first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) specified in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table). Any one of the latter half variation selection table, the latter half variation pattern (the latter half variation number), or the first half variation pattern (the first half variation number) is selected from among the (variation numbers). If it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2207), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[2-Byte Distribution Processing] FIG. 68 shows 2-byte distribution processing (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2301). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach” is defined. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

If the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), 2 bytes The distribution process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is acquired. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random value prepared in step A473 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step A2304), and the calculated new random value is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A2305). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303, and thereafter Process. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305 to obtain a new value. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variation selection table defined in the selection table (the latter half variation group table). If it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit. The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 67 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 68 are basically the same, but whether the size of the random number used for the distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes. Therefore, the program instructions for calculation are different.

[Variation Start Information Setting Process] Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A327 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A499), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504). Furthermore, the change order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A506), and the change start information setting process is terminated.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure Changing Process] Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the special symbol changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set as 2000 ms. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 milliseconds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, “2” relating to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606). Further, a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (Step A607), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special design 2) (In-change signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer initial value is stored in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal. (For example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the special figure changing process is terminated.

[Special Figure Displaying Process] Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed. Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variation display game is started. (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and the big hit (step A705). If A706; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “16” or “4”) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM Is saved in the round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a big hit with a lottery (other than the big prize opening information 1 (4R probability change (surprise))), and a big hit without a round (big prize opening) When the opening information is the big winning opening information 1 (4R probability change (surprise)), it is ON if it is a big hit in the short time state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a ball and is OFF when the big hit has no ball.

After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the ordinary map variation display game and the special map variation display game. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning mouth illegal prize number area of the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared (Step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. In other words, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game. Special gaming state generating means for generating a state is provided.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725). If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the time reduction variation frequency update process (step A726), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A727). ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration command area, prepared (step A729), and the production command is set. Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it. Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the time shortening fluctuation count updating process (step A735), the production mode information check process regarding the production mode setting (step A735) A736) is performed, a remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched, and the production mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the production control device 300, thereby producing the production across modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[Time Reduction Fluctuation Number Update Process] Next, details of the time reduction fluctuation number update process (steps A726 and A735) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the time shortening fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (during a high probability state) (step A751). When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the time shortening variation frequency update process is terminated. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), it is determined whether the time is short (step A752). If the time is not short (step A752; N), the time shortening variation number update process is terminated. When the time is short (step A752; Y), the time shortening variation count is updated by −1 (step A753), and it is determined whether the time shortening variation count is “0” (step A754).

If the time shortening variation count is not “0” (step A754; N), the time shortening variation count updating process is terminated. Further, when the time shortening variation count becomes “0” (step A754; Y), a signal related to the end of the time shortening (for example, two jackpot signals are OFF) is saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal related to the end of the short-time state (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is input to the test signal output data area. Save.

Next, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A758), and the special figure game mode flag area is designated. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A759). Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is displayed. In order to turn it off, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

[Production Mode Information Check Process] Next, the details of the production mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining number of revolutions, which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display game until the change of the effect mode, is updated by -1 (step A772). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become “0” (step A773). If the effect remaining rotational speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the remaining rotation number of the effect becomes “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the remaining effect rotation speed in the RWM is acquired. Save to the area (step A677), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; Y), that is, when the state of the probability has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A782). An effect command setting process (step A782) is performed. Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining speed is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed. Next, a time shortening variation number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step A785), and an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed. Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If it is the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is terminated. To do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1] Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A791) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A792).

Next, a signal related to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) (for example, one big hit signal is ON (output with big hit + small hit), and four big hits are ON (output with big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol determination flag region is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag region is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the high probability state display. Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in a short time state The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small Hit Fanfare Mid-Process Transition Setting Process 1] Next, details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the special figure display mid-process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 1, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is designated as the special game process. Save in the number area (step A812).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (large hit + small hit is output) )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A814), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step A816), and an illegal monitoring period non-period flag is saved in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817). Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and a right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 5).
7) is turned on, the right-hand hit state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval processing] Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). Then, an effect command setting process (step A903) is performed.

After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is acquired. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906). When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), the big winning opening opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for short opening (second opening mode) is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A907), a process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening is performed (Step A909), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. If the number of rounds is not greater than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the special winning game opening timer area (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special game processing timer area. Save (Step A908), perform a process for setting a process for opening a special winning opening (Step A909), and end the fanfare / interval process.

Here, in this embodiment, 16R probability variation A (all open long), 16R probability variation B (1-4R long open, 5-16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), 4R probability variation (all short open) is set. The probability change is a jackpot in which the probability state after the end of the special gaming state becomes a high probability state, and the normal state is a jackpot in which the probability state after the end of the special gaming state becomes a low probability state. Therefore, the winning prize opening operation determination table includes 16R probability variation A data and release switching determination value “0”, 16R probability variation B data and release switching determination value “4”, 16R normal A data and release switching determination value “0”, The 16R normal B data, the opening switching determination value “4”, the 4R probability variation data, and the opening switching determination value “0” are stored in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process] FIG. 78 shows the large winning opening open process transition setting process (step A909) in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the process for setting the process for opening a special prize opening, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the process for opening a special prize opening (step A911), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A911). Step A912). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the winning mouth count area is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open process transition setting process is terminated.

[Process during opening of a big prize opening] Next, the details of the process during opening of a big prize opening (step A12) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the process of opening the special winning opening, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A1003). It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1004). If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). An interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the big winning opening is being opened. The process ends.

If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S1004). A1006), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is executed, and the big prize opening opening process is completed. To do.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the end of the special gaming state is completed. An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the time of preparation (step A1009), performing an effect command setting process (step A1010), performing a winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011), The process during opening of the big prize opening ends.

[Large Winner Exit Remaining Sphere Process Transition Setting Process] FIG. 80 shows the extra winning opening remaining sphere process transition setting process (step A1011) in the above-described process of opening the outstanding winning opening. In the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball process (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable prize winning device 38, off data for turning off the big prize opening solenoid 38b is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the big prize winning opening remains. The ball processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Large Winner Remaining Ball Processing] Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired. Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104). Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105). If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Move on to processing. If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening information is a rank-down effect system value (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect that informs that the subsequent round will be a short open round. Specifically, as the big hit pattern, 16R probability variation A (all long open), 16R probability variation B (1-4R is long open, 5-16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B ( 1 to 4R is long open, and 5 to 16R is short open), a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and at the 4th R A round continuation notification effect is executed. If the selected big hit pattern is 16R probability variation A or 16R normal B (all long open), it will be notified that the long open will continue in the round continuous notification effect, and the big prize opening will be long open also in the 5th and subsequent rounds Released. Further, if the selected big hit pattern is 16R probability variation B or 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), a rank down effect is performed in the round continuation notification effect and the short open is achieved. In the rounds after the 5th round, the big prize opening is opened with a short opening.

When the big prize opening information is not a rank-down effect system value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the winning prize opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107). When the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for rank-down effect is set (steps). A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) is performed to process the winning ball remaining ball process. Exit.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1101). A1111), setting the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the winning prize opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A1113). Thereafter, a big hit end process transition setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2] FIG. 82 shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A1121). A1122). Next, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123), and the fanfare / interval The middle process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Big Bonus End Process Transition Setting Process] FIG. 83 shows the big hit end process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A1134), and the information on the round-number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). ), Information on the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A1137), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A1138), and the jackpot end process transition setting process ends.

[Big jackpot end process] Next, the details of the big hit end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in this jackpot ending process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the current special gaming state is a high probability after the end of the special gaming state. It is determined whether the data is high probability data set when the state is reached (step A1201).

If it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1202), and if it is high probability data (step A1201; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1203). ), A probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A1204), and a command setting process (step A1205) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A1207). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1208), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A1210), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and command setting processing (step A1212) is performed. Then, special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1213), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 1] FIG. 85 shows the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above-described big hit end process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special figure low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1224). Thereafter, the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1225), the initial value (eg 100) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A1226), and the big hit ends. The setting process 1 ends.

By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 100) for the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2] FIG. 86 shows the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above-described big hit end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special figure high probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1235), the time reduction variation frequency area is cleared (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. With the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.

That is, the specific game in which the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is open for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. It serves as state generation control means.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2] FIG. 87 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the jackpot end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). .

Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal OFF are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1248), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

[Processing during small hitting fanfare] Next, details of the processing during small hitting fanfare (step A15) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the small hitting fanfare mid-process, the small hitting medium process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small-hit mid-process transition setting process] Next, details of the small-hit mid-process transition setting process (step A1301) in the small-hit fanfare mid-process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the small hit / medium process transition setting process, first, “8” relating to the small hit / medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). Next, in order to open the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315). Next, the information of the big winning mouth count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning mouth is cleared (step A1316), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting middle control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit middle process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small-hit processing] Next, details of the small-hit processing (step A16) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit middle processing, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). Is determined (step A1402). If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. The hit processing ends.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting action end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1405), and the loaded flag has a high special figure probability. It is determined whether it is a flag relating to (Step A1406). Thereby, it is determined whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. In this case, it does not matter whether or not the time-short state is in effect. If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium process is terminated. If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. A small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium process ends.

[Small hitting operation transition setting process] Next, details of the small hitting action transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-described middle hitting process will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hitting action transition setting process, a branching process (step A1411) is performed in accordance with the control pointer (control pointer during small hitting).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2”, or “4” in step A1411, the wait time (for example, 1500 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A1412). The off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated. If the control pointer is “1”, “3”, or “5” in step A1411, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the 200 msec opening and the 1500 msec closing are alternately performed, and the small hitting control pointer is sequentially set at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing. Updated. Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hitting control pointer is updated to “0”. At the end of the first 1500 msec closure (ie, when switching from the first 1500 msec closure to the second 200 msec release), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “1” and the second 200 msec release is released. The small hitting control pointer is updated to “2” at the end, the small hitting control pointer is updated to “3” at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, and the small hitting control at the end of the third 200 msec release. The pointer is updated to “4”, and the small hitting control pointer is updated to “5” at the end of the third 1500 msec closure. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec release, the small hitting control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the elapse of the 1900 msec small hitting remaining ball time and the subsequent 100 msec small hitting ending time, the small hitting The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth 200 msec opening, it is closed for 2000 msec, so the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small Hit Residual Sphere Process Transition Setting Process] Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process (step A1409) in the middle hit process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, in the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process, first, “9” related to the small hit remaining ball process is set as the process number (step A1421), and the process number is set as the special figure game process number. Save in the area (step A1422). Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1423), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The hit remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small hit remaining ball processing] Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 92A, in the small hit remaining sphere process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small Hit End Process Transition Setting Process] Next, details of the small hit end process transition setting process (step A1501) in the aforementioned small hit remaining ball process will be described. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in the small hit end process transition setting process, first, “10” related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). Next, the information on the winning prize count area is cleared (step A1515), the information on the small hitting middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 cleared) (step A1516), and the small hitting end process transition setting process is ended. .

[Small Hit Ending Process] Next, the details of the small hitting end process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure ( Step A1602). When the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N), an effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) The address of the table corresponding to the migration information is acquired (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining speed in the RAM is acquired. Save to the area (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1610). An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed. Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and an effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed. Next, a time shortening variation number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step A1614), and an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616). If it is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. In the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after performing the effect command setting process (step A1618), the process of step A1619 is performed. Transition.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure short time (short time state) (step A1620). When the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure short time (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated. If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special drawing time reduction (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621) In order to turn off the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622). Processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end processing ends.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3] Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hit end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the special figure normal process transition setting process, first, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A1631), and the process number is set in the special figure game process number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, one signal for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). Next, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1637). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Production Command Setting Process] Next, the details of the production command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 95, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2001). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status serial transmission buffer status is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005). When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2004). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is terminated. The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as “command setting process”.

[Symbol Fluctuation Control Processing] FIG. 96 shows symbol variation control processing (steps A20 and A22) in the above-described special symbol game processing, and symbol variation control processing (step B15) in the later-described general symbol game processing. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the ordinary diagram) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the variation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( A stop address and a display table 1 (variation) address are defined.

When the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14. Next, the flashing control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the flashing control timer after update is “0” (step A2105), and the flashing control timer after update is “0”. If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

If the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variation symbol number of the control target is set. Is updated by +1 within the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is not changing (step A2102; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

As the initial value of the blinking control timer saved in step A2106, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, in the fluctuation control table of the first special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer, and the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game) is defined. ) Is defined as a flashing control timer initial value corresponding to 104 ms, and a flash control timer initial value defined as a flashing control timer initial value is defined as a flashing control timer initial value. Has been. This initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the fluctuation time in the collective display device 50.

Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared in accordance with the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is set to 0 (variable symbol number upper limit determination value-1 ) Is sequentially updated in the range of In steps A2108 and A2111, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of this, a round of display is repeated.

Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the first special diagram (first special diagram variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 during-change display that is repeatedly displayed during the change display of the first special figure change-display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern eight times. Further, 2 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the second special diagram (second special diagram variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated alternately between 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 during-change display that is repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation display of the second special figure fluctuation display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. In addition, 4 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the ordinary diagram (ordinary variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 3. Therefore, the display during normal map display repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the normal map change display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

Thus, by defining the flashing control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Normal Game Process] Next, the details of the general game process (step S110) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game process timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the usual game process timer has become “0” (step B4).

When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process of setting the usual game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the usual game process number (step B7).

In step B7, if the usual game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A usual-day process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the usual game process number is “1” in step B7, a usual figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure display process is performed.

If the normal game processing number is “2” in step B7, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the normal power according to whether or not the time is short is set. Or, a process for displaying a normal diagram (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process for normal maps is performed. Also, if the usual game process number is “3” in step B7, the usual process for setting the information necessary to continue the usual process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed. Processing (step B11) is performed.

If the normal game process number is “4” in step B7, the general electric power remaining ball process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game end process is performed. If the usual game process number is “5” in step B7, the usual figure end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure process is performed.

Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15) ) To complete the usual game process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate Switch Monitoring Process] Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game is in the right-handed gaming state (for example, during big hit, during small hit, during special drawing time shortage (during normal power support)). (Step B102). When the game state is a right-handed game (step B102; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired, and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than an upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105). If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after performing the effect command setting process (step B104), the number of ordinary drawings held is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105).

If the number of reserved common charts is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general charts is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general charts is calculated. (Step B107). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and gate switch monitoring processing is performed. Exit.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[General Power Winning Switch Monitoring Process] Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the winning state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the predetermined number of opening operations. It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, when it is normal (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter is equal to or greater than an upper limit value (eg, “6”) (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the value of the action end (for example, “4”) is saved in the control pointer area during the normal game (step B205), the normal game process timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the general power prize switch monitoring process is performed. finish. In other words, if there is a public power prize that exceeds the upper limit during the normal hit state, the normal hit state is terminated at that point.

Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal map is not being reached (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. If it is determined that the ordinary power count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B204; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Normal Map Normal Processing] Next, details of the normal map normal processing (step B8) in the above-described normal game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the usual-day routine process, first, it is determined whether the number of pending drawings is “0” (step B301). If the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step B201; Y) ) Performs the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B321), and ends the normal figure normal process. If the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) ( In step B302), the winning random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability that the winning result is normal in the usual figure variation display game is normal. It is determined whether the probability of the usual figure set higher than the probability (that is, the ordinary figure low probability) is high, that is, whether the state is in the short time state (step B304).

When the usual figure is not in high probability (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the usual figure low probability is set (step B305), and when the usual figure is in high probability (step B304). ; Y) sets a lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at a normal probability of high probability (step B306). Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307). If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307; N), the value of the hit random number is set to step B305 or B306. It is determined whether it is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B308).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B307; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), In the area, the slip information is saved (step B309), the slipping stop symbol number is set (step B310), the slipping symbol information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (step B311), and the stop symbol number is temporarily stopped. Save to the symbol area (step B315). On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312) and the hit loaded in step B302. A hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol number. Save in the area (step B315).

In the case of this embodiment, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure low probability is 0/251, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure high probability is 250/251, the upper limit determination value is “251”, and the low probability lower limit determination value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”. Therefore, when the normal probability is low, the hit random numbers are all in the range of “0” to “250”. Further, when the normal probability is high, the hit random number value is “1” to “250”, and the hit random number value is “0”.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316). Thereafter, the winning random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the number of held maps 1 by one. I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the number of reserved general drawings 4 in the random number storage area per common map is cleared, and the number of reserved general maps is 1.
Decremented. Then, the normal chart transition process transition setting process (step B320) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Normal Map Normal Process Transition Setting Process 1] FIG. 101 shows the normal map normal process shift setting process 1 (step B321) in the above-described normal map normal process, and the normal map normal process shift in the below-described normal map display process. Setting process 1 (step B508) is shown. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B331), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B331). B332). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Normal Map Change Process Transition Setting Process] FIG. 102 shows a normal map change process shift setting process (step B320) in the above-described normal map normal process. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B341), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B341). Step B342). Thereafter, the normal time change time (for example, 500 ms. In the case of this embodiment, the normal time change time is common between the normal figure low probability state and the normal figure high probability state) in the normal time game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the normal map change display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and the normal map change display game changes A changing flag indicating that the change is in progress is saved in the usual change control flag area (step B345). Then, the initial value of the flashing control timer (52 ms in this case), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal display, is saved in the normal flashing control timer area (step B346), and the normal map changing process transition setting process is performed. Exit.

[Process during normal map change] Next, the details of the process during normal map change (step B9) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the process for changing the normal map, the process for setting the process for changing the normal map display (step B401) is performed.

[Normal Map Display Process Transition Setting Process] Next, details of the general map display process transition setting process (step B401) in the above-described normal map change process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the general map display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the general map display process (step B411). The number is saved in the usual game processing number area (step B412). After that, the normal figure display time (for example, 600 milliseconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal figure change display game on the normal figure display device, is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B413), (For example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and a stop flag indicating that the usual figure fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the ordinary figure fluctuation control flag area. (Step B415), and the processing for setting the transition to the normal display process is completed.

[Normal Map Displaying Process] Next, details of the general map displaying process (step B10) in the above-described general map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, in the processing for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (hit information or missed information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B508) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information (for example, “0”). ”,“ 2 ”, or“ 4 ”) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (step B505). Next, a public power open time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B506). After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

[Normal Process Transition Setting Process] FIG. 105 shows a normal process transition setting process (step B507) in the above-described normal map display process. In this normal process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B511), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B512). Thereafter, a test signal output data includes a signal relating to the hit of the normal symbol display game (for example, a normal signal per normal symbol is ON) and a signal relating to the start of normal electric operation (eg, the normal electric accessory 1 active signal is ON). In the area (step B513), in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid, the on-data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B514).

Further, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the number of winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period is stored. The information on the illegal prize amount area is cleared (step B516). Then, a flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Processing during a normal map] Next, the details of the process during a normal map (step B11) in the above-mentioned general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the process for the normal map, first, the control pointer for the normal map is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded control pointer for the normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer during the normal map is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal operation switching setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during the normal map. Also, if the value of the control pointer during normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the process shifts to normal operation without performing the process of updating the normal process control pointer area by 1 in step B603. A setting process (step B604) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.

[Normal Electricity Operation Transition Setting Process] FIG. 107 shows the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described normal process. The general electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer (medium control pointer per normal figure). I am doing so. In this ordinary power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. Is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B612), and the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B613) to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c. End the process.

On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B614 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time that is the open time is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B614), and the ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B615). End the normal power operation setting process.

On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “4”, the process proceeds to step B616 to complete the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, so that the process number is “4”. Is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B617), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B619). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B619), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, 200 msec is saved as the wait time in step B612, 1700 msec is set as the normal power release time in step B614, and 600 msec is saved as the general power remaining ball processing time in step B618. . Further, when the normal symbol stop symbol is “winning symbol 1”, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. In Step B506, “500 milliseconds” is acquired as the open time of the public power. Therefore, after the elapse of the display time of 600 milliseconds, the ordinary power open time is “500 milliseconds”, so the ordinary power (ordinary variable winning device 37) is opened for 500 milliseconds, and thereafter the control pointer during normal drawing is “4”. Therefore, 600 msec of ordinary electric ball remaining time is set. Also, if the normal symbol stop symbol is “winning symbol 2”, “2” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. In Step B506, “1700 msec” is acquired as the open time of the public power. Therefore, after the display time of 600 milliseconds elapses, the power transmission release time is “1700 milliseconds”, so the power transmission is released for 1700 milliseconds, and thereafter, the control pointer is “2” during the normal map, so the weight of 200 milliseconds The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to “3” during the normal map, so that the electric power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer is updated to “4” during the normal map for 600 msec. The ordinary power remaining ball processing time is set. Also, if the normal symbol stop symbol is “winning symbol 3”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. In Step B506, “1700 msec” is acquired as the open time of the public power. Therefore, after the display time of 600 milliseconds elapses, the power transmission release time is “1700 milliseconds”, so the power transmission is released for 1700 milliseconds, and then the control pointer is “0” during the normal time, so the weight of 200 milliseconds The time is set, and then the normal control pointer is updated to “1” during the normal map, so that the ordinary power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to “2” during the normal map for 200 msec. The waiting time is set, and then the normal control pointer is updated to “3” for the normal map, so that the public power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer for the normal map is updated to “4” for 600 msec. The ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing time is set.

[Penden Residual Sphere Process] Next, the details of the general power remaining sphere process (step B12) in the above-described ordinary game process are described. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), in the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, an end process shift setting process (step B701) is performed.

[Regarding the end processing shift setting process per ordinary figure] Next, the details of the end process transition setting process (step B701) per normal figure in the above-described ordinary electric power remaining ball process will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), in the universal figure end process transition setting process, first, a process number “5” related to the universal figure end process is set (step B711), and the process number is set to the normal figure game. Save in the process number area (step B712).

Thereafter, the ordinary ending time (for example, 100 milliseconds) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 1 operation signal is OFF). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the normal pointer control pointer area is cleared (step B716), and the normal drawing end process transition setting process is terminated.

[Ending process per ordinary figure] Next, details of the end process per ordinary figure (step B13) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Normal Map Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2] Next, details of the normal map normal process shift setting process 2 (step B801) in the above-described normal chart end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, a process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B 811), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (during fraud monitoring period) is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Segment LED Editing Process] Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator, the special figure 2 hold indicator, the universal figure hold indicator, the first game state display unit, the second game state display unit, and the round display provided in the collective display device 50 Settings relating to driving of segment LEDs constituting the unit are performed.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether it is the output on timing depending on whether the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In this embodiment, when bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on, and a blinking cycle of 128 milliseconds is created. If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the general figure hold number display table 1 is set out of the general figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure hold indicator is defined. (Step S503) If it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N), the general-purpose hold number display table 2 is set (Step S504). Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is acquired from the set number of reserved general map display table and saved in the segment area of the general map reserved display (step S505). In this embodiment, as long as the number of reserved drawings is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which of the reserved drawings display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506). If it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the number of the special figure 1 hold on which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Among the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set ( Step S508). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number display table is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display (step S509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510). If it is the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step S511). When the output on timing is not reached (step S510; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step S510). S512). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold display (step S513). Further, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515). ).

Next, the gaming state display table 1 in which the display state in the second gaming state display unit 58 that lights up when the shortening state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the shortening state is set (step S516), and the gaming state display number is set. Display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display section (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first game state display unit composed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal times and turned on during special drawing hours (during normal power support). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit for notifying that the game state is more advantageous than the left hand is advantageous is set (step S518). Display data corresponding to the status display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game status display section (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the second game state display unit composed of one LED is turned off when the player is normally hit (left-handed), and when the player is right-handed (in the case of this embodiment, during the big hit, during the small hit, during normal power support) ) Is lit.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring process] Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interruption process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is started or ended.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether the magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by one (step S602), and the timer It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of this embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 milliseconds or longer.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, 8 interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the time of the fraud notification ends or is illegal from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Here, “Step S601; N” → “Step S608” → “Step S609” → “Step S610; Y” → “Step S611” → “Step S612” → “Step S613; Y” is the normal route.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring process] Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, in the case of board fraud, the on-board radio sensor 62 is detected once. At this point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, −1 unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is “0”. Update (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If the notification is not made, a command for terminating the board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step S707), and a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S708). It is determined whether it matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step S709).

When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared board radio fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area (step S710), and the production command A setting process is performed (step S711), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Here, “Step S701; N” → “Step S705” → “Step S706; Y” → “Step S707” → “Step S708” → “Step S709; Y” is the normal route.

[External Information Editing Process] Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) are displayed. Based on this, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, in the external information editing process, first, when a glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N), and when a body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N). The off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. . On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally transmitted. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 ( Step S807). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the main process is started by clearing the RAM, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808). When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step S808; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Move on to processing. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S810 is not performed without performing the process of step S809. Transition.

If a magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), a panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), a frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), When the electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the big prize opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON signal of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( In step S816, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the process proceeds to step S818. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither the magnet fraud occurs (step S810; N), the board radio wave fraud does not occur (step S811; N), the frame radio wave fraud does not occur (step S812; N), and the ordinary electric power fraud does not occur. (Step S813; N) If the winning prize fraud is not occurring (Step S814; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S815). Transition to processing.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal editing process (step S819) for editing a winning signal at the start opening is performed. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S820). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S821).

When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is “0” (step S821; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area. In step S822, the external information editing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not “0” (step S821; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on-data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S821). S823), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main Prize Ball Signal Editing Process] Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) in the external information editing process described above will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) Processing to output to the device.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, unless the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is “0” (step S833).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by −1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area has a main prize ball. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is selected from the time of the main prize ball signal being on (for example, high level) (for example, 128 milliseconds) and the time of the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 milliseconds). The on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is “0” (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0” (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. A main prize ball signal is output every time. Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main winning ball number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is sent), and updates ( The main prize ball signal is output for the number of output times set. For the main award ball signal output for each schedule, the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, so that the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payments. In addition, even if a winning is made during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc. Even if the payout is made after the big hit, the Hallcon (Hall Computer) is accurate by the main winning ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting Port Signal Editing Process] Next, details of the starting port signal editing process (step S819) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843).

If the start port signal output count is not “0” (step S843; N), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (step S844), and the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the time of the ON state (for example, high level) of the start port signal (for example, 128 milliseconds) and the time of the OFF state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 milliseconds). It is an on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. If the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843; Y). In step S848, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0” (step S842; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). Here, the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0”. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, an effect in the game and a control in the effect control device 300 that controls the effect will be described. 117 and 118 show an example of effects in the special game state. Here, a case where a 16R probability variation B big hit including a short opening occurs is shown.

After the big hit result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), a fanfare effect corresponding to the big hit type is performed, and then a round game is started. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the display device 41, a round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, a symbol display 41b for displaying a jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game, and a right-handed instruction for instructing a right-hand hit A display 41c and an acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls acquired by the long open are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), when a game ball wins a special variable winning device 38 in a round that is long open and wins a winning ball, the winning ball number is displayed as a winning ball number display 41e. Is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and an interval is reached, an interval effect is performed as shown in FIG. 117 (d). Here, since the next round is also long open, an interval effect for long open is performed.

In addition, when the round game progresses and the mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected, the mode transition is performed as shown in FIG. 117 (e). A selection screen 41f is displayed. In this mode transition selection screen 41f, a normal mode that constitutes the first mode and a delay mode that constitutes the second mode can be selected, and the player operates the effect button effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to display a cursor imitating a finger. Select by moving.

In addition, in the round interval effect that may be short-opened from the next time, that is, the interval effect after 4R ends here, a round-continuous effect 41g that informs whether or not long-opening continues after the next time is performed. . In this round continuation effect 41g, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the characters “short” and “long” blink alternately, and the result is indicated by the finally lit character. Since it is 16R probability variation B, it is reported that the short opening is achieved. Further, when it is informed that the short opening will occur, a promotion effect 41h that prompts the user to aim at the special variable winning device 38 is performed as an interval effect as shown in FIG. 118 (b). For example, when the big hit type is 16R probability variation A (all long open), in the round continuation effect 41g, it is notified that the “long” character is lit and long open.

As shown in FIG. 118 (c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in a round with a short opening. Further, an emphasis effect 41i is emphasized to emphasize that the special variable winning device 38 is open. This emphasis effect 41i is displayed as if light is emitted from the special fluctuation winning device 38. The special variation winning device 38 includes decoration means for performing decoration by light emission, and the light emission timing, light emission intensity, light emission color, and the like are associated with the light emission mode by the decoration means and the display mode of the emphasis effect 41i. It may be synchronized with or may not be synchronized.

In addition, when a round with short opening is started, a short opening winning game ball number display 41j indicating the number of winning balls acquired by short opening, separately from the acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of winning balls acquired by long opening. Is displayed. The round number display 41a displays the remaining number of releases. Here, since there are 12 remaining rounds including the round currently being executed and each round is released once, it is displayed that the remaining 12 rounds are released. Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), when the round with short opening ends and the interval time comes, the promotion effect 41h is continued, but the emphasis effect 41i that emphasizes that the special variable winning device 38 is open is Once finished and the next round is started as shown in FIG. 118 (e), the emphasis effect 41i is resumed.

When the final round is completed, an ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 118 (f) and 118 (g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (f), an acquired game ball number display 41j indicating the number of prize balls acquired by short opening is displayed on the acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls acquired by long opening. An effect in which the value is added is performed, and as shown in FIG. 118 (g), a total number display 41k is displayed for displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state.

In the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting a probability state after the end of the special game state, is performed. The contents of this state suggestion display are different depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and (1) to (1) to depending on the probability state after the end of the special gaming state as shown in FIG. The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. When the normal mode that constitutes the first mode is selected as shown in FIG. 119 (a), only the character (1) is selected when the high probability state is entered, and (2) when the low probability state is entered. Only characters) are selected. In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), when the deletion mode that constitutes the second mode is selected, the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the selection rate according to the probability state. It has become. Note that the probability state may be suggested not only by the character image but also by character information such as words.

[Main Processing] In the gaming machine of the present embodiment to perform the above-described effects, the main process shown in FIG. 120 and a timer interrupt process (not shown) are performed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300. . As shown in FIG. 120, in the main processing, first, processing at the start of the program is performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interruption process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect contents is performed.

Then, hall / player setting mode processing is performed for accepting operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for editing settings and control for drawing commands. ) To set the end of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board rendering device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Received Command Check Process] FIG. 121 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception Command Analysis Processing] FIG. 122 shows reception command analysis processing in the above-described reception command check processing. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command for an operation related to a small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command and an error command. (Step C241). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243; Y), the pre-read symbol command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetched symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetched variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. Pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) for which the special figure fluctuation display game has not been executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of the change pattern (or what kind of variation pattern), the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a different manner from the normal display, or the display device 41 is rendered. This is an effect such as display. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing a change pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched in advance, and from the game control device 100 at the start winning prize It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Single-shot Command Processing] FIG. 123 shows single-shot command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information related to the model set in the game control apparatus 100 (step C261). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing for rewriting internal information with model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and single command processing is performed. Exit.

If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), whether or not the MODE corresponds to a RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determination is made (step C263). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Furthermore, scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE returns a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been recovered from the power failure without initialization. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C265). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect upon power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo processing is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the state of the P machine (pachinko machine) is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and the customer waiting scenario data is set to perform the customer waiting effect.

If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in FIG. 1 suspension (step C269). If the MODE is on the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), a special figure 1 hold information setting process is performed to display a decoration start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41. (Step C270), the single command processing is terminated. When it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271). If the MODE is on the special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), a special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing a process of displaying the decoration start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C272), the single command processing is terminated. That is, the production control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decoration start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

In step C271, if the MODE is not the special figure 2 suspension (step C271; N), it is determined whether the MODE is probability information (step C273). If MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not probability information in Step C273 (Step C273; N), it is determined whether the MODE is error / invalid (Step C275). If the MODE is error / illegal (step C275; Y), an error / illegal setting process for performing corresponding processing such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE is not an error / incorrect at step C275 (step C275; N), it is determined whether the MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing effect mode switching processing is performed (step C278), and the single command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not effect mode switching in Step C277 (Step C277; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a symbol stop (Step C279). If MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single command processing is terminated. If MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In determining whether the command is normal, it is determined, for example, whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a special figure that is currently changing.

If the command is not normal (step C280; N), the single command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C281). If all symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). The single command processing is terminated. Thereby, the change display of the corresponding decorative special figure change display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state. In addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Prefetch Symbol Command Processing] FIG. 124 shows prefetch symbol command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this pre-read symbol command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301). If the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetched symbol-related command relates to special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. 1 is saved in the prefetch symbol command area (step C302), a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetch symbol command processing is terminated.

If the latest hold information is not special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, if the received prefetched symbol-related command relates to special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. The special drawing 2 prefetched symbol command area is saved (step C303), the prefetching variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetched symbol command processing is terminated. The reason why the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Prefetch Variation Command Processing] FIG. 125 shows the prefetch variation command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this prefetch fluctuation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetch fluctuation command reception is awaited (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that reception is awaiting. If the prefetch fluctuation command reception is not waiting (step C311; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait is in progress (step C311; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

Thereafter, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the prefetch fluctuation command (prefetch fluctuation pattern command) received from the game control apparatus 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control apparatus 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) for setting a prefetch variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of retained symbols in the latest pending information is performed (step C313), and information on the special type of start memory corresponding to the prefetch variation command received this time A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set in accordance with the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Further, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-in-prefetch conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C316).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of prior judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game The determination result may differ depending on the determination of time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the pre-reading notice effect without being influenced by the number of holds at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of holds. For example, there is a possibility of a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation without reach and a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation. It is converted into MODE divided according to matters to be considered in the setting of the prefetching notice effect, so that the process of the prefetching notice effect can be performed easily and reliably.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter-half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holds at the time of determination. However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects of the same type of reach, such as the case where the final stop symbol is set to the stop that stops one frame before the reach symbol, the stop that stops one frame ahead, and the winning case. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number and reducing the processing load such as the check in the pre-reading notice effect processing.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317). If neither MODE nor ACT after conversion is other than 0 (step C317; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated because of an abnormal command value. On the other hand, when the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318), and MODE is set. And pre-read command consistency check processing (step C319) for determining whether the combination of ACT and command (command combination) is normal.

If the command combination is not normal (step C320; N) as a result of the prefetch command matching check process (step C319), the prefetch variation command process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C321) for lottery execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed to determine whether a prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

When no pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C322; N), the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C322; Y), is the prefetching notice effect that is generated (that is, the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C321)) immediately started? Is determined (step C323). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. An effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice effect that is performed during the execution of a special figure fluctuation display game, which produces a specific effect or reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during the display, a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the current time, and the like. The timing of starting the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately is that the special figure fluctuation display game is ended if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. Applicable timing.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure change display game that executes a prefetch notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected prefetching notice effect is set (step C324), and the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.

[Symbol Command Processing] FIG. 126 shows the symbol command processing (step C240) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this symbol command processing, first, a special symbol type (either special graph 1 or special graph 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C351), and a symbol type corresponding to a combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352), and the symbol-type command processing ends.

The symbol type is a category of symbols such as outlier symbol, 16R probability variable A big hit symbol, 16R probability variable B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R normal variable big hit symbol, 4R probability variable big hit symbol, small hit symbol, etc. Associated with data. Since the ratio of symbols varies between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to MODE data from a plurality of symbol type setting tables. And the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable Command Processing] FIG. 127 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

If this special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. When the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the symbol type are determined. It is determined whether they are inconsistent (step C363).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a symbol category. For example, the symbol type includes, for example, an off symbol, 16R probability variation A big hit symbol, 16R probability variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R probability variable big hit symbol, small There are winning designs. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is the same as when the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A big hit symbol is received although the variation command (variation pattern command) of the deviation is received. It means a combination (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type) that conflicts with the above.

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, variation effect setting processing for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, during the special map change, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit or during a fanfare, etc.). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by −1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process is terminated.

[Variation Effect Setting Processing] FIG. 128 shows the variation effect setting processing (step C365) in the above-described variation command processing. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code and special figure type and the presenting mode is set (step C382). In addition, since it is a fluctuation without reach, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and there is no need to particularly refer to the symbol type here. The production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time reduction mode, a latent mode, and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different are provided.

Next, referring to the first-half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first-order notice allocation group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effects that appear during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of holds. Thereafter, a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice allocation group table (step C386).

On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, presentation mode and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. The lottery for the advance notice appearing is performed (step C386).

Next, the notice effect of the second half change is drawn. Note that the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special combination of symbols) in which a display area excluding a specific area out of a plurality of display areas of the special figure is a big hit) Is a variable display in a state in which the variable is displayed only in a specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the second half notice allocation group table address corresponding to the ACT is obtained by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

Thereafter, the contents of the variable effects corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effects corresponding to the notice lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the variation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure variation display game are determined. Further, stop symbol setting processing for determining a stop symbol with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect etc.) of the special symbol variation display game and the notice content is performed (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the fluctuating effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). With these processes, it is possible to execute effects and notices in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to decrease the decoration start memory display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

Then, a sound number that is a BGM number and a decoration number that is a number indicating the type of effect produced by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C396), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display setting is performed (step C397). Furthermore, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the fourth symbol variation display setting corresponding to the special symbol type is set. (Step C398) and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

[Big Hit System Command Processing] FIG. 129 shows the big hit system command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hitting fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). When MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare display image corresponding to the type of jackpot or the jackpot is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set during fanfare. After setting (step C403), the big hit command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. If the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number-of-rounds display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set to the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting an effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and a big hit System command processing ends. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round.

When the MODE is an ending (step C410; Y), for example, when the high probability state is reached after the special gaming state ends, the big hit ends such as setting screen information for informing that the high probability state is set. Ending effect setting processing for setting screen information corresponding to a later gaming state is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set to ending (step C412), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. If MODE is not an ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether or not the received command is a big winning mouth count command based on winning in the special variable winning device 38.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated. When MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to winning in the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

[Count Effect Setting Processing] FIG. 130 shows count effect setting processing (step C414) in the above-mentioned jackpot command processing. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the openable time is a short open round with a predetermined open time or less (step C421). In the present embodiment, the short open round has an openable time of 0.2 seconds, and the long open round has an openable time of 29 seconds.

If it is not the short open round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long open round, the acquired game ball number counter is updated based on the big winning count command (step C422), and the acquired game ball number counter is updated. The display setting of the acquired acquired game ball number display 41d is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process is ended. The acquired game ball number counter counts the number of winning balls to be paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the long open round. In step C422, the number of winning balls to be paid out is updated based on the winning. In step C423, the updated value is displayed.

If it is a short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the big prize opening count command (step C424), and the short opening acquisition game ball based on the short opening pattern counter is updated. The display setting of the number display 41j is performed (step C425), and the count effect setting process is ended. The short opening pattern counter counts the number of winning balls to be paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening round. In step C424, the number of winning balls to be paid out is updated based on the winning. In step C425, the updated value is displayed.

As a result, the number of winnings in the special variable winning device 38 in the long opening and the number of winnings in the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening are separately counted and displayed. That is, the effect control device 300 has a winning determination means for determining whether the winning to the special variable winning device 38 is a first opening mode (long opening) or a second opening mode (short opening). Eggplant. Further, the effect control device 300 determines the number of winning balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the first opening mode (long opening) and the second opening mode (short opening) based on the winning determination by the winning determining means. Counting means for separately counting the number of winning balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in FIG.

[Fanfare Effect Setting Processing] FIG. 131 shows the fanfare effect setting processing (step C402) in the above-described jackpot command processing. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command is a fanfare command corresponding to any of 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal A, or 16R normal B.

If ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431; Y), the number of big hits is updated by +1 (step C432), and the display contents of the big hit fanfare effect are determined based on the probability state and the number of big hits (step C433). The number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on a normal gaming state that is not a high probability state or a short time state. That is, the so-called continuous number of times is counted. Thereafter, the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined content is performed (step C434), and it is determined whether the big hit includes a short opening (step C435). When short opening is not included (step C434; N), that is, when all rounds are long opening, hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. If short opening is included (step C434; Y), short opening big hit information is set (step C436), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. .

If the ACT is not a big hit fanfare (step C431; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to 4R probability change (surprise accuracy). When ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a hit from a continuous effect that is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

If it is not a win from the continuous effect (step C438; N), display setting of the sudden-specific effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C439), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect is set. The setting process ends. When the 4R probability change in the low probability state becomes a high probability state after the special gaming state, the rush-specific effect corresponding to the probability state performs an effect that informs or suggests that effect. In addition, when the 4R probability change occurs in the high probability state, the high probability state continues even after the special gaming state, so that an effect of notifying or suggesting that effect is performed.

If it is a win from a continuous effect (step C438; Y), a random effect to be executed is selected by lottery from the sudden effect patterns related to the current changing effect (continuous effect) (step C440) and determined. The display setting of the surprise effect is set (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the case of 4R probability change from the continuous performance, the performance related to the continuous performance is performed even in the special game state. In the case of 4R probability variation, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

If the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C437; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to the small hit. If ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. If the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether the winning is from a continuous effect that is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C443). ).

If it is not a win from the continuous effect (step C443; N), the display setting of the small hit exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C444), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare is set. The effect setting process ends. In the case of a small hit, since the probability state does not change before and after the small hit, the small hit exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state performs an effect that informs or suggests that the probability state when the small hit occurs is maintained.

If it is a win from a continuous effect (step C442; Y), a small hit effect to be executed is selected by lottery from the small hit effect patterns related to the current changing effect (continuous effect) (step C445), Display setting of the determined small hit effect is performed (step C446), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the case of a small hit from a continuous effect, an effect related to the continuous effect is performed even in the special game state.

In the case of 4R probability change or small hit from the continuous performance, when the 4R probability change or small hit is derived (at the end of the special figure change display game that becomes a surprise or small hit), the result mode is not clearly shown. An effect is shown to indicate which is in a special gaming state based on probability change or small hits. For example, an effect in which an enemy character and a teammate character fight is performed as a continuous effect, and when the result mode is derived, the battle is not yet settled. Then, in the special game state, in the case of 4R probability change, an effect that the ally character wins (surprise effect) is performed, and in the case of a small hit, an effect that the enemy character wins (small hit effect) is performed.

[Round Effect Setting Process] FIG. 132 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this round effect setting process, first, display setting for a right-handed instruction is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether the game state is a special game state based on a small hit or a sudden probability (4R probability variation) (step C462).

If the special gaming state is based on the small hit or the odds (step C462; Y), the display setting of the small hit / probable round effect is performed (step C474), and the process proceeds to step C475. Further, when the game state is not a special game state based on the small hit or the probability (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and the short open big hit information set in the case of the big win including the short open round It is determined whether there is any (step C464).

When there is no short-open big hit information (step C464; N), that is, in the case of a special game state with only a long open round, the display setting of the number of rounds is performed (step C465) and the round effect display setting of the long open pattern (Step C466). Next, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the long open pattern, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, are set (step C467).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the mode transition selection round is a mode in which a notification mode at the end of the special gaming state or an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state can be selected (step C468). If it is not the mode transition selection round (step C468; N), the round effect setting process ends. If it is a mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process ends.

On the other hand, when there is short-open big hit information (step C464; Y), that is, in a special game state including a short open round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value that becomes a short open round (step C470). ). If the number of rounds is not a predetermined value that is a short open round (step C470; N), that is, if the round is a long open round, the process proceeds to step C465.

If the number of rounds is a predetermined value that becomes a short open round (step C470; Y), that is, if it is a round that becomes short open, the round effect display setting of the short open pattern is performed (step C471), The remaining number of releases is calculated from the number upper limit information and the number of rounds (step C472). Then, the display setting of the remaining number of times of opening that is the number of times of opening by short opening is performed (step C473), and the display setting of the emphasis effect that prompts the player to aim for winning the special variable winning device 38 is performed (step C475). Thereafter, a sound number that is a BGM number based on the emphasis effect, a decoration number that is a number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp, etc. are set (step C476), and the round effect setting process is terminated.

That is, in a round with a short opening, a small hit with a short opening, or a round with 4R probability variation, an effect different from the round with a long opening is performed. As described above, the special variation winning device 38 makes it easy for the game ball to stay in the opening / closing member 990, and even if it is short open, it is possible to aim for winning. Therefore, emphasis is given to prompt the player to aim for winning. Production 41i is performed.

[Interval Effect Setting Process] FIG. 133 shows the interval effect setting process (step C408) in the jackpot command processing described above. In this interval effect setting process, first, a sound number which is the BGM number of the long opening interval, a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, etc. are set (step C481), and a big hit including a short opening round In step C482, it is determined whether there is short open jackpot information that is set.

When there is no short-open big hit information (step C482; N), that is, in the special game state of only the long open round, the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the long release interval as shown in FIG. 117 (d) is set. Further, when there is short open big hit information (step C482; Y), that is, in a special game state including a short open round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). The predetermined value here is the last round number that becomes long open, and is 4 in this embodiment.

When the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, when it is a round that will be short-opened from the next time, the display setting of the round continuation notification effect is performed (step C484), and BGM based on the round continuation notification effect Is set to a sound number that is the number of the sound, and a decoration number that is a number indicating the type of effect produced by the decoration lamp (step C485), and the interval effect setting process is terminated. Thereby, the round continuation notification effect as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B is set.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not a predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486). If the number of rounds is not greater than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the next round is a long opening, and the long opening interval remains set.

If the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), the display setting of the short opening interval is set (step C487), and the sound number that is the BGM number of the short opening interval, the decoration lamp, etc. A decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect, is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, a short opening interval as shown in FIG. 118 (d) is set. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed, but the enhancement effect 41i is not performed. However, the emphasis effect 41i may be performed as in the round, or the emphasis effect dedicated to the interval may be performed.

[Ending Effect Setting Process] FIG. 134 shows an ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-mentioned jackpot command processing. In this ending effect setting process, first, the jackpot type information, which is information of the jackpot type that triggered the occurrence of the special gaming state this time, is loaded (step C491), and the jackpot type information and the selection rate in the first mode ( The state suggestion display is set from FIG. 119 (a)) (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a mode transition flag (step C493). There are a first mode and a second mode in the production modes after the end of the special game state, and the player can select them. The first mode and the second mode are effect modes in which the contents of the state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting a probability state, and the effects of the special figure variation display game are different. This effect mode can be selected on the mode transition selection screen 41 f displayed in the mode transition selection round, and the player makes a selection by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. When the player selects the first mode, the mode transition flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode transition flag is set.

When there is no mode transition flag (step C493; N), that is, when the first mode is set, the routine proceeds to step C495. In this case, the state suggestion display set in step C492 is displayed. When there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), that is, when the second mode is set, a state suggestion display based on the selection rate in the second mode (see FIG. 119 (b)) is set ( Step C494) and the process proceeds to Step C495.

Thereafter, the total number of acquired game balls is calculated from the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter (step C495), and display setting of the addition effect based on the total acquired game ball number is performed (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), the short opening big hit information is reset (step C498), and the ending effect setting process is ended. Through the above processing, the state suggestion display 41m corresponding to the effect mode selected by the player is displayed at the end of the special game state, and the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is displayed as the total number display 41k. .

FIG. 135 shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIGS. 135A to 135C, a right-handed instruction display 41c for instructing right-handing may be displayed so as to flow from the left to the right of the display screen. In this case, the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow at a position that does not overlap with the symbol display 41b for displaying the jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special symbol variation display game. The right-handed instruction display 41c may be displayed so as to flow at a position overlapping the symbol display 41b, but the backside of the symbol display 41b is displayed so that the right-handed instruction display 41c flows, and the symbol display 41b is always visible. State. The round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds and the emphasis effect 41i, which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may be hidden by the right-handed instruction display 41c or may not be hidden.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 135D to 135F, a promotion effect 41h that prompts the user to aim at the special variation winning device 38 may be displayed so as to flow toward the special variation winning device 38. In this case, when it overlaps with the symbol display 41b that displays the jackpot symbol derived in the decoration special symbol variation display game, as shown in FIG. 135 (d), the display is made so that the promotion effect 41h flows on the back side of the symbol display 41b. The symbol display 41b is always visible. Moreover, you may make it display so that the promotion effect 41h may flow in the position which does not overlap with the symbol display 41b. It should be noted that the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i, the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j, etc., which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may be hidden by the promotion effect 41h, or may not be hidden. Also good. Also, the display for operating the right-handed instruction display 41c as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (c) and the display for operating the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIGS. 135 (d) to 135 (f) are performed simultaneously. May be.

FIG. 136 also shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 136 (a), the operation unit 24 and the special variable prize winning are provided as the promotion effect 41h that prompts the user to aim at the special variable prize winning device 38 and the highlight effect 41i that emphasizes that the special variable prize winning device 38 is open. The image of the device 38 may be used to instruct the operation unit 24 to turn largely to the right or to instruct the special variation winning device 38 to be aimed. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variable winning devices 38 are provided, it is possible to clearly indicate which special variable winning device 38 should be aimed. In addition, the light emission mode in the actual special variation winning device 38 positioned on the lower right side of the display device 41 and the light emission mode in the image of the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized. The special variable winning device 38 to be aimed at can be understood. Of course, the light emission mode of the operation unit 24 may be similarly synchronized.

The image may be a schematic animation or a moving image of the actual special prize winning device 38. Further, in the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41, it is not necessary to perform the display synchronized with the light emission effect in the actual operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38. good. In addition, the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be a still image.

Further, the character information and the arrow image included in the right-handed instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h may be displayed as described above. In this case, the front side of the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side may be moved. Further, when the collective display device 50 is displayed on the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38, the display may be performed in synchronization with the display mode of the actual collective display device 50, or the display is not synchronized. Also good. Any display mode may be used for non-synchronized display mode. For example, a state in which all of the display modes are lit or extinguished, or a specific lighting mode (in the case of 7 segments, a big hit such as “7” is reminiscent). A specific number is turned on, and in the case of an aggregate of LEDs, a big hit is associated with a specific lighting mode when a big hit occurs.

Further, when the game state of right-handed is started, an image for instructing to turn the operation unit 24 to the right or instructing to aim at the normal variation winning device 37 may be displayed. . In addition, when a left-handed gaming state is started, an image for instructing to turn the operation unit 24 small to the right or instructing to win the winning device 90 may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), a remaining time display 41n for displaying the remaining time until the end of the final round may be performed. The condition for ending a round that is established in the case of a short opening is almost always when the openable time elapses rather than when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special variable winning device 38, and the round ends in a fixed time. To do. Therefore, when the subsequent rounds are short open, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by integrating the round time until the end of the final round and the interval time. By displaying the remaining time in this way, it is possible to give an impression different from that in the case of notifying by the number of remaining rounds and to improve the interest of the game. That is, it has a remaining time calculating means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special gaming state, and can notify the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculating means. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first opening mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or longer, and the second opening mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or less. Although described as short opening, it is not restricted to this, What kind of opening aspect may be sufficient if a 1st opening aspect and a 2nd opening aspect differ. In addition, as a gaming machine, a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on winning in the starting area has been described, but other gaming machines may be used. For example, so-called wings that can be awarded to an auxiliary gaming device based on a winning in the starting area and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a game ball won in the auxiliary gaming device flows into a specific area (Old two types) gaming machines may be used.

As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start prize port 36, the normal variable prize device 37, the second start prize port) 97) A game in which a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine 10 can convert a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and controls a special variable winning device 38 that is converted into an open state in a special game state, and effects related to the game. And an operation control means (effect control device 300), and the operation mode of the special variable winning device 38 in the special gaming state includes a first opening mode (long opening) and a second opening different from the first opening mode. Aspect A short open), there is, effect control means, so that the second in an open manner is performed, it is feasible to promote presentation 41h prompting the firing of the game ball towards special variation winning device 38. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game balls during the special game state and enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, a launch operation unit (operation unit 24) that is operated by a player to adjust the launch force of a game ball, a display device 41 that can display information related to the game, and a special variable winning device 38 are decorated with light emission. Display means for displaying the operation method of the launch operation unit necessary for launching the game ball toward the special variation winning device 38 as the promotion effect 41h. The display device 41 displays the decoration mode of the special variable winning device 38 by the decoration means. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand the contents of the promotion effect 41h.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 through which game balls can flow down is provided, and to a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start prize port 36, ordinary variable prize device 37, second start prize port 97). In a gaming machine 10 that executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on a winning of a game ball and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result A special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state, The operation mode 38 includes a first release mode (long open) and a second open mode (short open) different from the first open mode. Open mode and second open mode And a winning determination means for determining whether a winning (effect control device 300) in any of the. Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the winning determination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the winning to the special variable winning device 38, and based on the winning to the special variable winning device 38 in the first opening mode based on the winning determination by the winning determining means. Counting means (effect control device 300) for separately counting the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the second opening mode is provided. Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the counting means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, an effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the effects related to the game is provided, and the effect control means is based on the result of counting by the counting means and a prize ball based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the first opening mode. It is possible to separately notify the number and the number of winning balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the second opening mode. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the count result that has not been notified at a predetermined timing after notifying only a part of the count result by the count means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[First Modification] Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of the addition effect.

As shown in FIG. 137, in this modification, it is possible to not immediately display the number of prize balls acquired by short opening on the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j. In the example shown in FIG. 137, a round with a short opening is performed as shown in FIGS. 137 (a) and (b). As shown in FIG. A value equal to the number is displayed in the short open acquisition game ball number display 41j. After that, 15 new winning balls were acquired by short opening, but as shown in FIG. 136 (c), these 15 balls are not added to the short opening acquiring game ball number display 41j.

In the ending effect after the end of the final round, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the acquired number of game balls 41d indicating the number of winning balls acquired by long opening is shown the number of winning balls acquired by short opening. An effect is added in which the value in the short open acquired game ball number display 41j is added, and as shown in FIG. 137 (e), a total number display 41k for displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is displayed. At this time, the total number display 41k does not include the 15 prize balls that were not added in FIG. 137 (c). Thereafter, in the latter half of the ending effect, as shown in FIGS. 137 (f) and (g), an additional effect is performed in which 15 prize balls that have not been added are added to the total number display 41k.

Regarding the short opening round, the player is interested in how much game value (prize ball) can be acquired, and in addition to the value displayed in the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j, By performing an effect such as adding, it is possible to give the player a sense of gain and enhance the interest of the game.

[Count Effect Setting Processing] In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs count effect setting processing shown in FIG. 138 instead of the count effect setting processing shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, in the case of a short open round (step C421), a count display lottery is performed for drawing whether the acquired winning ball number is immediately displayed on the short open acquired game ball number display 41j (step C601). ).

If the result of the count display lottery is to be displayed (step C602; Y), the processing of steps C424 and C425 is performed, and the acquired winning ball number is immediately displayed on the short open acquired game ball number display 41j. Further, when it is determined that the display is not performed as a result of the count display lottery (step C602; N), the non-display counter is updated based on the winning prize count command (step C603), and the count effect setting process is ended. In this case, the number of winning balls won is counted by a non-display counter, but is not displayed at this time.

[Ending Effect Setting Process] Also, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 139 is performed instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. In this ending effect setting process, the re-total number is calculated from the total number of acquired game balls and the non-display counter (step C611), and an extra effect based on the re-total number is set (step C612). Then, the non-display counter is reset (step C612). By this process, after the addition effects shown in FIGS. 137 (d) and (e), the additional effects shown in FIGS. 137 (f) and (g) are performed.

In addition, you may make it perform the extra effect which alert | reports the number of prize balls which has not been alert | reported yet only when predetermined conditions are satisfy | filled in a special game state. For example, an extra effect may be performed only when a predetermined number (for example, 9) or more winnings that can be won in one round occurs in a round with a long opening.

[Second Modification] Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the processing related to the display of the state suggestion display 41m.

FIG. 140 shows an example of the effect in the special game state in this modification. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), when a predetermined round is reached in the short open round, an effect button operation effect in which the player operates the effect button 25 is started. This effect button operation effect changes the display mode of the state suggestion display 41m according to the operation result of the effect button 25.

  In this effect button operation effect, a meter display 41p that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 and displays the operation status is displayed. The meter display 41p is a display in which a plurality of areas are vertically overlapped, and the display color is sequentially changed from the lower area in accordance with the length of time the player presses the effect button 25 and the number of times the effect button 25 is pressed. In this way, the operation status is notified.

If the player presses the effect button 25 for a predetermined time or longer or presses the effect button 25 for a predetermined number of times within the effective period and achieves the final condition, the meter display 41p is all displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (b). The display color of the area changes. And as shown in FIG.140 (c), in the ending effect, the state suggestion display 41m according to the effect mode which the player selected in the mode transfer selection round is displayed.

Also, if the player has long pressed the effect button 25 or pressed the effect button 25 within the effective period but has not achieved the final condition, a part of the meter display 41p is displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (d). The display color of the area changes. Here, the final condition has not been achieved, but a predetermined intermediate condition has been achieved. As shown in FIG. 140 (e), a state suggestion display 41m partially hidden is displayed in the ending effect. The

Further, when the player does not operate the effect button 25 within the effective period, the display color of all areas of the meter display 41p does not change as shown in FIG. 140 (f). As shown in FIG. 140 (g), the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed in the ending effect. Note that the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed in the same manner even when the player presses the effect button 25 for a long time or presses the effect button 25 within the effective period but does not achieve the intermediate condition.

The state suggestion display 41m in which a part shown in FIG. 140 (e) is concealed is selected at the selection rate shown in FIG. 141 according to the probability state after the end of the special gaming state. Although part of these state suggestion displays 41m are concealed, each player can be discriminated because they are different in display mode. However, since each state suggestion display 41m can be selected in either the high probability state or the low probability state, it is difficult to clearly grasp the probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

[Production Button Operation Production Processing] In order to perform such control, the production control device 300 performs production button operation production processing shown in FIG. 142 in the production button input processing in the main processing shown in FIG. In this effect button operation effect process, it is first determined whether or not an effect button operation effect is being executed (step C621). If the effect button operation effect is not being executed (step C621; N), the effect button operation effect process is performed. Exit. When the effect button operation effect is being executed (step C621; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation of the effect button (step C622). When there is no operation (step C622; N), the effect button operation is performed. The production process ends.

When there is an operation of the effect button (step C622; Y), the operation input counter is updated corresponding to the operation mode of the effect button (step C623), and the meter display is set based on the operation input counter (step C624). ), The effect button operation effect process ends. In other words, the value of the operation input counter is updated every time the effect button 25 is pressed for a certain period of time or every time the effect button 25 is pressed shortly, and the meter display is displayed according to this value. Done.

[Ending Effect Setting Process] Also, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 143 is performed instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether the operation input counter is the upper limit value (step C631). If the operation input counter is the upper limit value (step C631; Y), that is, if the final condition is achieved, the operation input counter is reset. (Step C635), and the ending effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the state suggestion display 41m set in steps C491 to C494 is displayed.

If the operation input counter is not the upper limit value (step C631; N), it is determined whether the operation input counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (step C632). If the operation input counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step C632; Y), that is, if the intermediate condition is achieved, the state suggestion display 41m based on the selection rate of the resetting table (see FIG. 141) is set (step C633). Then, the operation input counter is reset (step C635), and the ending effect setting process is terminated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), a state suggestion display 41m partially hidden is displayed.

If the operation input counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step C632; N), that is, if the intermediate condition is not achieved, the state suggestion display is set to non-display (step C634), and the operation input counter is reset. (Step C635), the ending effect setting process ends. In this case, the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (g). That is, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) notifies the information regarding the game after the end of the special game state based on the operation mode of the operation unit (the effect button 25, the touch panel 29) by the player in the special game state. This means that the aspects are different.

Note that the state suggestion display 41m may gradually change from a completely hidden state to a completely visible state in accordance with the operation of the effect button 25 (in accordance with the value of the operation input counter).

[Third Modification] Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to give points according to the game result in the special game state.

FIG. 144 shows an example of effects in the special game state in this modification. As shown in FIG. 144 (a), a round with a short opening is performed, and as shown in FIG. 144 (b) based on the fact that one game ball is won in the special variable winning device 38 in this short opening round. One character can be acquired. When the character is acquired, an acquisition display 41q for notifying the type of the acquired character is displayed, and the acquired character is displayed on the total acquisition display 41r displayed by the character acquired in the special gaming state. In FIG. 144 (b), it is informed that the star character has been acquired in the acquisition display 41q, and it is shown that one star character has been acquired in the total acquisition display 41r.

As shown in FIG. 144 (c), when one game ball wins again in the special variation winning device 38, one character is acquired. Here, the acquisition display 41q indicates that a peach character has been acquired, and the total acquisition display 41r indicates that one star character and one peach character have been acquired. The character to be acquired is selected for each prize according to the selection rate as shown in FIG. 144 (h).

As shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the ending effect, the type of character acquired in the total acquisition display 41r is displayed. Here, it is shown that seven star characters, one peach character, one note character, and one treasure chest character are acquired. Since one character corresponds to one winning in the special variable winning device 38, a short open acquired game ball number display 41j is displayed corresponding to the total acquisition display 41r and added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. Addition effect is performed.

Furthermore, the privilege according to the acquired character is provided and accompanying notification display 41s which alert | reports provision of a privilege is performed. As shown in FIG. 144 (e), points are awarded when a peach character is acquired. This point can be used for the player to customize the game performance. Also, as shown in FIG. 144 (f), when a musical note character has been acquired, a special BGM is set as the BGM after the special gaming state ends. Also, as shown in FIG. 144 (g), when a treasure box character has been acquired, a special background is set as the background after the end of the special game state.

By giving a privilege in this way, even if it is short open, it can be made to aim for the prize to the special variable prize-winning apparatus 38, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by providing a game value different from the prize ball, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. That is, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) can give a game value different from the prize ball based on the winning to the special variation winning device 38.

[Count Effect Setting Processing] In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs count effect setting processing shown in FIG. 145 instead of the count effect setting processing shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, if it is a short open round (step C421), a character is selected based on the selection rate of the display icon table (see FIG. 144 (h)) (step C651), and the character display setting is made. Perform (step C652). Thereby, the acquisition display 41q and the total acquisition display 41r are performed as shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (c).

[Ending Effect Setting Process] Further, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 146 is performed instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether or not a point granting character (here, a peach character) has been acquired (step C661). If no point-giving character has been acquired (step C661; N), the process proceeds to step C663. If a point-giving character has been acquired (step C661; Y), points are awarded based on the number of acquisitions (step C662), and the process proceeds to step C663.

Next, it is determined whether a BGM character (note character here) has been acquired (step C663). If no BGM character has been acquired (step C663; N), the process proceeds to step C665. If a BGM character has been acquired (step C663; Y), a privilege BGM is set (step C664), and the process proceeds to step C665.

Next, it is determined whether a background character (here, a treasure box character) has been acquired (step C665). If no background character has been acquired (step C665; N), the ending effect setting process ends. If a background character has been acquired (step C665; Y), a privilege background is set (step C666), and the ending effect setting process ends.

[Main Processing] In addition to the main processing shown in FIG. 120, main processing shown in FIG. 147 is performed. In this main process, the effect point control process (step C671) for performing the process regarding an effect point is performed.

[Production Point Control Processing] FIG. 148 shows production point control processing (step C671) in the main processing described above. In this effect point setting process, first, it is determined whether there is a grant privilege selection operation flag that is set in a state where the player selects a grant privilege based on the points (step C691). As grant privileges that can be selected here, it is possible to generate effects that cannot normally be seen, such as special characters appearing in addition to privilege BGM and privilege background, and special reach can be generated. Things.

When there is a grant privilege selection operation flag (step C691; Y), the process proceeds to step C702. When there is no grant privilege selection operation flag (step C691; N), state information is acquired (step C692). The state information is information indicating the state of the gaming machine such as during the execution of the special figure variation display game, during the special game state, or during the customer waiting state.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether or not the state is a trigger for resetting the accumulated point value (step C693). Here, it is assumed that the state in which the customer is waiting is a reset trigger. If the point accumulation value is not triggered to be reset (step C693; N), the process proceeds to step C694. If the point accumulation value is triggered (step C693; Y), the point accumulation value is reset (step C694), and the process proceeds to step C695.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether it is a state that is a trigger for resetting the granted privilege (step C695). The granted privilege is a privilege BGM or a privilege background. In addition, here, it is assumed that the state in which the customer is waiting is a reset trigger. If it is not in a state of being a trigger for resetting the granted privilege (step C695; N), the process proceeds to step C697. If the grant privilege is triggered (step C695; Y), the grant privilege is reset (step C696), and the process proceeds to step C697.

Next, it is determined whether the point exchange is possible based on the acquired state information (step C697). Here, it is assumed that the point exchange is possible when the customer is not waiting. When the point exchange is not possible (step C697; N), the effect point control process ends. When the point exchange is possible (step C697; Y), it is determined whether the point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699). The point exchange condition is that the point accumulated value is not less than the minimum number of points necessary for the exchange set for each grant privilege. When this point exchange condition is not satisfied (step C699; N), the effect point control process is terminated. If the point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699; Y), it is determined whether there is a point exchange start operation (step C700).

The point exchange start operation is an operation of performing a predetermined operation on the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 and starting exchange of points and grant privileges. When there is no point exchange start operation (step C700; N), the effect point control process is terminated. Moreover, when there exists point exchange start operation (step C700; Y), the provision privilege selection operation flag is set (step C701), and an effect point control process is complete | finished.

On the other hand, when there is a grant privilege selection operation flag (step C691; Y), it is determined whether there has been a grant privilege determination operation (step C702). When there is no operation for determining the granted privilege (step C702; N), the effect point control process ends. If there is an operation for determining the granting privilege (step C702; Y), the selected granting privilege is set (step C703), the granting privilege selection operation flag is reset (step C704), and the production point control process is performed. Exit.

In addition, although it was set as the case where the point grant character was acquired as an opportunity of acquisition of a point, you may enable it to acquire a point in cases other than this. For example, when a prefetch effect is executed, points may be acquired according to the prefetch effect to be executed. Further, points may be obtained when a game is continued for a predetermined time, when a specific performance occurs, or when a prize is received at a prize opening.

[Fourth Modification] Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to reduce the flow down speed of the game ball up to the opening / closing member 990.

As shown in FIG. 149, a protrusion 481 and a recess 482 similar to the protrusion 992 and the recess 993 provided in the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening / closing member 990 are formed on the upper surface 617 of the guide 616. Due to the protrusions 481 and the recesses 482, the game ball flowing down the upper surface 617 of the guide part 616 flows down to the left while meandering back and forth, and flows down more than without these protrusions 481 and the recesses 482. The speed is reduced. Thereby, the flow speed can be sufficiently lowered before reaching the opening / closing member 990 of the special fluctuation winning device 38, and the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 can be lengthened.

In the configuration of FIG. 149 (a), the game ball approaches a position closer to the player than in the configuration of FIG. 149 (b). Interest can be improved. In the configuration of FIG. 149 (b), the game ball can be prevented from colliding with the back surface of the cover glass of the glass frame 15, so that the cover glass can be protected and noise generated by colliding with the cover glass. Can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 150, a protruding portion 481 for meandering the game ball flowing down may be provided at a portion upstream of the opening / closing member 990 in the flow down channel 38f. In this way, the speed of the game ball flowing into the opening / closing member 990 can be reduced, and the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 can be further increased. In addition, as shown in FIG. 151, a protruding portion 481 and a recessed portion 482 that meander the game ball flowing down may be provided in a portion upstream of the opening / closing member 990 in the flow down passage 38f. Similarly, the speed of the game ball flowing into the opening / closing member 990 can be reduced, and the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 can be further increased.

In addition, although a vibration generate | occur | produces when a game ball meanders, you may provide the detection sensor which detects this vibration. Alternatively, a detection sensor that detects the presence of the game ball may be provided in a portion where the game ball meanders. Then, the effect control device 300 performs an effect such as causing the LED to emit light based on the detection signal from the detection sensor. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the game balls that meander and stay, and it can be shown that the game balls can flow into the special fluctuation winning device 38 in a short opening.

[Fifth Modification] Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the configuration of the special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the special variation winning apparatus 38 of the present modification includes a guide channel 955 composed of a main body 970 and a rear wall member 960, a V channel 955a extending downward, and a right channel 955a. Branches into a discharge ball passage 955b extending in the direction of the head. A V door 501 that is slidable in the front-rear direction is provided at a position that is an inflow portion of the V flow path 955a. This V door 520 can be converted into a blocking state in which the V door 520 protrudes forward to prevent inflow into the V flow path 955a and an allowable state in which the V door 520 retracts backward to permit inflow into the V flow path 955a.

The game ball that has won the grand prize opening 38d and has flowed into the guide channel 955 is guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the through-hole 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, and formed in the main body portion 970. It is guided to the right by the rib 973 and reaches the branching portion of the V channel 955a and the discharge ball channel 955b. When the V door 520 is retracted rearward, it can flow into the lower V flow path 955a, and the game ball flowing into the V flow path 955a detects the game ball flowing into the V flow path 955a. After being detected at 460, the discharge is guided to the rear by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passed through the through portion 974, and guided to the back side of the main body portion 970 to discharge the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. It flows into the flow path. As will be described later, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the big hit symbol, but the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a in the special gaming state and the probability variation operation region A high probability state is set based on the detection by the switch 460.

On the other hand, in a state where the V door 520 protrudes forward, the game ball reaching the branch portion is guided to the right through the upper surface of the V door 520 and flows into the discharge ball passage 955b. The game ball that has flowed into the discharge ball flow path 955b is guided to the right, passes through the through-hole 462 formed in the main body portion 970 through the front and rear, reaches the back side of the main body portion 970, and is further guided downward to be discharged. After being detected by a remaining ball discharge switch 461 that detects a game ball flowing down the ball channel 955b, the game ball flows into the discharge channel for discharging the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. A rib 463 that guides the game ball flowing down the discharge ball channel 955 b to the rear through port 462 is formed on the rear surface of the rear wall member 960 and at a position facing the through port 462.

As shown in FIGS. 154 to 157, a V door unit 500 for operating the V door is provided on the back side of the main body 970. The V door unit 500 is provided with a V door 520, a lever solenoid 502 for driving the V door 520, and a link member 510 for operating the V door 520 in accordance with the driving of the lever solenoid 502.

The lever solenoid 502 is arranged so that the drive shaft 503 extends downward along the vertical direction. A first link member 511 of the link member 510 is connected to the distal end portion of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 is slidable in the vertical direction along with the operation of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 is provided with a bearing portion 512 that receives a connection shaft 514 provided at one end of the second link member 513 so that the connection shaft 514 moves up and down as the drive shaft 503 operates. It has become.

The second link member 513 is bent in a square shape, and a connection shaft 514 connected to the first link member 511 is provided at the end of the arm portion 517 extending from the bent portion to one side. Yes. Further, a connecting shaft 515 connected to the V door 520 is provided at an end portion of the arm portion 518 extending from the bent portion to the other side. A rotation shaft 516 is provided at the bent portion. The rotation shaft 516 is perpendicular to the extending direction of the arm portions 517 and 518 extending from the bent portion, and the connection shafts 514 and 515 are extended in parallel to the rotation shaft. The rotation shaft 516 is pivotally supported along the left-right direction by a bearing portion 464 formed on the back surface of the main body portion 670, and the second link member 513 is rotatable about the rotation shaft 516.

The V door 520 includes a door portion 521 that can extend to the V flow path 955a. The door 521 has an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined to the right when viewed from the front side, and the game ball is allowed to flow down to the right discharge ball channel 955b in a state of extending to the V channel 955a. ing. Moreover, the front-end part of the extension direction of the door part 521 is an inclined surface which inclines so that a lower end may be located in the back side rather than an upper end. By forming the inclined surface in this way, when the door portion 521 is extended forward to the V channel 955a, the game ball existing at the inflow portion to the V channel 955a is released upward or downward. be able to.

An insertion portion 522 for inserting the connection shaft 515 of the second link member 513 is formed at the rear portion of the V door 520. The front-rear width of the insertion portion 522 is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the connection shaft 515, but the vertical width is sufficiently wider than the outer diameter of the connection shaft 515, and the connection shaft 515 moves vertically in the insertion portion 522. It is possible.

A slit-shaped guided portion 523 is formed on the bottom surface of the V door 520 along the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 154, a through portion 467 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in a portion of the main body portion 670 where the V door 520 is arranged, and the V of the V door unit 500 provided on the back side of the main body portion 670. The door portion 521 of the door 520 extends through the through-hole 467 to the inflow portion of the V channel 955a on the front surface side of the main body portion. The through-hole 467 is formed with a guide rib 465 extending along the front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the V-door 520 in the front-rear direction so as to be slidably fitted to the guided part of the V-door 520. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 155 (a), 156 (a), and 157 (b), the V door unit 500 configured as described above is in a state in which the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is most extended in the operating range. In the (OFF state), the first link member 510 is located at the lower end of the operation range, and the second link member 513 is in the most counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side. The connecting shaft 515 is positioned at the foremost end of the movement range. As a result, the V door 520 is pushed out to the front end of the movement range, and extends to the upper side of the V flow path 955a to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path 955a.

When the lever solenoid 502 is operated from this state to retract the drive shaft 503 (set to the ON state), the first link member 510 operates upward, and the second link member 513 moves clockwise rearward when viewed from the right. Rotate. Accordingly, the connection shaft 515 of the second link member 513 moves rearward, and the V door 520 moves rearward. As shown in FIGS. 155 (b), 156 (b), and 157 (c), when the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is retracted most in the operation range, the V door 520 is moved to the rear end of the movement range. Thus, the door 521 is completely retracted from the V channel 955a, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the V channel 955a. When the door 521 is extended above the V channel 955a to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V channel 955a, an operation opposite to the above is performed.

FIG. 158 shows a block diagram of the game control apparatus 100 in the gaming machine of this modification. Game ball detection signals from the probability variation operation region switch 460 and the remaining ball discharge switch 461 provided in the special variation winning device 38 are input to the game control device 100. The lever solenoid is controlled by the game control device 100.

The jackpot type in the gaming machine of this modification is set to 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal A, 16R normal B, 4R probability variation. The first round of each jackpot type is a probability change decision round. This probability variation determination round is a round in which it is determined whether or not a high probability state is reached after the special gaming state is ended depending on whether or not a game ball flows into the V channel 955a. The probability change in the name of each jackpot type indicates that there is a high possibility that a game ball will flow into the V flow path 955a and that it is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. Normally, the V flow path 955a This indicates that there is a low possibility that a game ball will flow into the high probability state (probability variation state) after the special game state ends. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into the V channel 955a is determined, so that even if the big hit type is probable, the V channel 955a. If a game ball does not flow in, the high probability state is not obtained, and even if the big hit type is normal, if a game ball flows into the V channel 955a, a high probability state is obtained.

FIG. 159 shows the operation of the special variable winning device 38 that can be executed in each round in the special gaming state. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the V opening releases the special variable winning device 38 with the start of the round (t31). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (retracted), and the probability variation operation region switch 460 is made effective. When the lever solenoid 502 is OFF (the extended state), the door portion 521 covers the V flow path 955a and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 502 is ON, the door portion 521 has the V flow. Retreating from the path 955a, the game ball can enter. In addition, the state in which the probability variation operation region switch 460 is valid is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operation region switch 460 is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability variation operation region switch 460 is invalid is a state in which even if a game ball is detected by the probability variation operation region switch 460, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 502 is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off, the probability change operation region switch 460 becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that a game ball won immediately after the special variation winning device 38 is opened flows into the V flow path 955a.

When 200 ms elapses from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the special variable winning device 38 is released again (t35), and the condition that either the 25000 ms openable time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is satisfied. The special variable winning device 38 is closed to finish the round (t39). Thereafter, the interval time and the winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t39), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t41).

In addition, after the special variable winning device 38 is opened for the second time (t35), the lever solenoid 502 is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability change operation region switch 460 is also effective (t36). The second opening of the special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 also continues for a long time, so that the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a almost certainly. Become. Therefore, when the big hit type is probable, the high probability state is almost certainly obtained.

In addition, the lever solenoid 502 can be turned on for a predetermined time after the special variation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and the game ball that has flowed into the special variation winning device 38 just before closing. Can also flow into the V channel 955a. Note that the special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all the game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the large winning opening remaining ball processing time. When the remaining ball processing time ends (t42), the lever solenoid 502 is turned off to end the operation, and the probability variation operation region switch 460 is invalidated.

In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, the special variation winning device 38 is closed, and all the game balls won in the special variation winning device 38 are not discharged within the remaining ball processing time. In the case where the lever solenoid 502 is completely discharged before the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (t43), the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the discharge is completed, and the operation is finished. Switch 460 is disabled.

In addition, the special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all of the game balls won in the special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the large winning opening remaining ball processing time. In the case where the lever solenoid 502 is not completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (t43), the lever solenoid 502 is turned on at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (t43). The operation is ended in the OFF state. In this case, after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t43), the probability variation operating region switch 460 becomes invalid after 100 ms has elapsed (t44).

As shown in FIG. 159 (b), in the short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the special variable winning device 38 in the V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the round is ended based on the completion of the opening. (T54). Since the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 is also short, the possibility that the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a is low. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the big hit type is normal.

Note that the operation of the lever solenoid 502 and the valid / invalid switching of the probability change operation region switch 460 are the same as in the case of V-opening as long as the game ball remains in the special variable winning device 38 (t56 to t63). ). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time for the remaining winning ball remaining ball has elapsed, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. When the operation is finished, the probability change operation region switch 460 becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (t62), the lever solenoid 502 is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (t62). When the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t62) and 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off, the probability change operation region switch 460 becomes invalid (t63).

However, the lever solenoid 502 and the probability variation operation region switch 460 are controlled as shown in FIG. 159 (b) when the short is opened only when the short is opened in the first round. When the short is opened in other rounds, the lever solenoid 502 is not operated, and the probability change operation region switch 460 remains invalid. In the case of the final round, the remaining sphere processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 159 (c), in the long release, the special variable prize-winning device 38 is released at the start of the round (t61), and a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls has passed or the 25000 ms openable time has elapsed. If any of the conditions for winning is established, the special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t62). Thereafter, the interval time and the winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t62), and when the interval time is over, the next round is started (t63). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. In this long open, the lever solenoid 502 remains in the OFF state, and the probability change operation region switch 460 also remains invalid.

In each jackpot type described above, V is released in the first round in the case of a probable jackpot. In the case of a big hit, a short is opened in the first round. In the second and subsequent rounds, the 16R probability variation A and the 16R probability variation A are all long open, the 16R probability variation B and the 16R normal B are 2-4R long open, and the 5-16R short open. Moreover, in 4R probability change, all are short-circuit open. However, when the short circuit is opened after 2R, the lever solenoid 502 remains in the OFF state, and the probability change operation region switch 460 also remains invalid. Even in the case of a small hit, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 502 is kept in the OFF state, and the probability changing operation region switch 460 is also invalidated.

The first opening period (t31 to t32) of the door part 521 in the V opening and the opening period (t51 to t52) of the door part 521 in the short opening stay on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. It is a period in which it is difficult for the game balls that have been to reach the V flow path 955a.

As shown in FIG. 31A, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened comes into contact with the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990. It bounces as shown in (b) and is guided in a direction away from the big winning opening 38d. That is, it is guided in a direction away from the V channel 955a forming the specific region. Further, the bounced game ball comes into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, etc., so that the time to reach the V flow path 955a is further increased. It has become. For this reason, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, it is difficult for the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 to reach the V flow path 955a. However, since the projecting portions 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990 are arranged with an interval through which the game balls can pass, the game balls that have fallen without coming into contact with the projecting portions 992 through this interval are V channels. There is a slight possibility of entering 955a. Of course, when the projecting portion 992 is arranged without leaving an interval through which a game ball can pass, or is provided in a rib shape continuously along the front end of the upper surface, the game on the opening / closing member 990 when opened. You may make it a ball | bowl always contact.

In addition, the first opening period (t31 to t34) of the special variable winning device 38 in the V opening and the opening period (t51 to t54) of the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening are as described above for the protrusion 992 and the like. Even when the game ball bounces in contact with the game ball, it is time for the game ball to flow into the special winning opening 38d. Thereby, even if it is short-opening, the inflow to the big winning opening 38d is possible. It should be noted that the opening period of the door portion 521 and the opening period of the special variable winning device 38 are set to be a design value that generates a high probability state set in the design stage of the gaming machine or a design value of a winning rate in a short opening. The setting is made in accordance with the structure of the special variable winning device 38 such as the opening / closing member 990.

[Probability Change Operation Area Switch Monitoring Process] In addition, the game control device 100 performs the probability change operation area switch monitoring process shown in FIG. In this probability change operation region switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability change operation region switch 460 is valid (step A2401). The probability variation operation region switch 460 being active is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operation region switch 460 is treated as effective. If the probability variation operation region switch 460 is not valid (step A2401; N), the probability variation operation region switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the probability change operation region switch 460 is valid (step A2401; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 460 (step A2402).

When there is no input to the probability change operation region switch 460 (step A2402; N), the probability change operation region switch monitoring process is terminated. When there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 460 (step A2402; Y), a probability change operation region passage command is prepared (step A2403), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A2404). Thereby, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the game ball flowing into the V channel 955a.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A2405). The V easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 4R probability variation. In the case of big hits with these symbols, V opening is performed, so that the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a almost certainly. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 16R normal A or 16R normal B which is not an easy V symbol, a short circuit is opened, so that a game ball rarely flows into the V flow path 955a.

When the jackpot symbol is an easy V symbol (step A2405; Y), the probability variation operation region normal passage information is set (step A2406), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation region passage information region (step A2408). ), The probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated. If the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A2405; N), the probability variation operation region irregular passage information is set (step A2407), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation region passage information region (step A2408). ), The probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Big hit end process] Then, the big hit end process shown in FIG. 161 is performed instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG. In this jackpot end process, it is determined whether there is stochastic operation region passage information (probability variation operation region normal passage information or probability variation operation region irregular passage information) set when a game ball flows into the V flow path 955a (step A2411). And when there is no probability operation area passage information (step A2411; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1202). In this case, the high probability state is not obtained. When there is probability operation area passage information (step A2411; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1203). In this case, a high probability state is obtained. That is, when a game ball flows into the V channel 955a regardless of the big hit symbol, a high probability state is set.

[Lever Solenoid Control Process] In addition, the game control apparatus 100 performs a lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 502. As shown in FIG. 162, in this lever solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether or not the lever solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (-1 in this case) (step A2501). If the lever solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (step A2501; Y), the lever solenoid control process is terminated. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no-update code (step A2501; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A2502), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer has reached 0 (step A2503). .

If the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step A2503; N), the lever solenoid control process is terminated. If the lever solenoid control timer reaches 0 (step A2503; Y), a lever solenoid control table is set (step A2504), and a table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A2505). Then, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A2507), and the output data for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A2508). Thereafter, the probability variation operation region validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation region validity determination flag region (step A2509), and the lever solenoid control process is terminated.

Through the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated every time a predetermined time elapses, and the lever solenoid 502 is turned ON / OFF as shown in FIG. 159, and the probability variation operation area switch 460 is enabled / disabled. Is set. When the operation of the lever solenoid 502 is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lever solenoid 502 is turned OFF and the probability variation operation region switch 460 is disabled by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer. . Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, −1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the operation is stopped.

In addition, delaying the arrival of the game ball to the V flow path 955a, in the first opening period (t31 to t32) of the door 521 in the V opening, or the opening period (t51 to t52) of the door 521 in the short opening, In order to make it difficult for the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 to reach the V channel 955a when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, a recess 471 is provided in the guide channel 955 leading to the V channel 955a. It may be provided to slow down the flow speed of the game ball.

For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), a game ball located behind the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960 and guided to the back side of the rear wall member 960 is guided to the V flow path 955a side. A plurality of concave portions 471 as shown in FIGS. 163 (b) and (c) are provided in the bent portion 470. It is preferable that the corners of the recesses 471 are curved so as not to excessively prevent the flow of the game ball.

In addition, the concave portion 471 in FIG. 163 (c) has a wall surface on the flow-down direction side of the game ball that is inclined as compared with the concave portion in FIG. 163 (b), so that the outflow of the game ball from the concave portion 471 is facilitated. Can be prevented. In addition, the part which provides such unevenness is not limited to the bent part 470, but may be a part up to the V flow path 955a in the guide flow path. Further, the flow rate of the game ball may be decreased by increasing the number of bent portions before reaching the V channel 955a. In other words, a flow velocity reduction mechanism such as a recess 471 or a bent portion is provided in the flow channel up to the V flow channel 955a, so that the flow velocity and ball power of the game ball flowing down are reduced compared to the case where there is no flow velocity reduction mechanism. The time to reach the V channel 955a is lengthened. Further, a protrusion may be provided on the bottom surface of the flow path leading to the V flow path 955a so that the game ball jumps, and the arrival timing to the V flow path 955a may be delayed.

As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start prize port 36, the normal variable prize device 37, the second start prize port) 97) A game in which a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine 10 includes a special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state. The game ball can be won from the opening facing upward, and in the closed state it projects forward and closes the opening to make it impossible to win the game ball, and in the open state it retracts backward to open the opening. Entering a game ball An open / close member 990 that slides back and forth is provided so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the open / close member 990 in the closed state, and the open / close member 990 has an upper surface that allows the game ball to flow down. Thus, a projecting portion 992 projecting upward is provided. Therefore, since the rolling mode of the game ball changes at the protrusion 992, the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the specific area at an unintended timing, and to prevent the transition of the probability state different from the design value.

Further, the protruding portion 992 is provided at the front end portion in the sliding direction on at least the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. When the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the rolling mode of the game ball is changed by the protruding portion 992, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Also, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game is provided, the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a specific area (V flow path 955a) into which the game ball can flow, and the game control means is a special game device. Based on the flow of the game ball that has won the variable winning device 38 into the specific area, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball has not flowed into the specific area can be generated after the end of the special game state. The projecting portion 992 is formed such that when the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the game ball that contacts the projecting portion 992 is guided in a direction away from the specific area. Therefore, since it is guided in a direction away from the specific area, the player's feeling of anxiety can be raised and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The opening / closing member 990 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 992 at intervals on the upper surface, and when the opening / closing member 990 is converted to an open state, a game ball located on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is provided with the protrusion 992. The projecting portion 992 is arranged so that it can pass through between the two and flow down from the front end in the sliding direction. Therefore, the rolling mode of the game ball at the time of converting the opening / closing member 990 to the open state becomes diverse, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the projecting portion 992 is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 can be contacted in the closed state, and the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 than when the projecting portion 992 is not provided. The time will be long. Therefore, since the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is increased, the possibility of winning the special variation winning device 38 is increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Sixth Modification] Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the configuration of the gaming area 32.

As shown in FIG. 164, the game board 30 of the present modification is provided with a plate-shaped partition wall 531 between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31 from the upper side to the right side of the center case 40. The partition wall 531 is arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31 with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the outer peripheral wall 31. Further, the partition wall 531 is the front and rear width of the game area 32 from the front surface of the game board main body (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). Extends forward.

Further, the interval between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 formed on the outer periphery of the center case 40 is also equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and both sides of the partition wall 531 can flow down the game ball. A first flow-down region 541 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 and a second flow-down region 542 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 are formed.

The lower end of the partition wall 531 is connected to the upper end of the guide portion 616. In the gaming machine of this modification, the game ball can also flow down on the right side of the guide portion 616, and the first flow-down region 541 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 is a region on the right side of the guide portion 616. It is formed so as to guide the game ball to the out port 30a. The game balls flowing down the first flow down area 541 are not out of the ordinary start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, the general winning port 35, and the winning device 90 without winning out. Is guided to. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the second flow-down area 542 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the restriction wall 613 are the normal start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, and the general winning opening 35. There is a possibility that the winning device 90 will win. In this modified example, there is a possibility that the winning device 90 may be won even when it is right-handed, but it may not be possible to win the winning device 90 when it is right-handed.

It can be selected by adjusting the firing force which of the first flowing area 541 and the second flowing area 542 the game ball flows into. The inlets of the first downstream region 541 and the second downstream region 542 are located above the center case 40, and the inlet of the first downstream region 541 is located above the inlet of the second downstream region 542. doing. Therefore, in order to aim at the inflow of the game ball to the second flow down region 542, it is necessary to make the launching force weaker than when the game ball flows into the first flow down region 541.

In a conventional gaming machine, when making a left strike, the game is performed by adjusting the firing force, but when making a right strike, the operation unit 24 is only turned to the maximum. On the other hand, in the game board 30 of this modification, it is necessary to adjust the firing force so that it does not flow into the first descending area 541 even when making a right strike. Interest can be improved. In addition, when the player stops the game with the game ball left on the upper plate 21 in the game store, the store clerk turns the operation unit 24 as much as possible to fire the game ball and play the game to the first flow-down area 541. By allowing the balls to flow in, it is possible to process the game balls without winning them in the winning opening.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, a part of the partition wall 531 is interrupted to provide a communication portion 532 in which the first flow area 541 and the second flow area 542 communicate with each other, and the area where the game ball flows down is changed. You may make it have a possibility. By doing in this way, the interest of a game can be heightened more.

By adjusting the distance between the end portions of the partition wall 531 divided by the communication portion 532, the height of the possibility that the area where the game ball flows down can be adjusted. For example, the area where the game ball flows down is rarely changed as a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, or the area where the game ball flows down frequently is changed as a sufficiently wide interval. can do. In addition, by providing a guiding unit 533 that guides the game ball toward the communication unit 532, the possibility that the region where the game ball flows down can be increased. In the example of FIG. 165, the guide wall 533 for guiding the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area 542 to the communication section 532 is formed by the restriction wall 613 of the center case 40, and the first flow-down from the second flow-down area 542 is performed. The possibility that the game ball moves to the area 541 is increased. Further, the communication unit 532 may be provided with an obstacle such as a windmill.

The partition walls 531 divided by the communication portion 532 are all formed on the front surface of one base member 534. The base member 534 is arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and is fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. However, by providing a screw hole in the communication portion 532, a screwing operation is performed in a wide portion without the partition wall 531. And the efficiency of manufacturing the game board 30 can be improved.

FIG. 166 shows another example of the game board 30 provided with the partition wall 531. As shown in FIG. 166, there may be a possibility of winning a prize opening also in the first downstream area 541 and the second downstream area 542. With such a configuration, the rolling mode of the game ball in the right-handed gaming state can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved. The game board 30 includes a first special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning device 39 as special variable winning devices, and these can be alternately opened. Further, only the first start winning opening 36 is provided in place of the winning device 90. The game method and the like are the same as those of the game board 30 of the first embodiment, and left-handed and right-handed are selected according to the game situation.

When the size of the center case 40 is reduced as in the game board 30, a wide space is formed between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the restriction wall 613. In this case, it is common to place obstacle members such as game nails and windmills in this space, but the timing and speed of the game ball reaching the right game area when making a right strike due to the presence of the obstacle member Variations will occur. For this reason, it becomes difficult to stably reach the game ball on the right game area, and stable winning to the special variation winning device 38 and the normal variation winning device 37 is hindered, and the player's profit is reduced. There is a fear.

Therefore, by dividing this space into the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 by the partition wall 531, the first flow-down area 541 can stably reach the game area on the right side without any obstacle member. The second falling area 542 can be an area for enjoying the change in the rolling mode of the game ball by the obstacle member. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the profits of the player while enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 166, by providing the first flow-down area 541 on which no obstacle member is provided on the upper side, the first flow-down area is obtained when the operation ball 24 is turned to the maximum and the game ball is fired with the strongest firing force. It will flow into 541. The first falling area 541 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, so that the game balls heading leftward can be always received by the buffer portion 545 provided on the outer peripheral wall 31. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a strong launching force from colliding with a portion other than the buffer portion 545 and to prevent the game board 30 from being damaged.

In the case where the special variation winning device 38 such as the gaming machine of the first embodiment is provided, the game ball is always placed on the opening / closing member 990 in order to make the special variation winning device 38 win a prize even if the short opening. Needs to stay. In order to do this, it is necessary to make the game ball reach the special variable prize-winning device 38 stably at a constant timing. However, it becomes possible by providing the partition wall 531 as described above, and appropriate for the player's profit. Can be secured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167, a communication portion 532 may be provided in a range in which the game ball moves to the right. By doing so, a game ball that reaches the start end of the first flow-down region 541 but has a weak launching force falls from the communication portion 532 to the second flow-down region 542. As a result, the firing force that allows the first flow area 541 to flow to the end is limited to a narrower range, and the timing of the game ball that reaches the special fluctuation winning device 38 or the like can be further stabilized. it can. In this case, the game ball flowing down the second flow down area 542 has a lower winning rate for the special variable winning device 38 or the like than the game ball flowing down the first flow down area 541. It is preferable to be disadvantageous.

Further, a winning opening or a gate through which a game ball falling from above can be won may be provided at a position below the communication portion 532 in the second flow down region 542. By doing in this way, it flows into the winning opening and the gate only when the game ball is launched with a launch force that reaches the start end of the first flow-down region 541 and with a launch force that falls at a predetermined position of the communication portion 532. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In FIGS. 164 to 167, the first falling region 541 and the second falling region 542 are formed by arranging the plate-shaped partition wall 531 between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the regulating wall 613. The first flow-down region 541 and the second flow-down region 542 may be formed by a groove-shaped flow path forming member having a U-shape. In this case, the groove-shaped flow path forming member may be disposed so as to open to the front side so as to constitute the side wall and the back wall of the flow-down region, or the groove-shaped flow path forming member may be disposed on the rear side. You may arrange | position so that it may distribute | arrange so that it may open and may comprise the side wall and front wall of a flow-down area | region. Moreover, you may make it form the 1st flow-down area | region 541 and the 2nd flow-down area | region 542 with a cylindrical flow-path formation member.

By doing in this way, it becomes possible to form the 1st falling area 541 and the 2nd falling area 542 by a single channel formation member, without using regulation wall 613 and outer peripheral wall 31 of center case 40. Thereby, the frequency with which a game ball collides with the regulation wall 613 etc. of the center case 40 can be reduced, and the members discarded when reusing the components of the game board can be reduced. Further, when the flow path forming member is damaged, only the flow path forming member needs to be replaced, and the repair cost can be reduced.

In addition, description of game contents, information for instructing not to stare at the same light from a short distance for a long time, and character information such as information indicating that an anti-fraud sensor is mounted should be written on the flow path forming member. In addition, a flow path forming member in which necessary character information is described may be used. In this way, it is possible to change the character information more easily than printing on the surface of the game board.

Also, a plurality of partition walls 531 are provided between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the restriction wall 613 to provide three or more parallel flow-down areas so that the player can select a flow-down area to flow down by adjusting the firing force. May be. In this case, a sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down in each flow-down area may be provided so that different effects are given to the player depending on the flow-down area in which the game ball flows down.

Moreover, although the starting end of the partition wall 531 is provided above the center case 40 and the part where the game ball is directed rightward, it may be provided rightward of the center case 40 and where the game ball is directed downward. . Further, although the partition wall 531 is provided above and to the right of the center case 40, it may be provided at other locations.

In addition, as a gaming machine provided with the partition wall 531, a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the winning in the starting area as described above has been described, but it can also be provided for other gaming machines. . For example, so-called wings that can be awarded to an auxiliary gaming device based on a winning in the starting area and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a game ball won in the auxiliary gaming device flows into a specific area (Old two types) gaming machines may be used. In this case, the possibility of winning a prize in the auxiliary gaming device and the possibility of winning in a specific area in the auxiliary gaming device may be different depending on the flowing area where the game ball flows down.

As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start prize port 36, the normal variable prize device 37, the second start prize port) 97) In the gaming machine 10 that executes a game based on the winning of a game ball to 97) and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result, the game board 30 has a game area An outer peripheral wall 31 that defines the outer periphery of the outer peripheral wall 32, a guide wall 491 that is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and that forms a guide path 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32, A center case 40 provided substantially at the center, a plate-like partition wall 531 between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31, and a game ball that can flow down on both sides of the partition wall 531. region( 1 flows down region 541, so that the second falling region 542) is formed. Therefore, it is possible to change the flow-down mode of the game ball and improve the interest.

The guide path 490 is provided on the left and right sides of the game area 32, and the partition wall 531 is provided on the left and right other sides of the game area 32, and the player adjusts the firing force to sandwich the partition wall 531. However, it becomes possible to select which of the flow-down areas respectively formed on both sides the game ball is allowed to flow into. Therefore, it is possible to select the flow area that the player is allowed to flow down, so that interest can be improved.

Further, the partition wall 531 has an upstream end in the rolling direction of the game ball positioned above the center case 40. Therefore, it is possible to select a flow-down region that flows down above the center case 40 that is easily visible to the player.

[Seventh Modification] Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification includes a reflective surface 550.

As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine of this modification includes a reflective surface 550 above the center case 40 in the game area 32, and a part of the character string 551 that presents information to the player is on the reflective surface 550. It is written to overlap. As the character string 551 for presenting information to the player, a warning character such as a display for prompting not to stare at the same light for a long time from a short distance, information indicating that an anti-fraud sensor is mounted, and game content And explanation of the operation method.

When such a character string 551 is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550, the player's attention is drawn to the reflective surface 550 that gives an impression different from the surroundings, and when the player views the reflective surface 550 Thus, the character string 551 is also seen naturally, and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. In particular, since the first few characters of the character string 551 overlap the reflective surface 550, it is easy to start reading, and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Of course, only the characters other than the head of the character string 551 may overlap the reflective surface 550. The entire character string 551 may overlap the reflective surface 550.

In addition, the position where the reflective surface 550 is provided and the position where the character string 551 is described are positions through which the game ball passes, and the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 are naturally seen in the process of following the game ball. Therefore, information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Here, a character string 551 is arranged at a portion where the game ball moves to the right, and the direction in which the character string 511 is read matches the movement direction of the game ball. This also allows the character string 551 to be read naturally. Of course, the moving direction of the game ball and the direction of reading the character string 551 may be different.

The reflective surface 550 is formed in a cell attached to the front surface of the game board main body 80, and a character string 551 is also printed on the cell. For example, it can be formed by processing the cell to have a metallic luster. Furthermore, a sheet-like lens may be stacked. Further, a reflective member such as a mirror may be disposed on the front surface of the game board main body 80, and the front surface may be covered with a transparent cell.

As a region where the reflective surface 550 is projected, it is preferable that the entire face of the player 552 can be projected while sitting in front of the gaming machine 10 and playing a game as shown in FIG. 169 (a). Since the player's own face is reflected, the player's interest is attracted, and the chance to see the character string 551 can be increased by increasing the chance of seeing the reflective surface 550. Further, the upper body of the player 552 may be shown. Moreover, if the area | region of a player's right and left back can be projected, it can confirm that the store clerk came, for example in the case of replacement | exchange of a ball box.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the reflecting surface 550 may be configured to reflect the left and right rear areas of the player. In this case, it is preferable that the state of the lamp on the front frame provided in the gaming machine 553 of the island facility located behind the player can be visually recognized. By doing in this way, the state of the gaming machine 553 located behind the player can be confirmed without turning around. Further, the light from the rear gaming machine 553 is reflected by the reflection surface 550, so that the reflection surface 550 is indirectly decorated and the character string 551 can be more noticed. Further, if the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror, a wide area can be projected with a small reflecting surface. Of course, it may be a concave mirror.

In addition, it is preferable that light from the light emitting member of the gaming machine 10 or light from a game store is not directly reflected by the reflecting surface 550 to the player. Regarding the light from the light emitting member of the gaming machine 10, the arrangement of the light emitting member and the light emission direction are adjusted so that the light is reflected by the reflecting surface 550 and is not emitted to the front of the gaming machine 10. For light from the outside of the gaming machine 10 such as lighting of a game shop, the reflective surface 550 is made slightly downward, or light is incident on the reflective surface 550 by protruding the front periphery of the front frame 12 forward. It can cope by preventing.

Further, the position where the reflecting surface 550 is provided is not limited to the illustrated position. For example, the reflective surface 550 may be provided in the vicinity of the guide wall 491 and the character string 551 may be arranged along the guide wall 491. For example, the reflective surface 550 may be provided in the vicinity of the outer peripheral wall 31, and the character string 551 may be disposed along the outer peripheral wall 31. Further, the reflective surface 550 may be provided in the guide portion 490, and the character string 551 may be arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31 or the guide wall 491. In addition, a reflective surface 550 may be provided on an operating accessory, and character information may be superimposed on the reflective surface 550. As the character string 551 in this case, a character string related to the effect of the game (such as “Intense heat”) can be cited.

Further, the reflection surface 550 may be a half mirror. In this case, a space is provided on the back side of the reflective surface 550, and the space can be illuminated by the light emitting member. In this way, if the light emitting member is turned off to darken the space, the player can see the reflecting surface 550 as a mirror, and if the light emitting member is turned on to brighten the space, the player will see the reflecting surface 550. It will be in the state which can visually recognize space through.

Further, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be provided outside the game area 32 of the game board 30 or may be provided on the front frame 12. In addition, as a gaming machine provided with the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551, a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on winning in the starting area as described above has been described, but it is also provided for other gaming machines. Is possible. For example, so-called wings that can be awarded to an auxiliary gaming device based on a winning in the starting area and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a game ball won in the auxiliary gaming device flows into a specific area (Old two types) gaming machines may be used. Further, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be arranged in a portion that can be visually recognized by the player in the slot machine.

From the above, the player can visually recognize the gaming machine 10 that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A reflective surface 550 that reflects light is provided on the front surface, and a part of the character string 551 that presents information to the player is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550. Therefore, by attracting the player's attention by the reflecting surface 550, the player can be made aware of the presence of the character string 551, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Further, the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflective surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player. In addition, a wide range can be projected.

Further, the reflecting surface 550 can reflect at least the entire face of the player who is playing the game. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflective surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Further, the reflection surface 550 can reflect the left and right rear areas of the player. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflective surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player. Further, it becomes possible to confirm the state behind the player.

In addition, the game board 30 including the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the game area 32 is provided with the reflection surface 550, and the game ball can flow down in front of the reflection surface 550. . Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflective surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

[Eighth Modification] Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification has different opening times for the large winning opening for short opening.

Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, the big prize opening opening time for short opening (second opening aspect) is, for example, 0.2 seconds, and the large winning opening for long opening (first opening aspect) is opened. The time is, for example, 29 seconds, but in the case of this modification, the big winning opening opening time for the short opening (second opening mode) is, for example, 1.8 seconds, for the long opening (first opening mode). The opening time of the big prize opening is 29 seconds, for example. In other words, in the case of the present modification, the opening time (opening time) of the special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state (first special gaming state) is at least one game ball in one opening. It is set to a time (for example, 1.8 seconds) or more that can be awarded to the special variable winning device 38. In the big hit gaming state, if at least one game ball is not won by one opening of the special variable winning device 38, the big hit gaming state cannot be said to be an advantageous state for the player. As described above, “the opening time per one time of the special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state is set to be equal to or longer than the time at which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 by one opening”. The jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player regardless of the type of jackpot.

Here, when a game is played for a long time (for example, 10 hours or more), the short opening of the big prize opening occurs a plurality of times in the long-time game. An example of a time value at which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 in the open state is 1.8 seconds. That is, “the opening time per one time of the special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state is set to be longer than the time at which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 by one opening”. The time during which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 in one release is “at least one short release among a plurality of short releases in a long game, and at least one In other words, “the time during which the game ball can win the special variable winning device 38”.

FIG. 170 shows the operation of the special variable winning device 38 that can be executed in each round of the special gaming state. In the case of this modification, the opening time for the large winning opening for short opening, that is, the opening time in the short opening round is 1.8 seconds, and the opening time for the large winning opening for long opening, that is, opening in the long opening round is possible. The time is 29 seconds. The short opening round includes a one-time short opening round in which one short opening is performed and a plurality of short opening rounds in which a plurality of short opening is performed. Here, when the condition for whether the available time has elapsed or the predetermined number of game balls wins is satisfied, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. Prior to the time lapse condition being met, a round is highly likely to win a predetermined number of game balls. The short open round is a condition for winning a predetermined number of game balls. It can be said that it is a round with a high possibility that the condition of the elapse of the openable time will be established before performing.

As shown in FIG. 170 (a), in the first short opening round, the special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round and the effective period of the big winning opening switch 38a (depending on the big winning opening switch 38a). The period in which the detection of the game ball is treated as valid) starts (t101). When 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t102). When the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds in this modification) elapses from the end of the round, the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends (t103), and further, the interval time (in this modification) , 0.1 seconds), the next round is started (t104).

As described above, in the one short opening round, the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds) is longer than the opening time (1.8 seconds) of the special variable winning device 38. Here, the remaining ball processing time is the time from the time when the opening / closing member 990 is converted from the open state to the closed state until the end of the effective period of the big winning opening switch 38a. Therefore, during the remaining ball processing time, the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, and the big prize opening switch 38a is valid (the state where the detection of the game ball by the big prize opening switch 38a is regarded as valid). It has become.

When the remaining ball processing time is short (specifically, when the value of the remaining ball processing time is equal to or less than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the opening time)), the special ball winning device 38 is largely closed. When the game ball flowing into the winning opening 38d is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990, it is highly likely that the valid period of the big winning opening switch 38a will end before the gaming ball passes through the large winning opening switch 38a. If the validity period of the big prize opening switch 38a expires before the game ball passes the big prize opening switch 38a, the detection of the game ball by the big prize opening switch 38a becomes invalid, so that the game ball becomes a big prize opening. In spite of flowing into 38d, it is not counted as a winning ball to the special variable winning device 38.

On the other hand, in the present modified example, the value of the remaining ball processing time is longer than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the opening time), so that the game that flows into the big winning opening 38d when the special variable winning device 38 is closed. Even if the ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990, it is highly likely that the validity period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends after the game ball passes through the big prize opening switch 38a. That is, even if a game ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990, the game ball is likely to be counted as a winning ball to the special variation winning device 38. Therefore, when a game ball that flows into the big prize opening 38d is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990 when the special variable prize winning device 38 is closed, the player is discouraged if the game ball is not counted as a winning ball. Contrary to the player's expectation, the game ball can be counted as a winning ball, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In the present modification, hereinafter, game balls counted as winning balls to the special variable winning device 38 are referred to as “large winning balls”.

As shown in FIG. 170 (b), in the multiple short open round, the special variable winning device 38 is opened and the effective period of the big winning opening switch 38a starts with the start of the round (t111). When 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed (t112), and when two seconds have elapsed, the special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t113). The 1.8 second opening and the 2 second closing are alternately repeated (t111 to t116). When the third opening is completed, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t116). When the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds in this modification) elapses from the end of the round, the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends (t117), and further, the interval time (in this modification) , 0.1 seconds), the next round is started (t118).

Thus, in a plurality of short opening rounds, the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds) is longer than the opening time (1.8 seconds) of the special variable winning device 38 and the closing time of the special variable winning device 38. Shorter than (2 seconds). When the remaining ball processing time is long (specifically, when the value of the remaining ball processing time is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the closing time)) When more game balls than the set number of balls flow into the big prize opening 38d, there is a possibility that the number of big prize balls will increase too much.

In the case of this modification, as in the first embodiment, the special variation winning device 38 can retain the game ball on the opening / closing member 990 while the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, so There is a high possibility that more game balls than the number of balls set as the number of winning balls will flow into the big winning port 38d. When the value of the remaining ball processing time is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the closing time), a setting is made when a larger number of game balls flow into the grand prize opening 38d than the set number of balls. There is a high possibility that the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a will end after a larger number of game balls pass through the big prize opening switch 38a. When the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a expires after a larger number of game balls than the set number of balls pass through the big prize opening switch 38a, the number of big winning balls increases, and the number of game balls won per round The number is likely to deviate greatly from the design value.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the value of the remaining ball processing time is shorter than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the closing time), so that more game balls than the set number of balls are the big prize opening. Even if it flows into 38d, there is a high possibility that the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a will end before more game balls pass through the big prize opening switch 38a. Accordingly, the number of winning prize balls does not increase too much, and it is possible to realize the number of acquired game balls (the number of acquired game balls per round) as designed.

Further, when the closing time is short (specifically, when the closing time value is equal to or less than a predetermined reference time value (here, the remaining ball processing time value)), it is arranged in the right game area. It is not possible to secure a sufficient time for aiming at the special variable winning device 38. Therefore, when the player notices the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 990 and starts right-handed, the number of game balls set as the number of large winning balls per round arrives at the special variable winning device 38. There is a high probability that multiple short-opening rounds will be completed before starting. If the short open round is completed a plurality of times before the set number of game balls arrive at the special variable winning device 38, the number of large winning balls will be too small, and the number of acquired game balls per round will be less than the design value. There is a high possibility of a large deviation.

On the other hand, in this modification, since the value of the closing time is longer than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the remaining ball processing time), the special variation winning device 38 disposed in the right game area is aimed. Even if the player notices the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 990 and starts to make a right turn, the game ball of the set number of balls arrives at the special winning device 38. There is a high possibility that multiple short-opening rounds will be completed. Therefore, the number of winning balls is not reduced too much, and it is possible to realize the number of acquired game balls (the number of acquired game balls per round) as designed. Further, since the number of the big winning balls does not become too small, “the opening time per one time of the special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state is set to at least one game ball in the special variable winning device 38 in one opening. The meaning of "set more than the time that can be won in" is not spoiled.

In this modification, the opening time (1.8 seconds) in the one-time short opening round is the same as the opening time (1.8 seconds) in the plurality of short opening rounds. The closing time (2 seconds) is the same as the sum of the remaining sphere processing time (1.9 seconds) and the interval time (0.1 seconds). This makes it difficult to understand the boundaries between rounds. In other words, since it becomes difficult to know whether it is in the middle of multiple short open rounds or in the middle of one short open round being repeated, for example, an effect that does not display the number of rounds on the display device 41 is executed. When it is, it becomes possible to enhance the production effect of the production.

As shown in FIG. 170 (c), in the long open round, the special variable winning device 38 is opened and the effective period of the big winning opening switch 38a starts with the start of the round (t121). When 29 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t122). When the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds in the case of this modification) elapses from the end of the round, the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends (t123), and further, the interval time (in the case of this modification) , 0.1 seconds), the next round is started (t124). Thus, in the long open round, the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds) is shorter than the open time (29 seconds) of the special variable winning device 38.

In the multiple short open rounds, the first open time, the second open time, and the third open time are not limited to the same time (for example, 1.8 seconds), and these three open times are At least one may be a different time. Further, in the multiple short open rounds, the first closing time and the second closing time are not limited to the same time, and the two closing times may be different from each other. Further, in the multiple short open rounds, the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened is not limited to 3 times, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it is multiple times.

Also, the opening time of the short opening round is not limited to 1.8 seconds, but it is longer than the time (for example, 1.8 seconds) in which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 by one opening. If necessary, it can be changed as appropriate. Also, the opening time of the long opening round is not limited to 29 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the remaining sphere processing time is not limited to 1.9 seconds, and can be changed as appropriate. The remaining ball processing time is such that when more game balls than the set number of balls flow into the big prize opening 38d, more game balls than the set number of balls pass through the big prize opening switch 38a. It is preferable that the effective period of the big prize opening switch 38a is a time to end. In addition, the remaining ball processing time is “the opening time per one time of the special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state is longer than the time that at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 in one opening. For example, when a game ball of the set number of balls flows into the big prize opening 38d, the game ball of the set number of balls won a big prize. It is preferable that the effective period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends after passing through the mouth switch 38a. Further, the interval time is not limited to 0.1 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.

[Big Winner Switch Monitoring Processing] In order to realize the operation of the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG. 170, in this modified example, instead of the big winning port switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. Perform mouth switch monitoring processing. Since the process of steps A201 to A222 in the special winning opening switch monitoring process of the present modification is the same as FIG. 55, the description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 171, in the big prize opening switch monitoring process of the present modification, when the small hitting medium is not being processed (step A221; N), it is determined whether the big prize opening is being processed (step A223a). ). If it is not in the process of opening the big winning opening (step A223a; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and if it is in the process of opening the big winning opening (step A223a; Y), the big winning opening is completed. The value of the big hit release operation end is saved in the control pointer area (step A223b), and the big prize opening switch monitoring process is ended.

[Processing during fanfare / interval] In order to realize the operation of the special variable prize-winning device 38 shown in FIG. 170, in this modification, instead of the processing during the fanfare / interval shown in FIG. 77, during the fanfare / interval shown in FIG. Process. Since the processes of steps A901 to A903 and A909 in the fanfare / interval process of this modification are the same as those in FIG. 77, the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the fanfare / interval processing of this modification, after the processing of step A903, the big winning opening release information and the big hit processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step A910a), the big hit middle processing control pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step A910b). In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 170, when opening and closing is repeated in one round (that is, in the case of multiple short open rounds), “0” is set as the initial value for the big hit mid-process control pointer. . In addition, when performing one release in one round (that is, in the case of one short release round or long release round), the big hit operation end value “4” is set as the big hit mid-process control pointer initial value. To do.

Next, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step A910c), and the process proceeds to step A909. In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 170, the opening time set in step A910c is 1.8 seconds or 29 seconds.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process] In addition, in this modified example, the big winning opening open process transition setting process shown in FIG. 173 is performed instead of the large winning opening open process transition setting process shown in FIG. . Since the process of steps A911 to A915 in the process for setting the transition to the special prize opening opening process of this modification is the same as that in FIG. 78, the description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 173, in the big winning opening opening process transition setting process of this modification, after the processing of step A914, a signal related to the opening of the big winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is turned on) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A916a), and the process proceeds to step A915.

[Process during opening of special prize opening] In order to realize the operation of the special variable prize-winning device 38 shown in FIG. 170, in this modified example, instead of the process during opening of the special prize opening shown in FIG. 79, the big prize shown in FIG. Perform treatment while the mouth is open. The processing in steps A1001, A1007, and A1009 to A1011 in the processing for opening the special winning opening in this modification is the same as that in FIG. As shown in FIG. 174, in the big winning opening opening process of this modification, first, the big hit middle process control pointer is loaded and prepared (step A1012a), and the loaded value is the big hit action end value (in this modification). In the case 4), it is determined whether or not (step A1012b).

If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (step A1012b; N), the big hit operation transition setting process is performed (step A1012c), the big hit processing control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1012d), and the big prize opening is released. End the middle process. In this modification, when the current round is a short open round multiple times and the third release is not completed, it is determined in step A1012b that the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value. The

On the other hand, if the loaded value is greater than or equal to the jackpot operation end value (step A1012b; Y), the process proceeds to step A1001. If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), and an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed. If it is the final round (step A1001; Y), an ending command is prepared (step A1009), and an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed.

Next, the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds in the case of this modification) corresponding to the special winning opening information is set (step A1012e), and the set remaining ball processing time is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A1012f), the process proceeds to step A1011.

As in the first embodiment, when the current round is a long open round, the remaining ball processing time for long closing is set, and the current round is a short open round (one short open loud, multiple open rounds). In the case of the short open round, it is possible to set the remaining ball processing time for short closing. Further, as in the first embodiment, when the current round is the final round, it is possible to set the final remaining sphere processing time.

[Big-hit motion transition setting process] FIG. 175 shows the big-hit motion transition setting process (step A1012c) in the above-described large winning opening opening process. In the big hit operation transition setting process, first, a branch process using a big hit mid-process control pointer is performed (step A1013a).

If the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is 0 or 2, the wait time corresponding to the big hit mid-process control pointer (2 seconds in the case of this modification) is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1013b). . Note that different wait times (closing times) may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, a signal related to closing of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1013c), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (Step A1013d), the jackpot movement transition setting process is terminated.

Also, when the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is 1 or 3, the special winning game opening timer area corresponding to the big hit mid-process control pointer (1.8 seconds in the case of this modification) is shown in the special game process timer area. (Step A1013e). It should be noted that a special winning opening opening time (opening time) may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1013f), and the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (Step A1013g), the jackpot movement transition setting process is terminated. As a result, the 1.8-second winning opening opening time (opening time) and the 2-second wait time (closing time) are alternately set. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. It is possible to alternately repeat the opening of seconds and the closing of 2 seconds.

[Big Winner Port Remaining Ball Processing Transition Setting Process] In this modified example, instead of the Big Winner Port Remaining Ball Processing Transition Setting Process shown in FIG. . The processing of steps A1021 to A1023 in the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the present modification is the same as that in FIG. As shown in FIG. 176, in the big winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process of this modification, after the processing of step A1022, a signal related to closing the big winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is turned OFF) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1024a), and the process proceeds to step A1023.

[Large winning hole remaining ball processing] In order to realize the operation of the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG. 170, in this modified example, instead of the large winning port remaining ball processing shown in FIG. Mouth residual sphere processing is performed. Since the processing of steps A1101 and A1109 to A1114 in the winning prize remaining ball processing of the present modification is the same as that in FIG. 81, the description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 177, in the big winning opening remaining ball processing of this modification, if it is not the final round (step A1101; N), the interval time corresponding to the big winning opening information and the current round number (this modification) In the example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1115a), and the process proceeds to step A1109.

In this modified example, since the rank-down effect (the effect of notifying that the round is a short open round) is not executed, the process of steps A1102 to A1108 is not executed in the big winning opening remaining ball process. It should be noted that this modified example can also be configured to execute a rank-down effect. In this modification, 16R probability variation A (all long open), 16R probability variation B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open multiple times), 16R probability variation C (1 to 4R is long open) as the big hit pattern , 5-16R are short open once), 16R normal A (all open long), 16R normal B (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open multiple times), 16R normal C (1-4R is long open) Open, 5-16R is short open once), 4R probability change (all short open once) is set. Accordingly, when the rank-down effect is configured to be executed, if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round as in the first embodiment, a normal interval time (0.1 second in the case of this modification) is set. When the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) saved in the special figure game process timer area, the interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is displayed in the special figure game process timer area. Is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

[Small-hit mid-process transition setting process] In addition, in this modification, instead of the small-hit / middle process transition setting process illustrated in FIG. 88B, a small-hit / middle process transition setting process illustrated in FIG. Since the process of steps A1311 to A1317 in the small hitting / medium process transition setting process of the present modification is the same as FIG. 88 (b), the description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 178, in the small hitting process transition setting process of this modification, after performing the process of step A1314, a signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 release signal is turned ON). The data is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1318a), and the process proceeds to step A1315.

[Small hitting operation transition setting process] Further, in this modification, instead of the small hitting action transition setting process shown in FIG. 90, a small hitting action transition setting process shown in FIG. 179 is performed. Since the processing of steps A1411 to A1415 in the small hit motion transition setting processing of the present modification is the same as that in FIG. 90, description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 179, in the small hitting action transition setting process of this modification, after the process of step A1412 is performed, a signal related to closing of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is OFF) is tested. The data is saved in the signal output data area (step A1416a), and the process proceeds to step A1413. In addition, after performing the process of step A1414, a signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 release signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1417a), and the process of step A1415 is performed. Migrate to

[Small Hit Residual Sphere Process Transition Setting Process] In this modification, a small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process shown in FIG. 180 is performed instead of the small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process shown in FIG. The processing of steps A1421 to A1424 in the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the present modification is the same as that in FIG. As shown in FIG. 180, in the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process of this modification, after performing the process of step A1423, a signal related to closing of the big prize opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 release signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1425a), and the process proceeds to step A1424.

Here, in this modified example, in step A913 of the process for setting a process for opening a big prize opening during the fanfare / interval process (FIG. 172) (FIG. 173), a signal (for example, special electric The character 1 operating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area. Also, step A1123 of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (FIG. 82) in the winning prize remaining ball process (FIG. 177) and the jackpot end process transition setting process (FIG. 83) in the winning prize remaining ball process (FIG. 177). ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (for example, the special electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is OFF) in step A1133.

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is displayed at the end of the fanfare / interval processing (that is, the big prize opening). It is set to ON at the start of the process during opening (immediately before the start), and is set to OFF at the end of the big winning opening remaining ball process. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the special electric player operating signal (for example, the special electric player 1 operating signal) is processed during the big winning opening opening processing and the big winning opening remaining ball processing. It turns on.

In addition, in Step A1314 of the small hit medium processing transition setting process (FIG. 178) in the small hit fanfare medium processing (FIG. 88A), a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) ON) is saved in the test signal output data area. Further, in step A1514 of the small hit end process transition setting process (FIG. 92B) in the small hit remaining ball process (FIG. 92A), a signal related to the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area.

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is displayed at the end of the small hit fanfare processing (ie, the small hit) It is set to ON at the start of the middle process (immediately before the start), and is set to OFF at the end of the small hit remaining ball process. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is displayed during the small hit processing and the small hit remaining ball processing. Turns on.

Further, in this variation, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 171), when the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), or when the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A202; Y) A process for determining whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 38a when the small hitting is being processed (step A203; Y) or the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A204; Y). (Step A206) is configured to be performed.

Accordingly, the process of determining whether there is an input to the special prize opening switch 38a during a period in which the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is in the ON state is performed (step A206). It becomes. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 181, for example, the special winning combination switch 38a is valid during a period in which the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is ON, and the special electric accessory 38a is activated. During the period in which the operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is in the OFF state, the special prize opening switch 38a is disabled.

In this modification, as shown in FIGS. 173, 175, 178, and 179, a signal (for example, a special winning opening) is released immediately before saving on-data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. The electric accessory 1 release signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area. Also, as shown in FIGS. 175, 176, 179, and 180, a signal related to closing of the special winning opening (for example, opening of the special electric accessory 1 is released immediately before saving off data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. Signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 182, for example, the opening / closing member 990 is opened during a period in which the special electric accessory release signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 release signal) is ON, and the special electric accessory release signal ( For example, the opening / closing member 990 is closed during a period in which the special electric accessory 1 opening signal) is OFF.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present modification includes the opening / closing member 990 that can be converted into a closed state in which a winning area (large winning opening 38d) into which a game ball can flow is closed and an open state in which the winning area is opened. A special game for performing a conversion operation (opening / closing operation) for converting the open / close member 990 between a closed state and an open state when the game result is a special result. A game machine capable of generating a state, a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the winning area (large winning opening switch 38a), and an effective period during which detection of the gaming ball by the detecting means is effective (large winning opening switch) Setting means (game control device 100) for setting an effective time value corresponding to (valid period of 38a), and control means (game control device 100) capable of executing conversion control for controlling the conversion operation of the opening / closing member 990. Preparation To have. The setting means sets the effective time value so that the effective period starts at the start of the conversion control by the control means, and the effective period ends after the end of the conversion control. The opening time value corresponding to the period in which 990 is in the open state (the opening time value of the special variable prize-winning device 38) is set to a plurality of predetermined opening time values (1.8 seconds and 29 in this modification). Seconds), and the multiple types of opening time values are all equal to or greater than a predetermined time value (1.8 seconds in the case of this modification), and the difference obtained by subtracting the opening time value from the effective time value. The remaining time value that is a time value (in the case of this modification, the value of the remaining sphere processing time) is configured to be a time value longer than the predetermined time value.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification includes signal transmission means (game control apparatus 100) capable of transmitting a predetermined signal (for example, a test fire test signal) to an external device, and the signal transmission means An opening period corresponding to the member 990 being in the open state (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal) and an effective period corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the detection means (big winning opening switch 38a) being effective A signal (for example, a signal indicating that the special electric accessory 1 is operating) can be transmitted to the external device. Then, the control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling the conversion operation of the opening / closing member 990 has a predetermined opening time value (the value of the opening time of the special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the transmission period of the opening signal. A valid period in which the detection of the game ball by the detection means is valid (valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a is selected from a plurality of types of opening time values (1.8 seconds and 29 seconds in the case of this modification). The setting means (game control device 100) for setting an effective time value corresponding to) starts the effective period at the start of transmission of the effective period signal, and ends the effective period at the end of transmission of the effective period signal. A valid time value can be set.

Therefore, since the remaining time value (the value of the remaining ball processing time) is longer than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the opening time), even if the game ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990, the game ball is specially changed. The possibility of being counted as a winning ball to the winning device 38 is high. Therefore, when a game ball that flows into the big prize opening 38d is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990 when the special variable prize winning device 38 is closed, the player is discouraged if the game ball is not counted as a winning ball. Contrary to the player's expectation, the game ball can be counted as a winning ball, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The opening / closing member 990 is not limited to a so-called velo-type electric accessory that opens and closes the big winning opening 38d by moving forward and backward (sliding) in the front-rear direction, and can be changed as appropriate. It may be an attacker-type electric accessory that opens the special winning opening 38d by rotating in the direction. Further, the winning area is not limited to the large winning opening 38d and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the winning area may be a winning opening of the normal variation winning apparatus 37. That is, the variable winning device is not limited to the special variable winning device 38 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the normal winning device 37 may be used.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of this modification, the control means (game control device 100) converts the opening / closing member 990 during the period from the start to the end of the conversion control (that is, from the start to the end of one round). It is possible to execute the operation (opening / closing operation) a plurality of times, and in the conversion control in which the conversion operation of the opening / closing member 990 is executed a plurality of times (in the case of this modification, a plurality of short opening rounds), the opening / closing member 990 is closed. The closing time value (the value of the closing time of the special variable prize-winning device 38) corresponding to the period from when the state becomes the open state again to the remaining time value (the value of the remaining ball processing time in this modification) It can be configured to have a longer time value. By configuring in this way, the closing time value becomes longer than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the remaining ball processing time), so that it is possible to secure a sufficient time for aiming at the special variable winning device 38. It is possible to achieve the number of acquired game balls (the number of acquired game balls per round) as designed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification converts the closing time value in conversion control (in the case of the present modification, multiple short open rounds) in which the conversion operation (opening / closing operation) of the opening / closing member 990 is executed a plurality of times. Can be configured to be the same as the time value corresponding to the period from the end of the control to the start of the next conversion control (in this modification, the sum of the remaining sphere processing time value and the interval time value). It is. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to understand the boundary between the conversion control and the next conversion control (that is, between rounds). For example, when performing an effect that does not display the number of rounds on the display device 41, It is possible to enhance the production effect of the production.

Here, in this modification, it is possible to execute each effect at the timing shown in FIG. 183, for example. Specifically, along with the start of the round (in this example, the first round), the special variable prize-winning device 38 is opened and the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a is started (t131). Further, with the start of the round, an effect of displaying the number of acquired game balls and the number of consecutive games on the display device 41 and the effect of displaying the number of rounds on the display device 41 and the like (round number display effect) are started.

Further, for example, during the period from the start to the end of the special gaming state, an image imitating the special variation winning device 38 (large winning opening) is displayed on the display device 41 or the like. With the start of the round, the image opening / closing member 990 simulating the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) is opened, and the moving image in which the game ball wins the special variable winning device 38 is displayed on the display device 41 or the like. The effect to be displayed (a special prize opening opening display effect) is started. In addition, with the start of the round, an effect of lighting the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 starts. While the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state, by setting the luminance of the LED to “high”, it is notified that it is a timing at which, for example, a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Further, along with the start of the round, an effect of operating the accessory such as the board effect device 44 (an accessory operation effect) is started, and an effect of lighting an LED provided on the accessory is started. While the accessory is operating, the brightness of the LED provided on the accessory is set to “high” in order to attract attention to the accessory. That is, during execution of the accessory operation effect, an effect (high light emission effect) of setting the luminance of the LED provided on the accessory to “high” is also executed.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the round, the accessory action effect ends, the accessory returns to the initial position, and the brightness of the LED provided on the accessory changes from “high” to “medium” (t132). . When the big winning opening opening time has elapsed from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t133). Then, with the end of the round, the image opening / closing member 990 simulating the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) is closed, and the large winning opening opening display effect is ended.

As the round ends, the brightness of the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 is switched from “high” to “medium”. In the remaining ball processing period (period for counting the remaining ball processing time), by setting the brightness of the LED to “medium”, for example, the open / close member 990 is closed, but the big prize opening switch 38a is effective ( The detection of the game ball by the big prize opening switch 38a is treated as effective). Further, along with the end of the round, the brightness of the LED provided in the accessory is switched from “medium” to “low”.

When the remaining ball processing time elapses from the end of the round, the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends, and the effect of displaying the number of rounds and the LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 are ended. (T134) When the interval time further elapses, the next round starts (t135). When the remaining ball processing time has elapsed from the end of the round, the effect of lighting the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 is not ended, but the luminance of the LEDs is changed from “medium” to “low”. It may be switched to “middle” or “high”. In addition, as the effective period notification means, the winning opening opening time and the remaining ball processing time are notified by switching the luminance of the LED, but it is also possible to notify by color using an LED whose emission color can be changed. is there. Furthermore, it is also possible to notify each time by separate LEDs and notify by a plurality of indicators.

Here, when the round ends, an over-winning effect executable period in which an over-winning effect can be executed starts, and the over-winning effect can be executed with the end of the effective period of the big prize opening switch 38a. The period ends. The over-winning effect is an effect of notifying by sound or the like that an over-winning (so-called over-winning) has occurred when the number of counts in the big winnings exceeds the upper limit value and reaches a predetermined threshold value. In this modification, an over-winning effect for notifying the occurrence of over-winning is performed by sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b. Moreover, in this modification, when an over winning effect is executed, the accessory operates, and the luminance of the LED provided in the accessory is switched from “low” to “high”. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the occurrence of an overwinning not only by sound but also by an accessory or light. That is, in this modification, when an over winning is detected (when it is determined that the number of large winning mouth counts exceeds the upper limit value and reaches a predetermined threshold), during the over winning effect implementation possible period, The over winning prize effect by sound, the action operation effect for operating the accessory, and the high light emission effect for setting the brightness of the LED provided in the accessory to “high” are started.

For example, as in the example shown in FIG. 183, when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period (a period for counting the interval time), that is, at the end of the over winning effect possible period (t 134). ), The over winning effect by sound is started immediately, and after the next round starts, the over winning effect ends (t136). Thus, when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the occurrence of the over winning can be clearly notified by ending the over winning effect after the next round starts. At the same time, it can be reminiscent of whether the valid period of the special prize opening switch 38a continues during the interval period. In addition, during the round, it is preferable not to output the sound accompanying the winning so as not to disturb the over winning effect due to the sound.

In addition, when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period (t134), the accessory action effect for operating the accessory is immediately started, and after the next round starts, The object movement effect ends (t137). Therefore, as described above, the accessory action production starts with the start of the round, but when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, it starts with the over winning. Continuing to the accessory action effect (that is, without returning the accessory to the initial position), the accessory action effect accompanying the start of the next round is executed.

In addition, when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period (t134), a high light emission effect for immediately setting the luminance of the LED provided on the accessory to “high” is started, After the next round starts, the high light emission effect ends (t137). Therefore, as described above, the high light emission effect is executed at the start of the round. However, when an overwin is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the high start that started with the overwin is performed. Continuing from the light emission effect (that is, without returning the luminance of the LED provided on the accessory to “low”), the high light emission effect associated with the start of the next round is executed.

On the other hand, when an over winning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the over winning effect started with the over winning is ended before the next round starts. In addition, if an overwinning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the accessory action effect started with the overwinning ends before the next round starts and the role action is finished. The thing returns to the initial position, and the accessory action effect starts with the start of the next round. In addition, if an over winning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the high-lighting effect started with the over winning is completed before the next round starts, The brightness of the LED provided in is returned to “low”, and a high light emission effect starts with the start of the next round.

As in the case where an over-winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the next round is also determined when an over winning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period. After the start, the over winning effect may be ended. Similar to the case where an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the over winning is also detected when an over winning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period. The accessory action effect and the high light emission effect accompanying the start of the next round may be executed following the accessory action effect and the high light emission effect that have started.

The effect control device 300, for example, during the interval period, based on the round command from the game control device 100 (see step A902), data for the round number display effect to be executed in the next round (that is, the next round Set the data for displaying the number of rounds.

In addition, when the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is a gaming machine having a V switch (a probability variation operation region switch 460 for detecting a gaming ball flowing into the V flow path 955a), the effect control device 300 has the next round When it is a probability change determination round (a round in which it is determined whether or not a special game state will be brought into a high probability state depending on whether or not a game ball flows into the V channel 955a), from the interval period immediately before the probability change determination round An effect of displaying an image such as “Aim at V!” On the display device 41 or the like may be executed. At this time, the data for displaying the image may be set during the remaining sphere processing period immediately before the probability change determination round, or may be set during the interval period immediately before the probability change determination round.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is a gaming machine having a V switch, the production control device 300 is in the probability variation determination round and / or the probability variation determination round when the next round is a probability variation determination round. An effect that makes the special variation winning device 38 stand out may be executed during the last remaining ball processing period or interval period. The effect that makes the special variable winning device 38 stand out is, for example, that the brightness of the LED provided in the special variable winning device 38 is set to “high” and other LEDs (other than the LEDs provided in the special variable winning device 38) are set. This is an effect of setting the brightness of the LED) to other than “high”. At the time of production that makes the special variation winning device 38 stand out, for example, the brightness of the other LEDs can be set to other than “high” by lowering the brightness of the other LEDs by one step from the normal brightness. “Decrease from normal brightness by one step” means that when the normal brightness (the brightness when the effect that makes the special variable winning device 38 conspicuous is not executed) is “high”, it is set to “medium”. ”Is set to“ low ”, and“ low ”or“ 0 (none) ”is set to“ 0 (none) ”.

In addition, when the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is an ST type gaming machine with a limited number of special figure variable display games that can be executed in a high probability state, the effect control device 300 is executed in a high probability state. An additional effect is added during the interval period to add a predetermined number to the remaining number of possible special-figure display games (hereinafter referred to as “the number of remaining games”), and this additional effect is performed multiple times, and the remaining number of games is gradually increased. You may make it return to the regulation frequency. Specifically, for example, when the remaining number of games is 70 and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, during the interval period between 5R and 6R, during the interval period between 10R and 11R, and between 15R and 16R During the interval, an effect of adding 10 times to the remaining number of games may be performed, and the remaining number of games may be gradually returned to the specified number (100 in this example). That is, the remaining number of games is displayed on the display device 41 and the like, and the display of the number of remaining games is switched from “70 times” to “80 times (= 70 times + 10 times)” during the interval period between 5R and 6R. The display of the number of remaining games is switched from “80 times” to “90 times (= 80 + 10 times)” during the interval period between 11R and 11R, and the display of the number of remaining games is displayed during the interval period between 15R and 16R. An effect of switching from “90 times” to “100 times (= 90 times + 10 times)” may be performed. By performing such an effect, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the addition effect is performed a plurality of times, some of the addition effects may be performed during other periods instead of during the interval period. Specifically, for example, when the remaining number of games is 70 and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the remaining number of games is counted during the interval period between 10R and 11R and during the interval period between 15R and 16R. Addition effect of adding 10 times is performed, and then 10 times are added to the remaining number of games when the display of the remaining number of games becomes “0” (when the actual remaining number of games becomes 10). An effect of switching the display of the number of remaining games from “0” to “10” may be performed. By performing such an effect, the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Game machine 38 Special variable prize-winning apparatus (variable prize-winning apparatus) 38a Large prize opening switch (detection means) 38d Large prize opening (winning area) 100 Game control apparatus (setting means, control means, signal transmission means) 990 Opening / closing member

The present invention includes a variable winning device having an opening / closing member that can be converted into a closed state in which a winning area into which a game ball can flow is closed and an open state in which the winning area is opened, and a game result is a special result. In this case, the present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a round game in which the opening / closing member performs a conversion operation is executed a plurality of times.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine equipped with a winning device that can win a game ball, the winning device includes a winning space that can receive a gaming ball, and an opening and closing member that can open and close a ball receiving port of the winning space. In the closed state, the opening space wider than the game ball is formed in front of the winning space, so that the gaming ball is sandwiched between the ball receiving port and the opening / closing member when winning the winning device to the winning device A gaming machine that avoids the problem is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2015-136556A

However, even if it is configured such that the game ball is not easily sandwiched between the opening and closing members as in a conventional gaming machine, the game balls may be sandwiched between the opening and closing members. In that case, there is a possibility that the detection of the game ball becomes invalid (that is, the winning of the game ball is invalid) and the interest of the game is lowered.
Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
A variable winning device having an open / close member that can be converted into a closed state in which a winning area into which a game ball can flow in and a closed state in which the winning area is opened;
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which the opening / closing member performs a conversion operation to convert between the closed state and the open state when a game result is a special result,
Detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing into the winning area;
Setting means for setting an effective time value corresponding to an effective period in which the detection of the game ball by the detecting means is effective;
Control means capable of executing conversion control for controlling the conversion operation of the opening and closing member;
Effective period notification means capable of notifying the effective period by a predetermined notification effect,
The setting means sets the effective time value so that the effective period starts at the start of conversion control by the control means, and the effective period ends after the end of the conversion control,
The control means selects an opening time value corresponding to a period in which the opening / closing member is in the open state from a plurality of predetermined opening time values,
The plurality of types of opening time values are all equal to or greater than a predetermined time value,
A residual time value, which is a difference time value obtained by subtracting the open time value from the effective time value, is set to a time value longer than the predetermined time value.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be enhanced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the back component. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the lower movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining operation | movement of a 1st lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation | movement of a 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation | movement of a 2nd lower movable member. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view of an upper movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of an upper movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of an upper movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the center movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a center movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a center movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a front view of a special variation winning device. It is a top view of a special variation winning device. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of an opening-and-closing member, Comprising: (a) A closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the special variation winning device. It is a back view of a front wall member. It is a figure which shows a rear wall member, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the main-body part. It is the figure seen from the left explaining operation | movement of an opening-and-closing member unit, Comprising: (a) A closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is a figure which shows an opening-and-closing member, Comprising: (a) Top view, (b) It is a front view. (A) Front view of opening / closing member unit, (b) AA sectional view. It is a bottom view explaining operation | movement of an opening-and-closing member unit, Comprising: (a) A closed state, (b) It is an open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variation winning device, (a) a top view and (b) a perspective view seen from the right side. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variation winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure explaining behavior of a game ball at the time of opening an opening-and-closing member. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a process shift setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2. FIG. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process for small hitting fanfare, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process for setting transition for small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a normal process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process during normal map change, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process transition setting process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the ordinary electric power remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining a process for setting a transition process for end of ordinary figure. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the normal chart end process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the usual chart normal process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of a state suggestion display. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a count effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a round production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an interval effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an ending effect setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production | presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production | presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in the special game state in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count effect setting process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in the special game state in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the reset table of the state suggestion display in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the production button operation production processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in the special game state in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count effect setting process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the production | presentation point control process in a 3rd modification. It is a top view of the guidance | induction part in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the special variation winning apparatus in a 4th modification, Comprising: (a) Top view, (b) The figure seen from the left side. It is a figure explaining the special variation winning apparatus in a 4th modification, Comprising: (a) Top view, (b) The figure seen from the left side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the special variation prize-winning apparatus in the 5th modification. It is a reverse view of the rear wall member in a 5th modification. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the main-body part in a 5th modification. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the body part in the 5th modification, and (a) a door part is a blocking state, and (b) a door part is a permissive state. It is a reverse view of the main-body part in a 5th modification, Comprising: (a) A door part is a blocking state, (b) A door part is a permission state. (A) The front view of a main-body part in a 5th modification, (b) BB sectional drawing in a blocking state, (c) BB sectional drawing in the permissible state of a door part. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the operation state of the special variation prize-winning apparatus in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability change operation area | region switch monitoring process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the lever solenoid control process in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of the induction | guidance | derivation flow path in a 5th modification, Comprising: (a) The reverse view of a rear wall member, (b) The enlarged view of the bending part in a 1st aspect, (c) 2nd It is an enlarged view of the bending part in the aspect. It is a front view of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in a 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in a 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in a 6th modification. It is a front view of the game board in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the image on the reflective surface in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the operation state of the special variation prize-winning apparatus in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening switch monitoring process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during the big winning opening in the eighth modified example. It is a flowchart explaining the special winning opening open process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening remaining ball processing in the eighth modification. It is a flowchart explaining the small hitting process transfer setting process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit operation | movement transfer setting process in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining the signal during operation of the special electric accessory. It is a figure explaining a special electric accessory release signal. It is a figure explaining the production in the 8th modification.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. The front frame (main body frame) 12 has a game board 3.
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of 0 is attached.

In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, if a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, on the lower part of the front frame 12 is an upper plate 21 (not shown) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (
A storage tray), an upper tray ball outlet 22 from which a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flows out, and a game ball paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full. A lower tray (receiving tray) 23 to be stored, an operation unit 24 of a hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
An effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the player.
A production button 25 is provided. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25.
Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, Balance display section for displaying the balance of the prepaid card (not shown)
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the game ball 30 is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game board 30 by the player turning the operation unit 24.
Fire toward the game area 32 on the front. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. On the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 to form a guide path 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition of the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32). In the gaming area 32, two general winning holes 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning hole is located in the lower right portion of the special variable winning device 38 arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 32).

Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special figure change display that give start conditions for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). A winning device 90 having a second start winning port 97 (start winning port, start winning area) for providing a game (special figure 2 variable display game) start condition is provided. The winning device 90 includes a sorting member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls flowing into the upper inflow port 91 into the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97. The distribution member 92 is rotatable about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction, and the direction in which the distribution member 92 tilts is changed by the weight of the inflowing game ball. The game balls are distributed alternately to the start winning opening 97. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32), and the game ball won in the second start winning opening 97 is set in the start opening 3 switch 97a.
(See FIG. 32). Further, below the winning device 90, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like.

Also, on the right part of the center case 40, there is provided an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a start condition for the second special figure changing display game. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the right. A closed state (disadvantageous for the player) is maintained in which the game ball cannot flow in almost vertically. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric fluctuation is caused by turning the upper end side to the right side by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 32) as a driving device. The game device can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that won the normal variation winning device 37 is the starting port 2
It is detected by the switch 37a (see FIG. 32). The normal variation winning device 37 may be awarded even in the closed state, and it may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a flow down path 615 is formed which is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates with the upper and lower sides. Flow down. A guiding portion 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The guiding portion 616 has an upper surface 617 that is inclined to the left.
7 and is guided to the left where the special variable winning device 38 exists. In addition, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

The information display device 630 includes a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first special figure variable display game, and a second start memory that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game. The 2nd information display part which displays the number of these is provided. In addition, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41. In the third information display unit or the display device 41, first to third
A fourth information display unit for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the second special figure variable display game by a fourth graphic is provided separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the graphic.

The first information display section and the second information display section are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right row constitute a first information display portion, and the upper two light emitting members in the left row constitute a second information display portion. Further, the lower one light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display portion, and the lower one light emitting member in the left row constitutes a fourth information display portion.

Each of the first information display unit and the second information display unit is composed of two light emitting members, but a design is applied around each information display unit to show that the two light emitting members are related. At first glance, it can be seen that one information display unit is composed of two light emitting members. In addition, each of the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit is composed of a single light emitting member, but the design around these information display units is designed to be understood to be independent. At first glance, it can be seen that the information display unit is composed of one light emitting member. In addition, the design around the light-emitting member has a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine so that the aesthetic appearance is not impaired. In addition, the design around the light emitting member is
It is not formed with a sticker or the like, but is formed on a member constituting the guiding portion 616, so that labor and cost during manufacturing can be reduced.

Further, in the lower right portion of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning port) 38 that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game is arranged. It is installed. Although the details of the configuration of the special variation winning device 38 will be described later, the opening / closing member 990 depends on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game.
However, the open / close member 990 is retracted from the closed state in which the grand prize winning opening is closed (blocking state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received (a state advantageous to the player). To do. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a special winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 990 that is driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 32) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (first special gaming state). During the small hit game state (second special game state)
By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches a game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed), whereby the first start winning port 36 and the second start winning port 97 of the winning device 90.
The player can aim to win the general winning opening 35 and launch a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed) to win the normal start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. Can be aimed at.

In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), a special figure fluctuation display game, a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and a special figure start gate 34 that make a special figure fluctuation display game are awarded. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game as a trigger and displaying various information.

The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment display (LED lamp) and the like.
A special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display part) 51 for a variable display game, a special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display part) 52 for a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and an LED lamp. Various display devices are provided. The various displays include a special figure 1 hold display for informing the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 hold display for informing the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game. . In addition, a round display unit that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable prize-winning device), a first game state display unit that informs whether the time is short (during normal power support, during a specific game state), left A second game state display section is provided for notifying a player of a strike (normal strike) and a right strike which is advantageous to the player (a strike corresponding to the game state). Also, a third game state display unit (third game state display unit, probability state display unit) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a general-purpose variable display game A general-purpose display display, and a general-purpose hold display for notification of the start memory number of the general-purpose variable display game.

In the special figure 1 display 51, during the fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 1 changing display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result form form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 2 display 52, during the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 2 changing display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result form form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure fluctuation display game.

In the map display, during the variation time of the map variation display game, the display during the variation of the map for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. And
When the fluctuation time of the usual figure changing display game is ended, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the usual figure changing display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the display during normal map display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result form form identification information (normal map, normal symbol) for displaying the general map display game.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of first start memories (first hold number), which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the number of second start memories (second hold number) that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The universal figure hold display device displays the number of universal figure start memories (the universal figure hold number) that is the right to execute the universal figure display game by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units.

The round display unit turns off all the light emitting units when not in the special gaming state, and turns on the lighting state corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special gaming state. The first game state display unit (short time state notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal game state where the short time state does not occur (when the variable time shortening function is not activated), and the short time state occurs. If the lamp is on (when the variable time reduction function is activated), turn the lamp on. The second gaming state display unit (right-handed notifying unit) 57 turns off the lamp in a gaming state in which it is more advantageous for the player to be left-handed than right-handed (normally-hit), and to turn off the lamp. When a right-handed game is more advantageous to the player (right-handed), the lamp is turned on. The third game state display unit turns on the LED if the high probability state is present when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED if the high probability state is not present.

Next, the details of the game board 30 in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 constitutes a substantially rectangular plate-like game board main body 80, a front component member 600 constituting the front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40 and the game board. 30 and a rear component member 700 to which various members necessary for the device 30 are attached.

The front component member 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side into an opening 81 penetrating in the front-rear direction formed in the game board main body 80. The front component member has an annular base member 610, and various members are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is inserted into an opening 81 penetrating in the front-rear direction formed in the game board main body 80, and a peripheral wall 611 that forms a front side portion of an inner peripheral wall in a concave chamber-like space recessed rearward from the game area 32. A plate-like hook-shaped attachment portion 612 formed perpendicular to the peripheral wall 611 at the front end of the peripheral wall 611.

A portion of the attachment portion 612 that is formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 611 is formed when the front component member 600 is inserted into the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 from the front side. The back surface of the game board main body 80 is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80. Thereby, the front-rear position of the front component member 600 with respect to the game board main body 80 is set to a predetermined front-rear position. The mounting portion 612 is formed with a plurality of screw holes so that the front component member 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. Further, a part of the mounting portion 612 is disposed on the front side of the game board main body 80 and is visible to the player, and the front is decorated. In addition, the base member 610 is further formed with screw holes, screwing portions, positioning bosses, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It has become.

On the front surface of the base member 610, a stage portion 620 and a warp flow path forming member 614, which will be described later, are provided.
A restricting wall 613 is provided except for a portion where the normal variation winning device 37 is arranged. This regulation wall 613 is forward of the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30) from the attachment portion 612. It is designed to extend. Therefore, by attaching the front component member 600 to a predetermined position of the game board main body 80, the regulation wall 613 positioned in front of the attachment portion 612 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is centered. Inflow into the case 40 is restricted. Thereby, the visibility of the display device 41 is ensured and the stage unit 6
The inflow number of game balls to 20 is limited.

Also, a warp flow that forms a warp flow path for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guiding it to the stage portion 620 on the left side when viewed from the front side of the base member 610. A path forming member 614 is attached. Warp channel forming member 614
Is attached to the front surface of the attachment portion 612, and the front-rear width of the game area 32 than the attachment portion 612 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It is designed to extend forward by that amount. Further, the upper end of the warp flow path forming member 614 is continuous with the lower end of the restriction wall 613 attached so as to extend further forward than the attachment portion 612 on the left side when viewed from the front side of the base member 610. It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40, A game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. This upstream end forms the inlet of the warp flow path. Furthermore, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball flowing in from the upstream end to the lower right and then guides it backward. The downstream end is opened rearward, and the game ball is guided to the left end of the stage unit 620.

The stage unit 620 is configured such that a game ball can roll back and forth, and right and left, and the left and right sides are inclined surfaces that descend toward the center, and the central part directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. In addition, although the center part of the stage part 620 protrudes upwards, it is lower than both right and left ends. A game ball that has passed through the warp channel from the left end flows into the stage portion 620 and rolls along the left-right direction. In addition, a game ball bounced below the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, an inclined surface 621 that descends forward is formed at the lowest portion located on both sides of the center portion protruding upward. Due to the inclined surface 621, the game ball whose flow-down force is weakened on the stage unit 620 is guided from the front end of the stage unit 620 to the game area 32 below.

Further, in the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, a groove-like flow path 622 that extends along the front-rear direction and descends rearward is formed at the apex of the center portion protruding upward. Is formed. The downflow path 622 is a shallow groove, and many game balls roll to the left and right without being fitted into the groove. The game ball fitted in the flow down path 622 is guided backward, flows into an inflow port (not shown), and flows into a guide channel 623 formed below the stage portion 620. Guide channel 623
Is a flow path descending forward, and the downstream end is located immediately above the inlet 91 of the winning device 90, and flows into the winning device 90 with a high probability.

Further, on the right side when viewed from the front side of the front component member 600, a general-purpose starting gate 34 through which a game ball can pass up and down is provided. The usual start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting a passing game ball. Further, an ordinary variable winning device 37 having a movable member 37 b is provided below the usual start gate 34. The game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is guided to the rear of the front component member 600 and flows into a discharge passage (not shown). The normal variation winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a general electric solenoid 37c for driving the movable member 37b.

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a flow down path 615 is formed which is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates with the upper and lower sides. Flow down. A guiding portion 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The upper surface 617 of the guiding portion is an inclined surface that descends to the left, and a game ball that flows down the flow path 615 is received by the upper surface 617 and guided to the left. In addition, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear component member 700 includes a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess 711 that opens forward. The rear base member 710 includes a screw hole or a screw. A stopper, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving the rib, and the like are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. In addition, a hook-shaped fixing portion 713 that extends outwardly perpendicularly to the side wall 712 is formed at the front end of the rear base member 710, and the rear component member 700 is attached to a predetermined rear surface of the game board main body 80. It can be fixed in position. A through hole 715 is formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The through-hole 715 allows the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710 to be visible.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface that can cover the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. Yes. The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface is on the front side, so that the image on the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710. Has been. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with the liquid crystal display device, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

A lower movable accessory unit 730, an upper movable accessory unit 800, and a central movable accessory unit 880 are provided in the recess 711 of the rear base member 710 to form a board rendering device 44 that produces a game by operating. ing.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is disposed below the through hole 715. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 simulating a heel and a second lower movable member 770 simulating a heel. The movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are operable to appear on the front side of the display device 41. The lower movable accessory unit 730 includes first lower movable members 740 and 741 and second
As a base part to which a drive mechanism and various members for operating the lower movable member 770 are attached, a first lower base part 731 disposed on the front side, a second lower base part 732 disposed on the center, and a rear surface side are disposed. A third lower base portion 733 is provided.

The motor 734 serving as a drive source for driving the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 has a drive shaft in the front-rear direction at the lower right portion as viewed from the front side of the third lower base portion 733. It is attached along. The lower movable accessory unit 730 includes first lower movable members 740 and 74.
1 and the second lower movable member 770 are provided, and these are driven by one motor 734. The driving force from the motor 734 is applied to a first gear 735 that can rotate about an axis along the front-rear direction, and a second gear 737 that meshes with the first gear 735 and can rotate about an axis along the front-rear direction. Transmitted at the same time. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and a first gear for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741 on the front side.
A drive shaft 736 is provided so as to extend forward.

The second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and a second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward on the back side. Is provided. As will be described later, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 operate when the driving force is transmitted via the first driving shaft 736 when the motor 734 is driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise as viewed from the front side here). The second lower movable member 770 receives the driving force via the second drive shaft 738 when the motor 734 is driven in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise when viewed from the front side). Configured to work.

As shown in FIG. 6, one first lower movable member 740 includes a bearing portion 742 at the lower end portion, and this bearing portion 742 is provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 and has a rotation shaft 751 along the front-rear direction. Is pivotally supported. The bearing portion 742 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 740 can operate around the rotation shaft 751 by receiving a driving force from the motor 734.
Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 is also provided with a bearing portion 743 at its lower end, and this bearing portion 7
43 is pivotally supported by a pivot shaft 752 provided in the upper part of the second lower base portion 732 along the front-rear direction. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 741 can operate around the rotation shaft 752 under the driving force from the motor 734.

The gear of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 that is pivotally supported by the left rotation shaft 751 when viewed from the front is double front and rear, and the driving force from the motor 734 by the front gear. Have come to receive. The rear gear transmits a driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741, and the two first lower movable members 740, 741 can operate simultaneously.

A gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 that is pivotally supported by the left rotation shaft 751 when viewed from the front is arranged below the bearing portion 742 and centered on an axis along the front-rear direction. Meshing with a rotatable gear 753. The gear 753 is provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 so as to be slidable to the left and right with respect to the second lower base portion 732.
The slide gear 760 meshes with a rack gear 761 provided at the top of the slide member 760.
The first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated by moving the left and right.

The slide member 760 is a flat plate-like member and is arranged so that the plate surface is along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. The slide member 760 is formed with an oval supported portion 762 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right. By inserting 754, it supports so that a slide to the left-right direction is possible. Further, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760 so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to drop forward.

The slide member 760 is formed with a linear through hole 763 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The through hole 763 includes an arc-shaped portion and a linear portion extending downward from the right end of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front side. A first drive shaft 736 provided in the first gear 735 is inserted into the through hole 763 from the rear, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760.

FIG. 6A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial position. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at a connection portion between the arc-shaped portion and the straight portion in the through hole. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736. In the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through-hole 763 are aligned in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side,
The drive shaft 736 moves the linear portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 to the left. As a result, the slide member 760 slides to the left as shown in FIG.
When the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 rotate upward and appear on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. As will be described later, the second lower movable member 7 is driven by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state.
70 can be operated. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 763, the first lower movable member 7 is not pressed without pressing the slide member 760.
40 and 741 do not operate. The same applies when returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operated state to the initial state.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 has a rotating shaft 7 along the front-rear direction at the lower end.
71, and the rotation shaft is rotatably supported by the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733. Further, in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 771, a linear through hole 77 penetrating in the front-rear direction.
2 is formed. This through-hole 772 includes an arc-shaped portion and a linear portion extending from the left end of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front side in the state shown in FIG. The through hole 772 has a second
A second drive shaft 738 provided on the gear 737 is inserted from the front, and the drive force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770.

FIG. 7A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial position. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is located at a connection portion between the arc-shaped portion and the straight portion in the through hole 772. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738. In the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through-hole 772 are aligned in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven so that the second gear 737 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes the second lower movable member 770 upward, Move the straight part. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. As described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 772, the second lower movable member 770 is not pressed and the second lower movable member 770 does not operate. The same applies to returning the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the operated state to the initial state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, when the second lower movable member 770 is rotated upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41, an effect display that emphasizes the second lower movable member 770 is performed on the display device 41. It is possible. Of course, the effect display may be performed in the same manner even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear on the front side of the display device 41. The display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and any display that emphasizes the movable member that appears on the front side of the display device 41 may be used.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the second lower movable member 770 simulating a ridge so that decoration by light emission can be performed. In addition, the letters “dealka” are also lit. These four characters are designed to emit light independently,
As for “le”, the “no” part and the “le” part emit light further independently. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B and FIG. 8, only “de” and “no” in “le” can be caused to emit light, and “dere” can be displayed. Yes. In this way, it is possible to display novel information by dividing the characters, so that a novel effect can be performed. In addition, the display of “deletion” notifies that it is a dere mode which is one of a plurality of effect modes. As described above, the effect mode is notified by the display on the movable member, so that the set effect mode can be easily communicated to the player.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper movable accessory unit 800 is disposed above and on both sides of the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848 and a second upper movable member 860 simulating a tiger's hand, and these first upper movable members. 84
8. An effect is produced by operating the second upper movable member 860.

The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 8 attached to the rear base member 710.
01 and a movable member unit 820 that is operable in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 801 and includes a first upper movable member 848. The base member 801 is U-shaped when viewed from the front side, and an upper base portion 802 disposed above the through hole 715 and a left base portion disposed on the left side when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715. 803 and a right base portion 804 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front surface side of the through hole 715.

A guide portion 805 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the right end portion of the left base portion 803 and the left end portion of the right base portion 804. The guide unit 805 guides the movable member unit 820 along the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are respectively provided with drive mechanisms 806 for driving the movable member unit 820 up and down.
Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and the arm 808 is rotated by driving the motor 807. A drive shaft 809 is provided at the tip of the arm 808. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820. By driving the motor 807, the link member 830 is operated to drive the movable member unit 820 up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base portion 841 for attaching various members, a first upper movable member 848 disposed on the front side of the unit base portion 841, and a unit base. A drive unit 850 that is disposed on the back side of the unit 841 and drives the first upper movable member and the second upper movable member; a back cover 849 that covers the back of the unit base unit 841 from the rear of the drive unit 850; And a guided member 842 guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804.

The link members 830 are rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804, respectively, and are arranged so as to extend in directions facing each other. The link member 830 includes a rotation shaft 810 extending forward along the front-rear direction provided on the left base portion 803 or a rotation shaft extending forward along the front-rear direction provided on the right base portion 804. A bearing portion 831 into which 810 is inserted is provided at one end portion, and is pivotally supported by the left base portion 803 or the right base portion 804 so as to be rotatable. The link member 830 is formed with a first guide portion 832 that is a long hole through which the drive shaft 809 provided in the arm 808 of the drive mechanism 806 is inserted, and the motor 807 is driven to rotate the arm 808. By doing so, the link member 830 is rotated up and down while the drive shaft 809 moves along the first guide portion 832.

Further, a connecting shaft 833 for connecting to the unit base portion 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided at the other end of the link member 830 facing the one end where the bearing portion 831 is provided. ing. Further, the link member 830 includes the link member 8.
A second guide portion 834 that is a long hole through which a support shaft 861 provided at one end of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached so as to cover the front side of the second guide member 86 can be inserted is formed. 834 guides and supports one end of the second upper movable member 860.

The unit base portion 841 includes a circular main body portion 844 and a supported portion 845 extending from the main body portion 844 to the left and right. The supported portion 845 is formed with a third guide portion 846 which is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction. The unit base portion 841 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the drive of the motor 807. Further, an insertion portion 847 through which a drive shaft (not shown) extending rearward from the center of the circular first upper movable member 848 can be inserted at the center of the main body portion 844. The insertion portion 847 rotatably supports the first upper movable member 848 by rotatably supporting the inserted drive shaft.

The drive unit 850 includes a motor 851 serving as a drive source, a rotation drive unit 852 connected to the first upper movable member 848, and a drive arm 853 that drives the second upper movable member 860. By driving the motor 851, the rotation driving unit 852 rotates around an axis along the front-rear direction. The drive arm 853 has one end connected to a connection shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 that rotates by driving the motor 851, and the drive arm 853 swings left and right by driving the motor 851. It is like that.

The drive shaft of the first upper movable member 848 inserted through the insertion portion 847 of the unit base portion 841 is connected to the rotation center of the rotation drive portion 852, and the drive shaft is rotated by rotating the rotation drive portion 852. The first upper movable member 848 is configured to rotate. Further, the drive arm 85
3 is connected to a connecting shaft 862 provided on the back surface of the other end of the second upper movable member 860, and the second upper movable member 860 is moved left and right as the drive arm 853 swings left and right. To swing.

Further, the back cover 849 is fixed to the back side of the unit base portion 841 so as to cover the drive unit 850. A guided member 842 is fixed to the back surface of the back cover 849, thereby fixing the guided member 842 and the unit base portion 841. Guided member 842
Is a plate-like member arranged to extend in the left-right direction, and a guided portion 843 guided by a left base portion 803 and a guide portion 805 provided in the right base portion 804 is provided at the left and right ends. It has been.

10 to 12 show the operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800. For the sake of explanation, some members are omitted. FIG. 10 shows an initial state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end of the operating range, and FIGS. 11 and 12 show an operating state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range. In the initial state shown in FIG. 10, the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end position in the operating range. When the drive mechanism 806 is operated from this initial state and the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm 808 is rotated toward the display device 41 side, the link member 830 is rotated downward, and the movable member unit 820 is rotated. Moves downward. And the movable member unit 820
In the operation state where is at the lower end of the operation range, as shown in FIG. 11A, the drive shaft 809 is positioned at the lower end in the rotation range, and the link member 830 is also positioned at the lower end in the rotation range. That is, the first upper movable member 848 forms a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 operate the first effect movable body. These constitute the first effect device.

When the driving unit 850 is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the second upper movable member 860 is close to the first upper movable member 848 side as shown in FIG. 12, the operation of moving left and right between the first upper movable member 848 and the separated state is repeated. In the state where the second upper movable member 860 is closer to the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 11A, the connecting shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 is shown in FIG. Thus, the drive arms 853 are brought closer to each other, and the second upper movable member 860 is drawn toward the first upper movable member 848 side. By rotating the gear 855 from this state, the connecting shaft 8
56 pushes the drive arm outward, so that the second upper movable member 860 moves away from the first upper movable member 848.

Then, in the state where the second upper movable member 860 is farthest from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 12A, the connecting shaft provided on the back surface of the gear 855 as shown in FIG. 8
56 are the most distant from each other, and the drive arm 853 moves the second upper movable member 860 to the first.
It is in the state farthest from the upper movable member 848. When the gear 855 rotates from this state, the connection shaft 856 pulls the drive arm inward, and the second upper movable member 860 operates so as to approach the first upper movable member 848. This operation is repeated as the gear 855 continues to rotate in one direction, and the second upper movable member 860 moves left and right. That is, the second upper movable member 860 is a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive unit 850 is a second drive mechanism unit for operating the second effect movable body. These constitute the second effect device.

Further, the second upper movable member 860 is arranged so as to cover and hide the link member 830 at the initial position shown in FIG. 10 and the position after the operation shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. The operation is to be performed. The link member 830 is operated by the second upper movable member 860 that operates.
By covering the player, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, and it is possible to effectively prevent the link member 830 from seeing the line. Can be obtained. Further, particularly at the initial position, as shown in FIG.
Is covered so that it cannot be seen by the player. Thereby, in the state which is in the initial position which occupies most of a game, an unnecessary part cannot be seen from a player, and decorativeness improves.

As described above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game-related effects are controlled in the gaming machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result. Controlled by production control means (production control device 300) and production control means,
A first effect device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) and second effect device (second upper movable member 860, drive unit 85) that perform effects related to the game by operating.
0), and the first effect device is a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation (
A first upper movable member 848) and a first drive mechanism (drive mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, and the second effect device performs a predetermined effect operation. A second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860) capable of operating the second effect movable body, and a second drive mechanism portion (drive portion 850) for operating the second effect movable body. The 2nd production movable body will be arranged so that it may cover.

Accordingly, since the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism, it is difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts, and the effect of the effect by the operating effect device can be enhanced. Can be improved. By covering the first drive mechanism part with the second effect movable body that operates in particular, it is possible to attract the player's consciousness to the second effect movable body and effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the first drive mechanism part. A high concealment effect can be obtained as compared with the case of simply covering with a decorative member that does not operate.

Further, the second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860) is at least the first effect movable body (first
In a state where the upper movable member 848) is in the initial position, the first drive mechanism portion (link member 830)
Is covered so that it cannot be seen by the player. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to see unnecessary portions in the initial position that occupies most of the game, and the effect of the effect device can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable accessory unit 880 is arranged so as to surround the periphery of the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the central movable accessory unit 880 operates such that a plurality of central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 divided into four are combined in front of the display device 41. This is what makes the production.

The central movable accessory unit 880 includes a movable effect base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710. In addition, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that are disposed and operate on the upper front side of the movable effect base member 881, and the movable effect base member 8.
A third central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 which are arranged and operate on the lower front side of 81.

The movable effect base member 881 is configured such that the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located above the display device 41. In this portion, the first rotation shaft 882 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the first central movable effect member and the operation of the first central movable effect member are guided. For this purpose, a first guide portion 883 that is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided. Further, a second rotation shaft 884 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the second central movable effect member.
And the 2nd guide part 885 which is an elongate hole penetrated before and behind for guiding operation | movement of a 2nd center movable production | presentation member is provided.

A drive source for operating the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 is located on the right side when viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41. An eggplant motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears and the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 are provided on the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 from the first rotation shaft 882 to the motor 886. A drive mechanism is arranged, and a back cover 896 is attached so as to cover the back surface of the drive mechanism.

In addition, the movable effect base member 881 is configured such that the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located below the display device 41. In this part, the third rotation shaft 891 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the third central movable effect member and the operation of the third central movable effect member are guided. For this purpose, a third guide portion 892 that is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided. Also, a fourth rotation shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and a front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the fourth central movable effect member 4th slot that penetrates
A guide portion 894 is provided. Then, the display device 4 in the movable effect base member 881.
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth are on the left side when viewed from the front side of the portion located below 1.
A motor 895 serving as a drive source for operating the central movable effect member 930 is provided.

The first central movable effect member 900 arranged in the upper right part includes a decoration part 901 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, one end portion of the first central movable effect member 900 is provided with a first bearing portion 902 that passes through before and after the first rotation shaft 882 is inserted. It is pivotally supported around a moving shaft 882 so as to be rotatable.

Further, in the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a fan-shaped first sector gear 903 and a second sector gear 904 centering on the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The first sector gear 903 faces the back side of the movable effect base member 881 through a through-hole 887 that passes through the front and rear formed on the right side of the first rotation shaft 882 of the movable effect base member 881. Yes. The movable effect base member 881 meshes with the gear that transmits the driving force from the motor 886 on the back side.

The second sector gear 904 is provided to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The second sector gear 904 meshes with a third sector gear 913 provided on the second central movable effect member 910 arranged adjacent to the left side of the first central movable effect member 900. As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first sector gear 903 is also transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second sector gear 904. A guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the first central movable effect member 900. The guided shaft 905 is inserted through the first guide portion 883, and the first central movable effect member 900.
When the pivoting operation is performed, the first central movable effect member 900 can be smoothly operated by being guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883.

The second central movable effect member 910 disposed in the upper left portion includes a decoration portion 911 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. The second central movable effect member 910 is provided at one end of the second central movable effect member 910 with a second bearing portion 912 penetrating before and after the second rotation shaft 884 is inserted. It is pivotally supported about a moving shaft 884 so as to be rotatable.

Further, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a fan-shaped third sector gear 913 centering on the rotation center of the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The third sector gear 913 meshes with the second sector gear 904 provided on the first central movable effect member 900 disposed adjacent to the right side of the second central movable effect member 910. In addition, a guided shaft 914 that extends rearward is provided on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910. The guided shaft 914 has a second guide portion 885.
When the second central movable effect member 910 rotates, the second central moving effect member 910 rotates.
The second central movable effect member 910 can be smoothly operated by being guided along the extending direction of the guide portion 885.

Further, an engaging portion 915 extending backward is provided in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912.
The engaging portion 915 faces the back side of the movable effect base member 881 through a through portion 888 that passes through the front and rear formed on the left side of the second rotation shaft 884 in the movable effect base member 881. Yes. And as shown in FIG.14 (b), the one end part of the torsion coil spring 889 is engaged in the back surface side of the movable production | generation base member 881. As shown in FIG. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked to a locking portion 890 formed on the movable effect base member 881, and the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable effect member 910 is biased upward. It is like that.
As a result, the urging force of the torsion coil spring 889 is applied to the first central movable effect member 900 and the second
While helping to hold the central movable effect member 910 at the initial position, which is the position of the upper end in the operating range, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that have moved downward return to the initial position. It will help you.

As shown in FIG. 13, the third central movable effect member 920 arranged in the lower left portion includes a decoration portion 921 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. The third central movable effect member 920 is provided at one end of the third central movable effect member 920 with a third bearing portion 922 penetrating before and after the third rotation shaft 891 is inserted. It is pivotally supported around a moving shaft 891 so as to be rotatable.

Further, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a sector-shaped fourth sector gear 923 and a fifth sector gear 924 centering on the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided to face the lower left side when viewed from the front side. This fourth sector gear 923
Is a motor 89 disposed in the lower left portion of the third rotation shaft 891 of the movable effect base member 881.
It meshes with 5 gears.

The fifth sector gear 924 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The fifth sector gear 924 meshes with a sixth sector gear 933 provided on a fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged adjacent to the right side of the third central movable effect member 920. As a result, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth sector gear 923 is also transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth sector gear 924. In addition, a guided shaft 925 that extends rearward is provided on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920. The guided shaft 925 is inserted into the third guide portion 892, and the third central movable effect member 920 is inserted.
Is pivoted along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892, allowing the third central movable effect member 920 to move smoothly.

The fourth central movable effect member 930 disposed in the lower right portion includes a decoration portion 931 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. The fourth central movable effect member 930 is provided at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930 with a fourth bearing portion 932 penetrating before and after the fourth rotation shaft 893 is inserted. It is pivotally supported around a moving shaft 893 so as to be rotatable.

Further, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a fan-shaped sixth sector gear 933 and a seventh sector gear 934 are provided around the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The sixth sector gear 933 meshes with a fifth sector gear 924 provided on a third central movable effect member 920 disposed adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable effect member 930. In addition, a guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930. This guided shaft 9
35 is inserted into the fourth guide portion 894, and when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894. Smooth operation of the 4-center movable effect member 930 is enabled.

The seventh sector gear 934 is provided to face the lower right side when viewed from the front side. The seventh sector gear 934 is an urging mechanism 940 disposed at the lower right of the fourth central movable effect member 930.
Is engaged with an eighth sector gear 942 provided on the front side. The urging mechanism 940 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 941 along the front-rear direction, and includes an eighth sector gear 942. The urging mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend to the left from the rotating shaft when viewed from the front side, and is urged downward (counterclockwise direction) by an urging member (not shown). This
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are biased in the direction toward the initial position, which is the position of the lower end in the operation range. Therefore, the urging force by the urging mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 at the initial position, and the third central movable effect member 920 that operates upward and The fourth central movable effect member 930 is an assist when returning to the initial position.

The central movable accessory unit 880 configured as described above has the initial state shown in FIG.
5 can be converted into the operation completion state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 14, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are in an initial position that is the upper end of the operation range,
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in an initial position that is the lower end of the operation range, and are substantially retracted from the front surface of the display device 41. When the motor 886 is operated from this initial state, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are rotated so as to be lowered, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third central movable effect member 9 is operated.
20 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotate so as to rise.

And in the operation completion state shown in FIG. 15, the decoration part 901 of the 1st center movable production | generation member 900 is shown.
The decorative portion 911 of the second central movable effect member 910 and the decorative portion 9 of the third central movable effect member 920
21 and the decorative portion 931 of the fourth central movable effect member 930 are arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. Further, the end surfaces of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 are opposed to and close to the end surfaces of the adjacent decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931, and form a single annular shape as a whole. ing. Each of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 is made of a material that can transmit light, and the display device 41 can be visually recognized through the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931.

Next, the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIGS. 16 to 18, the special variation winning device 38 includes a flow path rear wall 962 arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80, and
A flow path 38f is provided between the flow path front wall 952 disposed in front of the flow path rear wall 962 so that game balls can flow in a row. The flow down path 38f is inclined so as to go down to the left when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down in a line toward the left in a line.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the flow down path 38 f is configured by an opening / closing member 990 that can slide in the front-rear direction. The opening / closing member 990 is shown in FIGS.
As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the closed state is a state where the game ball cannot be won in the special variation winning device 38 (large winning port 38d) by protruding forward, and as shown in FIG. Winning mouth 3
The game ball can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize in 8d. That is, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state and passes through the big prize opening 38d, and when the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state. It flows into the big prize opening. When the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, the flow path front wall 9
Although there is a gap with 52, the gap is such that a game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 19, the special fluctuation winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 including a flow path front wall 952.
A rear wall member 960 having a flow path rear wall 962, a main body portion 970 to which an opening / closing member 990 and the like are attached, and a cover member 979 that covers the back surface of the main body portion 970.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-like front surface portion 951. The front surface of the front portion 951 is arranged close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15 so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. In addition, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a lens that is decorated and partially transmits light. On the back surface of the front wall member 950, an LED (not shown) is arranged as a decoration means, and the special variable prize winning device 38 can be decorated with light. Note that the color of the light that decorates the special variable winning device 38 is a color different from the light emission color of the collective display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent collective display device 50 from becoming obscure. Further, the upper part of the plate-like front surface portion 951 is a flow path front wall 952 that forms the front side wall of the downflow path 38f.

As shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of front wall protrusions 9 protruding rearward are provided on the back surface side of the flow path front wall 952.
54 is provided. The front wall protruding portion 954 is a triangular prism-shaped protruding portion whose left and right side surfaces are inclined, and is provided in front of each of the protruding portions 992 provided on the opening / closing member 990.
It is provided so as to be located slightly upstream with respect to 92. The front wall protruding portion 954 and the protruding portion 992 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow down path 38f as will be described later. That is, it forms a contact portion with which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f can come into contact. The front wall protrusion 954 is located slightly upstream,
The game ball flowing down to the left is guided rearward by the front wall projection 954 and then further rearward by the projection 992, so that the game ball can be guided effectively.

As shown in FIG. 20, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like front surface portion 951 are provided on the back surface side of the front wall member 950. The extending wall 953 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and a bottom surface portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f.
The prize winning opening forming part 953b that forms the side wall and the bottom of the prize winning opening 38d, the guiding flow path forming part 953c that forms the guiding flow path 955 for guiding the game ball won in the prize winning opening 38d, and the prize winning opening switch 38a are provided. A switch mounting portion forming portion 953d for forming the mounting portion 956 to be mounted, a general winning port forming portion 953e for forming the general winning port 35, and a peripheral wall for preventing intrusion of the game ball flowing down around the special variable winning device 38 It has a function as 953f.

A bottom surface portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the downflow path 38f is an inclined surface that is inclined to the right side when viewed from the back surface side. Further, the special winning opening forming portion 953b is inclined so as to collect the game balls that have flowed into the special winning opening 38d into the guiding channel 955. The game balls can flow into the guide channel 955 in a single line, and a large prize opening switch 38a is provided at the inflow portion to the guide channel 955. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 38d are detected by the big winning opening switch 38a and then flow into the guide channel 955. The guide channel 955 formed by the guide channel forming unit 953c is a channel that guides the game ball from the special winning opening 38d to the back side of the game board 30. Ribs 957 are formed to guide the Further, the general winning opening forming portion 953e forms the general winning opening 35 that opens to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variable winning apparatus 38. On the back side of the front part 951, this general winning opening 3
Ribs 958 are formed for guiding the game balls that have flowed into 5 backward.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the rear wall member 960 includes a plate-like rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 that forms a rear side wall of the downflow path 38f. In addition, the flow path rear wall 9
An opening / closing member insertion portion 963 penetrating in the front-rear direction for inserting the opening / closing member 990 from the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed at a position serving as the lower end of 62.

A plurality of rear wall protrusions 964 that protrude forward are provided on the front surface side of the flow path rear wall 962. As shown in FIG. 17, the rear wall protruding portion 964 is a triangular columnar protruding portion whose left and right side surfaces are inclined, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recessed portions 993 provided in the opening / closing member 990. As will be described later, the rear wall protrusion 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f. That is, it forms a contact portion with which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f can come into contact. Since the rear wall protrusion 964 is provided adjacent to the recess 993, the game ball flows down the flow path 3 at a portion where the recess 993 is not provided.
It is possible to prevent the right side portion of 8f from flowing down and to reliably meander the game ball.

Returning to FIG. 21, the guide channel 95 in the front wall member 950, which is the central portion of the rear surface portion 961.
In a portion opposite to the portion where 5 is formed, a through portion 968 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed so that the guide channel 955 communicates with the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961. Further, above the guide channel 955, a switch mounting portion 9 penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the rear portion of the big prize opening switch 38a can be accommodated.
65 is formed. Further, in the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 and the portion of the front wall member 950 facing the portion where the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game ball won in the general winning opening 35 is transferred to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A through portion 966 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed so as to communicate the general winning opening channel 966 to be guided to the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

As shown in FIG. 21B, a plurality of rib-like extending walls 967 extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-like rear surface portion 961 are provided on the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960. The extending wall 967 has a different function depending on the place where it is provided. It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special variable winning device 38.

The guide channel forming part 967a forms the guide channel 955 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating part 968 to the back surface side downward. Further, a guide channel 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961.
A rib 969 for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end of the. The general winning opening channel forming section 967b forms the general winning opening channel 966 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 966a to the back surface side downward. In addition, a rib 966b for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the rear surface portion 961.

The peripheral wall 967c is formed in accordance with the shape of the penetrating portion penetrating in the front-rear direction formed in the portion to which the special variation winning device 38 is attached in the game board main body 80, and the special variation winning device 3
When 8 is attached to the game board main body 80, the peripheral wall 967c is inserted into the penetrating portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 961 positioned outside the peripheral wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. In this portion, a plurality of positioning bosses and screw holes for screwing are formed.

As shown in FIG. 22, the main body 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that coincides with the peripheral wall 967 c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 includes a rear wall portion 972 that is opposed to the guide channel forming portion 967 a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and forms the rear wall of the guide channel 955. In the rear wall portion 972, the game ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the through portion 968 is placed in a guide channel 955 at a position facing the through portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960. A rib 973 that guides to the right is formed. Further, a through portion 974 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position facing the downstream end portion of the guide channel 955 formed in the rear wall member 960 in the rear wall portion 972. The game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 955 is guided rearward by a rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passes through the penetration portion 974, and is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970 to the outside of the game machine. It flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the gas.

Further, in a portion facing the downstream end portion of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the rear wall member 960, there is a penetration for guiding the game ball flowing down the general winning port channel 966 to the back side of the main body portion 970. A portion 975 is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the general winning opening channel 966 is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970 through the penetration portion 975 and detected by the winning port switch 35a, and then discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. It flows into the road.

An opening / closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports the opening / closing member 990 that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960. The opening / closing member holding part 976 is a slit-like penetrating part that penetrates through the main body part 970.
A guide wall 977 is provided so as to extend in the front-rear direction, which can contact the upper, lower, left and right surfaces of the opening / closing member 990 and can guide and support the opening / closing member 990.

An opening / closing member unit 980 having an opening / closing member 990 and an operation mechanism for operating the opening / closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body 970. The opening / closing member unit 980 includes:
A unit base member 981 for attaching various members, an opening / closing member 990 that can slide in the front-rear direction, and a big prize opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening / closing member 990 are provided.

The opening / closing member unit 980 has a state in which the opening / closing member 990 protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 23 (a) and the special variable winning device 38 is closed, and an opening / closing member as shown in FIG. 23 (b). The opening / closing member 990 can be converted into a state in which the special variable prize-winning device 38 is in an open state with the member 990 retracted rearward. Note that the opening / closing member 990 can appear above the prize winning opening 38d via an opening / closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body portion 970 and an opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960.

The opening / closing member 990 is slidably arranged back and forth on a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the opening / closing member 990 is formed such that the front end portion extending upward from the large winning opening 38d on the upper surface is made lower by one step, so
It is set as the flow-path formation part 991 which makes | forms the bottom face.

The flow path forming portion 991 is formed with a plurality of protruding portions 992 that protrude upward in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990. The upstream side surface of the protrusion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side can be smoothly guided rearward toward the recess 993. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the upstream side, so that it can be guided in the downstream direction when a game ball that flows out forward from the recess 993 comes into contact.

In addition, a recessed portion 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed backward is formed in a stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 that is lowered by one step and facing the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction. Recess 9
The distance between the side surface of the stepped portion forming 93 and the side surface of the protrusion 992 is such that the game balls can flow down in a row at any position. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surface of the step portion forming the recess 993 is formed obliquely so that the front side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball can smoothly flow out from the recess 993 to the front. Yes.

That is, undulations such as the protruding portion 992 and the recessed portion 993 are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. As will be described later, the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 is extended by such undulations.

As shown in FIG. 24 (b), the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface that goes down to the left, and allows the game ball to flow down to the left. Sliding portions 994 extending downward are formed on the left and right sides of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. The sliding portion 994 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction, and the opening / closing member 990 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981 so that the opening / closing member 990 is moved on the holding portion 982. It becomes slidable.

As shown in FIG. 23A, the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996 that is inclined so that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. Since the inclined surface 996 is formed in this way, the opening / closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952 when the opening / closing member 990 is closed.
When there is a game ball between the two, the game ball can be released upward or downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, a connecting portion 995 to which a driving arm 983 for transmitting a driving force from the big prize opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening / closing member 990 is connected is formed at the central portion of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. ing. The drive arm 983 is located below the holding portion 982. As shown in FIG. 25B, the holding portion 982 is formed with a through portion 982a into which a connection pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted, and the connection pin 983a is opened and closed through the through portion 982a. 990 is connected to a connection portion 995. In addition, FIG.
As shown in a), the holding portion 982 is formed with guide ribs 982b that are located on the left and right sides of the connecting portion 995 and extend in the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening / closing member 990 along the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 26, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the special prize opening solenoid 38b. Further, the drive arm 983 is provided with a rotation shaft 983b along the vertical direction, and can be rotated about the rotation shaft 983b. In addition,
The rotation shaft 983b is sandwiched from the front and rear by the main body 970 and the rear wall member 960 and is rotatably held (see FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the state where the special variation winning device 38 is in the closed state, the driving shaft 38g of the large winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the driving arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range. . In this state, the drive arm 983 is most pivoted clockwise as viewed from the back side about the pivot shaft 983b, and the connection pin 983a is located at the front end of the movement range.

When the special variable winning device 38 is opened from this state, the big winning opening solenoid 38b is used.
By retracting the drive shaft 38g, the drive arm 983 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the back side around the rotation shaft 983b, and the connection pin 983a is moved rearward to open and close the opening / closing member. 990 is retracted backward. Thereby, as shown in FIG.26 (b), it will be in the state which makes the special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 38 an open state. When the special variable winning device 38 is closed, an operation reverse to the above-described operation is performed.

27 to 30 show the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device 38. FIG. In FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a part of the front wall member 950 is seen through for explanation. A game ball that flows down from the right to the left on the downflow path 38f is first a rear wall protrusion 964 positioned on the most upstream side.
In this way, it is guided diagonally forward and flows into the flow path forming part 991 in the opening / closing member 990. Then, the protrusion 99 of the opening / closing member 990 is guided obliquely backward by the front wall protrusion 954.
2 is guided obliquely backward and flows into the recess 993. The game ball that has flowed into the recess 993
The concave portion 993 formed obliquely toward the downstream side is again guided obliquely forward by the downstream side surface and the front wall protrusion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

Thereafter, guidance in the obliquely backward direction by the front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 and guidance in the obliquely forward direction by the recessed portion 993 and the rear wall projecting portion 964 are repeated, and the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f meanders back and forth. It starts to flow down. As a result, the staying time on the opening / closing member 990 is longer than when the flow down straight without flowing up and down such as the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 in the downflow path 38 f. It will be. For this reason, FIG. 29 and FIG.
When the opening / closing member 990 is opened even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short as shown in 0 (a), the game ball always exists on the opening / closing member 990.
), It is highly probable that the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 will fall and win the prize winning opening 38d, and the player will have a sense of expectation for winning even if the opening is short. Can do. In addition, it is preferable to secure the time required for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 for the interval time for closing the special variable winning device 38 before the short opening round. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31A, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened comes into contact with the protrusion 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990. As shown in FIG. 31 (b), it jumps and is guided in a direction away from the big winning opening 38d. Further, the bounced game ball may further move away from the big prize opening 38d by contacting the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. In addition, the opening / closing member 990
Since the projecting portions 992 formed at the intervals are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, they may fall without contacting the projecting portions 992 through the intervals. Note that the opening time of the special variable prize-winning device 38 in the case of a short opening, which will be described later, is a time during which even a game ball that has bounced in contact with the projecting portion 992 or the like can flow into the big winning opening 38d. ing. Thereby, even if it is short-opening, the inflow to the big winning opening 38d is possible.

By providing the protrusion 992, the front wall protrusion 954, and the rear wall protrusion 964 in this manner, the rolling manner of the game ball when opening the opening / closing member 990 becomes diverse, and the entertainment of the game can be improved. . In addition, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the timing of inflow of the plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the big winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the big winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

Note that the front wall protruding portion 954, the rear wall protruding portion 964, and the protruding portion 992 are undulated in the downflow path 38f.
The recess 993 is provided, but other recesses may be used. For example, a meandering groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as an undulation, and the game ball may flow down while meandering along the groove. In addition, a rib-like protrusion or groove is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as an undulation so that the game ball flows down while being moved up and down by the protrusion or groove when the game ball flows down. Anyway.

As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start prize port 36, the normal variable prize device 37, the second start prize port) 97) A game in which a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine includes a special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in a special gaming state. An opening / closing member that allows a game ball to be won from an opening facing upward, closes the opening in the closed state to disable the winning of the game ball, and opens the opening in the open state to allow the winning of the game ball 990 is ready In the closed state, the game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990, and the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations (protruding portions 992, recesses 993) on the upper surface. The time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the member 990 is made longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game balls during the special game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, around the downflow path 38f constituted by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990, the downflow path 38
Contact portions (front wall protruding portion 954, rear wall protruding portion 964) that can contact the game ball flowing down f are provided. Therefore, when the contact portion comes into contact, the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer, so that the decrease of the game ball in the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

Further, in the closed state, the game ball is configured to flow down from one of the left and right end portions of the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 to the other, and the undulation formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 moves the game ball flowing down forward and backward. It is formed to meander. Therefore, the opening / closing member 990
The time for the game balls to stay on the upper surface of the game becomes longer, so that the decrease of the game balls in the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The special variation winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction. However, in the closed state, the upper surface is parallel to cover the large winning opening 38d.
When it is in the open state, it may be configured to rotate downward.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 through which game balls can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start prize port 36, ordinary variable prize device 37, second start prize port 97).
In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on a winning game ball to a player and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result A special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in a special gaming state. The game ball can be won from the opening facing toward, and in the closed state it projects forward and closes the opening to make it impossible to win the game ball, and in the open state it retracts backward to open the opening and open the game ball An opening / closing member 990 that slides back and forth so as to enable winning is provided. In the closed state, a game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990, and the opening / closing member 990 undulates (projects) on the upper surface. 992, a concave portion 993) is provided, and the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is longer than when there is no undulation, and the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 The inclined surface 996 is formed so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases.

Therefore, the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations on the upper surface, and the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member is longer than when there is no undulation, so that the game ball in the special game state Can be reduced, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the inclined surface 996 is formed at the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught during closing.

Further, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is a flat surface along the sliding direction, and the lower portion of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched at the time of closing, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

The CPU 110 is a gaming microcomputer (IC) called an amusement chip (IC).
(CPU) 111 and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a clock that serves as a reference for a CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, D generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as C5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC-DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 are supplied with a power supply voltage during a power failure. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is a game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
1 (particularly the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on this signal, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and read / write RA
M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state of identification information,
However, it is also possible to set the reach state except for the special result mode), and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. Expected values are: No reach <Normal reach <Special 1 reach <Special 2 reach <Special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (
Random number generation for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining the reach of variable display games (including the execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A determines that the ROM 111B
One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (
(Big hit or small hit) or off), the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current gaming state, the normal variation winning device 3 as the current gaming state
7 is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the operation state 7 (time-short operation state (normal power support state)), the number of start memories, and the like. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, and a normal variation winning device 37.
A start port 2 switch 37a, a start port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning port 97, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a, and a special variable winning device 38.
Are connected to the big prize opening switch 38a, and the high level supplied from these switches is 1
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided that receives a negative logic signal such as 1V and a low level of 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Proximity I / F12
1, because the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut off and becomes floating Such an abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
21, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a, the start port 2 switch 37 a, the start port 3 switch 97 a, the gate switch 34 a, the winning port switch 35 a and the big winning port switch 38 a are input to the second input port 123. The Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121,
The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the gaming machine 1
The detection signal of the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of 0, the gaming machine 10
The detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 is also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10.
It is also supplied from 0 to a test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay substrate 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37 are output.
a, The detection signal of the start port 3 switch 97 a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held in the second input port 123 is stored in the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read out by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is sent to the ports 122, 123,
124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 is connected to the gaming microcomputer 11.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 38 b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the special variation winning device 38, and a movable member 37 of the normal variation winning device 37.
2nd for outputting the opening / closing data of the solenoid (normal electric solenoid) 37c which opens b
An output port 134 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line connected to the anode terminal of the LED according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 receives information on the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information on the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 1 that outputs the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135.
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, which is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic driving method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so as to be lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 450. Photocoupler 13
9 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 450 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A tone generator LSI 314 that controls the output of sound to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS for giving data transmission timing is input. VDP 312
To the main control microcomputer 311, a wait time for notifying the status of waiting for the reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the interrupt signals INT0 to n in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. The interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as production control command signals (production commands ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 and the information display device 630 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board production device 44
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production actor switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled thereby, DC 32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15 V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as DC3.3V based on DC5V
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2 V are provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. The VDP 312 (VDRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
Are supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state where N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
A game is played when a pachinko ball is launched. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , First start prize opening 36
The second start winning port 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost part of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32.
Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning apparatus 37 or the special variable winning apparatus 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening that has been won The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 32) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball thrown in passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU1 of game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
In 11A, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the general chart start gate 34, if the general chart start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four), the general chart start memory number is set. Addition (+1) is performed, and one map start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display of the collective display device 50. Further, in the normal figure start memory, a random number value for hit determination (per random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It has come to be.

Then, when there is a general map start memory and the normal map variable display game can be started, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed, the normal map variable display game is hit and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the winning state is not the winning state, the winning judgment random number value stored in the first stored base map start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether or not the hitting of the base map variable display game is lost. Then, a process for starting the normal map change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

In addition, as a process for executing the normal variation display game, the game control device 100 is predetermined with a plurality of lighting patterns that are predetermined over a predetermined variation time on the general diagram display provided in the collective display device 50. After the normal map change display which is repeatedly displayed in the same order, the process of displaying the normal map change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is performed. The general map display is configured by the display device 41. For example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like are used as normal identification information, and after this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed by stopping the display. You may do it.

When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, the lighting pattern that is one of the first per-stop symbols to the third per-stop symbol that makes a special result form corresponding to the type of the hit is stopped. While displaying, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, a control is performed to display a lighting pattern as a result of the shift on the general map display.

Also, the winning ball to the first starting winning port 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning port 97, and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively a starting port 1 switch 36a and a starting port 2 provided therein.
It is detected by the switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) is set as the first start memory that makes a start memory (special drawing start memory) based on winning in the first start winning opening 36. In addition to storing the limit, the second start memory for making the start memory (special drawing start memory) based on the winning to the second start winning prize port 97 and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). To remember. Based on the winnings to the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, and the normal variation winning device 37, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as the starting storage information, respectively. Thus, the extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The number of start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator and the special figure 2 hold indicator of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display. Is displayed. Further, an information display device 630
But it is displayed.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first special figure variation display game in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The jackpot determination random number value thus determined is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

When the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the special figure 1 display 51 (fluctuation display device). After performing the special figure 1 fluctuation display, the first special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is displayed. When the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the special figure 2 display 52 (fluctuation display device). After performing the special figure 2 fluctuation display, the second special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is displayed.

In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the display device 41 (variable display device) and the information display device 630 corresponding to the special figure variable display game) (for example, A process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game for variably displaying numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) is performed. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, the game control device 100.
Based on the control signal from, the setting of the production state, the output of sound from the speakers 19a, 19b,
Processing for controlling the light emission of various LEDs is performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

The decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41 includes, for example, a decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 as a left variation display region (first special symbol),
In each of the right variation display area (second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is varied and displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game in the information display device 630, the light emitting member blinks during the variable display, and when the stop time comes, the light emitting member (lights up, blinks, turns off) corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game. Etc.). In other words, a decorative special pattern composed of the light emitting mode of the light emitting member (
The result mode is displayed according to FIG.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. A lighting pattern is displayed and processing for generating a special gaming state or a small hit gaming state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 630 also becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, C of the game control device 100
For example, the PU 111A opens the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b and performs control to allow the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening. And
The special prize opening is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening or a predetermined openable time has elapsed since the opening of the special prize opening. This is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the game control device 100 becomes the special result mode of the stop result mode,
A prize winning opening / closing control means for controlling opening / closing of the prize winning opening is provided. When the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (a specific game state, a general high-probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal gaming state.

Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 6
When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is released due to a win-winning game with a normal-game fluctuation display game as the winning result, the opening time of the first per-stop symbol (open time of the normal train) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500)
msec × 1), second per stop symbol opening time (general power opening time) and number of opening times (for example, 17
00 ms x 2 times), 3rd stop symbol opening time (general power opening time) and number of opening times (for example,
1700 msec × 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, the execution time (
It is possible to control so that the normal fluctuation time becomes a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1).
352 ms). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (number of times of normal power release) is set to the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the number of times of the second opening more frequently (for example, 4 times). Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display. However, each special figure variation display is not performed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Also,
In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 a in the first start winning prize port 36, the start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, and the start port 3 in the second start winning prize port 97. The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the prize opening switch 35a, and the big prize opening switch 38a are provided with a magnetic detection coil, and contactlessness is detected by using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. A type of magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like includes:
Microswitches with mechanical contacts can be used.

Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, first, the process for prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step S).
4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
Processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11
2 operations can be detected reliably. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal has been received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the power outage due to noise, etc., and to properly deal with problems at power-on. .

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start-up of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and off data is output to all output ports (output) Is set) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S).
18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19).
It is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power-off (step S2).
0). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), step S21 in FIG.
The process is performed when normal recovery from a power failure occurs.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y),
When it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17)
N or step S18; N), checksum is not normal (step S20; N)
Is determined, the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 35 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 35, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Then R
An area for storing the game state in the WM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25.
Further, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the game board 30 is saved. ON (lighting) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the below-mentioned special figure game process rationally is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S2).
5) Go to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300).
(Step S30), the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, step S
30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time (
A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

In step S31, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
Performs processing to start the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Done by A. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on (soft random number registers 1 to n)
The corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random numbers that determine the hit of the normal symbol (per random number ) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number for determining a normal winning symbol (per winning random number) in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34).
The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the winning symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated on the basis of a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number is +1 or -1.
It may be a counter-type update based on the above, or a random-type update in which all values within a range appear without being overlapped until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, twice)
Is set (step S36), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S3).
7). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the initial value random number update process (
The process returns to step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the initial value random number update process is not performed, and if it is only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process,
This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
. If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S3
8; N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39).
), Processing for outputting off data to all output ports (step S40).

Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S45), it waits for the power to the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 36 shows the checksum calculation process in the main process described above (steps S19 and S4).
3) was shown. In this checksum calculation process, first, as the start value of the calculated address, RW
The start address of M is set (step S51), and the number of repetitions is set (step S52).
Then, “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). RA used for repeat count
The number of M bytes is set.

Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S5
4) The calculation address is updated by +1 (step S55), the repetition number is updated by -1 (step S56), and it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (step S57). If the calculation has not been completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 37 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the small bonus symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, “Round initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal variation display game, “Hit symbol initial value random number”
Is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a winning stop symbol of the normal map display game. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.
Naturally, the small hit design random number does not exist in a model without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is a gaming machine in which a random symbol initial value does not exist.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the timer interrupt process, a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is generated by the CPU.
It starts by being input to 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 38 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) or the like is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106),
Random number update processing 2 (step S107) is performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a. Or, a prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
13) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the input processing, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S1).
21). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (
(Store) (step S123), prepare the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (step S124), and prepare the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. (Step S12
7) A switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130).
). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), a switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is terminated.

Note that unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data. As a result, there is a possibility that the data has the same value. is there.
Further, the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data.
As a result, the data may have the same value.

[Switch read processing]
Next, switch reading processing in the above-described input processing (steps S128 and S133)
Details will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S144). After that, it waits for a delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) until the second reading elapses (step S).
145).

When the delay time elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Save (store)
(Step S149). After that, the same bit is set to 1 in the first and second reading.
Then, a definite bit pattern in which different bits are set to 0 is created (step S150), and a logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is obtained as a definite bit this time (step S15).
1).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S155). The switch reading process ends.

Note that when the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 milliseconds), the switch is read.
There is a method of determining whether the signal has changed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing it with the result of the previous reading, but in that case, until the next interrupt processing If the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost, there is a possibility that correct judgment cannot be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S164). In the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, “door / frame open” data, “security signal” data) is output to the digit / external information output port. 136
(Step S166).
Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, the universal display, the special display 1 hold display, and the special display 2 hold, which are various displays provided in the collective display device 50. Indicator, general figure hold indicator, round indicator and second
The game state display section is dynamically lit.

Subsequently, various output data of external information is synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (
For example, data for “hit signal 1”, data for “hit signal 2”, data for “hit signal 3”, data for “hit signal 4”, data for “symbol determination frequency signal”, data for “start-up signal” , The “main prize ball signal” data) and the output data of permission to fire (step S1
70), the synthesized data is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information / launch permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payments.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in this embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count number in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the three winning ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1, 10
Up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the individual winning ball counter area and the 14 winning ball counter area, respectively, and the 3 winning ball counter area, 10 winning ball counter area, and 14 winning prizes in the winning number counter area 2 can be stored. Each ball counter area is configured to store up to 255 winnings.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), step S
It returns to 181 and repeats the said process. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
The number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 is acquired (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), step S189
The process proceeds to 192. If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the award ball remaining number area (step S191), and step S18.
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Is done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interrupt, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out a prize ball. In the state, the payout command is transmitted. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, a ball lending operation, a shot ball outage error, an overflow error, a frame radio wave fraud occurrence, a payout ball detection switch (paid out The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of game balls remaining) ), Etc. (when not = 0).

If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Winning counter area 1
In the process of checking whether or not there is a count (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine whether.

If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S197). With this judgment,
If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
The payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 43 shows random number update processing 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt processing. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.
In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).
If the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. A random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).
When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). Thereafter, it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

If the normal random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).
). Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial value of the loaded normal random hit random number is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). After that, it is determined whether the normal symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).
.

If the normal symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. If the normal symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S220; Y), the symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221).
), Random number counter (random number area) corresponding to the next initial value of the hit design random number
Is set in a register holding a start value (start value setting register) (step S22).
2) The random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 44 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, 2 by random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing.
The update of the byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) is configured to be executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). In the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper order) is updated. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower order) is updated.
"", The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is updated, and when "3", the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment includes D
A refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for RAM refreshing, etc.
Instead, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 If you want to update
It is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) Is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as an addition value ( Step S238), Step S239
Proceed to Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value (1 of the random area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Byte random number or 2
Save in the random number area below the byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number area is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. 2
If it is a byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S24).
7) The random number update process 2 is terminated.
In the case of this embodiment, on the effect random number update table, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, the type information of the random number area to be updated (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) The address of the update area is defined for the number of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 45 shows a winning mouth switch / state monitoring process (step S1) in the timer interrupt process.
08). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is opened. Regardless of whether or not there is an illegal winning at the big winning opening, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area,
Information of an illegal winning error notification command, an illegal winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination), an address of a winning opening switch table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. In addition, the winning table of the winning mouth monitoring table includes the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches).
In addition, for each switch, information of a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and a lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S305), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S307). The winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the number is performed.

Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the shot ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. The

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and if the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the glass frame open detection switch 63.
Monitoring of the state based on the signal output from is set, and the value of the state scan counter is “1”
Is set to monitor the state based on the signal output from the body frame open detection switch 64. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is “0” (step S314). finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), A gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred (step S)
316).

In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like A state monitoring based on two signals is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is “1” to “3”.

Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing from step S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing from step S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 46 shows the fraud & winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed by a large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning apparatus 38 and a start opening 2 switch 37 of the normal variable winning apparatus 37.
This is a process performed for a. With regard to the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to monitoring fraud.

In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S321).
Step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the special variable prize device 38 is opened when the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is the large prize prize switch 38a, and the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is started. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S3).
32). When there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated illegal winning number is equal to or more than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the present embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning prize switch to be monitored for error, but the number of fraud occurrences defines a different number for each kind of winning prize switch. You can also. The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

If the number of illegal prizes is not greater than or equal to the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325)
N) prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (step S330).
. If the number of illegal winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325;
Y) keeps the number of fraudulent winnings at the fraud determination number (step S326), and saves an initial value (for example, 60000 milliseconds) in the target fraud winning notification timer area (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), an illegal win occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. Do. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333). If the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S).
334), an illegal winning cancellation flag is prepared as an illegal flag (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( Step S337), comparing the prepared illegal flag with the value of the target illegal flag area (
Step S338). In addition, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S3
36; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338).

If the prepared illegal flag matches the value of the target illegal flag area (step S
338; Y) ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S338; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S339), and an effect command setting process is performed. (
Step S340), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. With the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 47 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). In addition, if there is an input to the target prize opening switch (
In step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S3).
53) The loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S
355; N) saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356),
The value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In this embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. Counter size is 2 bytes (0-65
535 range).

After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S35).
9). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S35)
9; Y) updates the table address to the address of the next record (step S361).
Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). In the case of this embodiment,
In step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated.
As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 48 shows a gaming machine state check process (in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process)
Steps S311, S313, S316) are shown. In this gaming machine state check process,
First, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S371).
Then, it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process). This information includes:
For example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, the mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, the signal ON determination data, Includes status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer comparison value .

If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (
Step S374). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S
375), the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379).
. The case where the target signal is not on (step S372; N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, a target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S3).
79). When the target signal is on (step S372; Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

When the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S379; Y)
That is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (
In step S382), it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S379; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N
) Ends the gaming machine state check process. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S384). The status flag thus set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S387), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 49 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process,
It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32)
m seconds) is set (step S393), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S391).
394), an OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S395).
Then, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S39).
6). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interruptions.

When the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N
), The current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S398), and the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special game process, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 3
7a, the input of the start port 3 switch 97a is monitored, the whole process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the special game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a (
Step A1) is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, if there is a game ball winning in the first start winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the second starting winning port 97, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers)
And a game result preliminary determination for determining in advance the game result based on the winning in the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning prize switch 38a provided in the special variable winning apparatus 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). The special game processing timer value is "
If it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A
9) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit Special chart display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc.
)I do.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening and a big hit end process are performed. Extra prize winning ball remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing (step A13)
I do.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the process during the small hit A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “8”, the small hitting process (step A) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc.
16) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A)
19) The symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And
After preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and the special figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a in this case), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is sent. The information indicating that there has been a winning is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the first start port which is the start port of FIG. 1 (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first starting port (step A103)
N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start port (step A).
103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (medium power support is in progress) (step A).
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36) will not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 will not win unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (first start winning opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table is prepared for the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A1).
09), a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, the start port 2 switch 37a), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port The information indicating that there has been a winning is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the second start port, which is the start port of FIG. 2 (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second starting port (step A111)
N), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second start port (step A
111; Y), an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
When it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is open (step A112), it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y). Then, the process proceeds to step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. Meanwhile, step A
If it is determined at 112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

In step A113, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). Normally variable prize winning device 37 is
Game balls cannot be won in the closed state, and game balls can be won only in the open state. Therefore,
If the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred. If there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A113 that the normal electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N
) Prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), performs the special figure start opening switch common processing (step A115), and then performs the processing of step A116. The process after that is performed. Step A113
In step A1, if it is determined that a fraudulent power transmission has occurred (step A113; Y).
The process proceeds to step 16 and the subsequent processing is performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table for the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) is prepared (step A11).
6) A hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process,
When there is an input to the target start port switch (start port 3 switch 97a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port has been won. Set the information shown. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the third starting port which is the starting port of FIG. 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning at the third starting port (step A118)
N) terminates the start port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning at the third starting port (step A).
118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (medium power support)
119).

If it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is not short (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is short (step A119;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. That is, if the time is short, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third starting port (second starting winning port 97) will not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 will not win if it is not right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than the left-handed state, but when the third starting port is won during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third start port (second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special start port switch common processing (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. The process ends.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (step A102 in the above-described start-port switch monitoring process)
, A110, A117) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 52, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (normal variation winning device 3).
7) and the third start port (second start winning port 97), the no-start information of the monitored start port is set (step A131), the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a,
Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 3 switches 97a (step A132).
When there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y)
Loads the jackpot random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register and prepares it (step A135). Of the first start port (first start winning port 36), the second start port (normally variable winning device 37), and the third start port (second start winning port 97), the start target to be monitored is selected. Existence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, the start port 1 switch 36 is used.
a, the start port signal that is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 2 switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The output count is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A142), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A14).
3).
If the output count does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is set to RW.
The start-up port signal output count area of M is saved (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), step A1
The process proceeds to 45. In this embodiment, “0” to “255” in the start port signal output frequency area.
Can be stored. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows, so that it is not saved.

Next, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97
Among a, it is determined whether the number of special figure holding (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target start switch is less than the upper limit value (step A145).
When the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), update the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 or number 2) (+1) ( Step A14
6) A decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the target start opening prize flag is set. Save (Step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A150).
The jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in steps A102, A110, and A117 is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure hold information determination process (step A160).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (in the present embodiment, variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A154). And first
It is determined whether it is a winning at the starting port (first starting winning port 36) (step A155). When it is determined in step A155 that the winning is not for the first starting port (step A155; N)
In step S158, the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A155 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A155; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted,
Prepare (step A156) and save in the RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (step A157). In step A158, the address of the change order flag storage area (any location from hold 1 to 8) corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is calculated (step A158), and the calculated area Then, the change order flag of the object (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) is saved (Step A159), the special figure hold information determination process (Step A160) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, and the normal variable winning device 37. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start storage that is the right to execute the variable display game is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) is a first random number value extracted based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 36 which is the starting opening of FIG. 2nd start with a predetermined number as the upper limit of various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of FIG. Memorize as memory.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step A in the special figure start port switch common process described above)
Details of 160) will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 54, first, a big hit determination process (step A161) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. If the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A163) and corresponds to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether or not the first start port (start winning port 36) is won (step A165).
When it is determined in step A165 that the winning is not for the first starting port (step A165)
; N), the stop symbol information of the out-of-step is set (step A170), and step A171
Move on to processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A165 that the winning is to the first start port (step A).
In 165; Y), a small hit determination process (step A166) is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. If the determination result is not a small hit (step A167; N), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (step A).
170), the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A167; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 is displayed. (Step A169), and the process proceeds to Step A171.

Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A172). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A173) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S173). A174).

Thereafter, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A175), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A176), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (
For example, it is determined whether or not a special result is obtained. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special prize opening process is in progress (step A201). . When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S201). A202).

When the winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step A202; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205. In addition, when the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hit middle processing is being performed (
Step A203). When the small hitting process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. In addition, when not being processed during small hits (step A203; N)
Determines whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is being performed (step A204). Since the special figure game process number does not move to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. If the small hit remaining sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205. Then, “0” is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch (step A206).

If there is no input to the big winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). If there is an input to the special winning prize switch (step A206; Y), a special winning prize count command is prepared (step A207).
), An effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A21).
4).

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214), when the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is not “0” (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215).
If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
If the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is set to the big winning prize. It is added to the mouth count number (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the big winning mouth count number is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (step A218).

When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (step A219).
) Clears the special figure game process timer area to 0 (step A220), and determines whether or not the small hitting process is being performed (step A221). When not being processed during small hits (step A221)
; N) finishes the big prize opening switch monitoring process and is in the middle of hitting process (step A)
221; Y) saves the value of the end of the small hit release operation in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301).
In step A301, if it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for the hold number total 1). Then (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is that of FIG. 1 (step A303).
When it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation of FIG. 1 (step A3)
03; Y), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A).
304), an effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, a special figure 1 variation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, a command (decoration special figure hold number command) corresponding to the updated value of -1 is prepared.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A303 that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of special figure 2, it corresponds to the special figure 2 holding number. A decoration special figure hold number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), an effect command setting process (step A308) is performed, a special figure 2 variation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated. At this time, the special figure 2 hold number has not been updated by -1, but in step A307, a command corresponding to the updated value of -1 (decoration special figure hold number command)
Prepare.

In step A301, if it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started ( In step A310), if the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.
Next, “0” applied to the special figure routine process is set as the process number (step A314),
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A315), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A316). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A306) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 57, first, the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1).
) Is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321),
A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed for setting the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a jackpot.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
323), a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and various kinds of variable patterns related to setting of the first special figure fluctuation display game are set. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set, is prepared (step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information of variation start of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, “1” related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328).
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (the special figure 1 display 5 is displayed in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
The initial value (for example, 52 msec) of the 1 flashing timer) is saved (step A333).
) Save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334)
Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

As shown in FIG. 58, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second
A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting the shift information or jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
343), a special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and various kinds of variable pattern settings for the second special figure fluctuation display game are set. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set, is prepared (step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, “1” related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348).
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (the special figure 2 indicator 5 is displayed in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area).
2 (for example, 104 msec) is saved (step A35).
3) Save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354)
), The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 59 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above.
322). In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A361), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A362). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A363), and the special figure one big hit random number storage area (
0 (cleared number 1) is cleared (step A364). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A365) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value prepared matches the jackpot determination value.

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is a big hit (step A366; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A362 (step A367). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A368) is performed to determine.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A361. (Step A370), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not a small hit (step A369; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in this embodiment, the first
The result of the special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 60 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process).
342). In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (
The big hit random number is loaded from the reserved number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A372). The number of holds is 1
“Use” is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special drawing start memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether the jackpot determination value matches the jackpot determination value (step A374).
I do.

If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A375). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 is saved while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2.
The setting process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 61 shows the big hit determination process (steps A161, A365, A374) in the special figure hold information determination process, the big hit flag 1 setting process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In the jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A38).
1) It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. Specifically, the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A36).
5), when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382;
Since Y) is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of place. Therefore, “other than big hit (out of line)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A383).

If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Specifically, the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A36).
5), if the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386;
Since Y) is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of place. Then, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 62 shows the small hit determination process (steps A166 and A368) in the special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process described above. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (
Step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value.
The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A392).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N
), That is, in the case of a small hit, a small hit is set as a determination result (step A394).
The small hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above.
323). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 is determined.
A jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the jackpot symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A4).
02). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination is performed. The data area is saved (step A408), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409).

These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to the hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). In addition, a special jackpot symbol (for example, 4
In the case of (R probability variation symbol), it is difficult to distinguish whether the transition destination production mode is a dedicated production mode in which the probability variation is confirmed or whether the game state is certain or not. It is determined whether to shift to a different production mode. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). If the big hit flag is a small hit (step A410; Y).
Loads a small hitting design random number from the special drawing 1 small hitting design random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step A417), and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the special decoration command is saved in the special decoration command area (step A419).
An effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 64 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above.
343). In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 is displayed.
A jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the jackpot symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A4).
32). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination is performed. The data area is saved (step A438), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step A441), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A442). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the special decoration command is saved in the special decoration command area (step A443).
An effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2. The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 has a determination means (
Fluctuation display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variation display game based on the determination result by the game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A173, A324, A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. The production mode depends on the probability status, whether there is a short-time state, the progress status of the special figure fluctuation display game, etc.
One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first variation group selection offset table is set (step A453),
The offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold count and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A4).
55) The value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
.
Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459),
The offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A4).
61) The value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A174, A326, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A473).
. In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (step A474),
If it is out of place (step A474; Y), the 2-byte sorting process (step A4)
75) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477. On the other hand, if it is not out of place (step A474; N), a sorting process (step A476) is performed and step A477 is performed.
Move on to processing.

Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1), Prepare (Step A478). Then, a sorting process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is stored from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1).
Is loaded and prepared (step A484). Thereafter, the sorting process (step A485)
), The first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[Distribution processing]
In FIG. 67, the distribution process in the above-described variation pattern setting process (step A476,
A479, A485). Based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the distribution process selects the latter half fluctuation selection table of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation group table, or the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2. For selecting the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

In this distribution process, first, the first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483). Is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2201). Here, the latter-half variation group table, the latter-half variation selection table, and the first-half variation selection table include at least one latter-half variation selection table, second-half variation pattern (second-half variation number), and first-half variation pattern (
In the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code with no distribution is defined at the top.

When the first data of the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2)
202; Y) is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2).
207), the distribution process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is not an unsorted code (step A22)
02; N) obtains one distribution value initially defined in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) (step A2203).

Subsequently, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random value prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484 (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3). Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter Process.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (step A2203).
After that, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random value determined in the previous step A2205 (step A2204), and the calculated new random value is “0”.
It is determined whether it is smaller than (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number) or first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) specified in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table). Any one of the latter half variation selection table, the latter half variation pattern (the latter half variation number), or the first half variation pattern (the first half variation number) is selected from among the (variation numbers).
If it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (
Step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of the distribution is updated (Step A2207), and the distribution process ends.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 68 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step A) in the above-described variation pattern setting process.
475). The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, the top data of the selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”).
Is checked (step A2301). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach” is defined. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

If the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), 2 bytes The distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is acquired. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A2303 from the random value prepared in Step A473 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A23).
04), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A23).
05). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N
) Is updated to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), then step A23
The process proceeds to 03 and the subsequent processes are performed.
That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305 to obtain a new value. Random value is calculated (step A2304)
Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305).
.

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variation selection table defined in the selection table (the latter half variation group table).
If it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (
Step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of the distribution is updated (Step A2307), and the 2-byte distribution process ends.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 67 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG.
Although basically the same, the program instructions for calculation are different because the size of a random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A327 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492),
The first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A499), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A499).
Step A500). Next, update the special figure hold number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag by −1 (
Step A501), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (Step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504). Further, the change order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the free area after the shift is cleared (step A506),
The variation start information setting process is terminated.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random values stored in the start storage means (game control apparatus 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the special symbol changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 ms. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 milliseconds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, “2” relating to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A605).
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606). further,
A signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2 is changing) Save the signal to the test signal output data area (Step A
608), the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game for output in the external information terminal (step A).
609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the special figure changing process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and it is a big hit (step A70).
5; Y), the test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON,
The signal per special symbol 2 is turned ON) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (
Step A706), if it is determined to be a big hit (Step A706; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, Turn on the continuous operation device operation signal, turn on the signal per special symbol) RW
The data is saved in the test signal output data area of M (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “16” or “4”) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. Are saved in the upper limit area of the number of rounds (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LE of the RWM is obtained.
Save in the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the RWM decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A71).
3) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process
A fanfare command corresponding to is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a big hit with a lottery (other than the big prize opening information 1 (4R probability change (surprise))), and a big hit without a round (big prize opening) Opening information is grand prize opening opening information 1 (
4R probability change (probability))), it is ON if it is a big hit in the short time state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a ball and is OFF when the big hit has no ball.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 470) corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the state of the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game.
0 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on information stored later.

Then, the large winning mouth illegal prize number area of the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared (Step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring non-period monitoring period flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72).
3). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724)
) To finish the special figure display process. In other words, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game. Special gaming state generating means for generating a state is provided.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706)
N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A72)
5; Y), the time reduction variation frequency update process (step A726) and the production mode information check process (step A727) regarding the production mode setting are performed, and the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state. Is determined (step A728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N
) Loads the special decoration command from the special decoration command area and prepares it (step A).
729), an effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and an effect command setting process (step A73).
2) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
Further, when it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A72).
8; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. Thus, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
At 0, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but in order to prevent the player from being aware of the occurrence of the small hit, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the time shortening variation number update process (step A735), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A735). A736) is performed, a remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production does not match the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation (step A738; N), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741)
) To finish the special figure display process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched, and the production mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the production control device 300, thereby producing the production across modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the time shortening variation number update process (step A726,
Details of A735) will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the time shortening fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (during a high probability state) (step A751). When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the time shortening variation frequency update process is terminated. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), it is determined whether the time is short (step A752). If the time is not short (step A752; N), the time shortening variation number update process is terminated. If the time is short (step A752; Y)
Updates the time shortening fluctuation count by −1 (step A753), and the time shortening fluctuation count is “0”.
(Step A754).

If the time shortening variation count is not “0” (step A754; N), the time shortening variation count updating process is terminated. Further, when the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes “0” (step A75
4; In Y), a signal related to the end of the short time (for example, 2 signals for big hits are OFF) is saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal related to the end of the short-time state (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is input to the test signal output data area. Save.

Next, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A758), and the special figure game mode flag area is designated. Save low probability & no short time flag (step A759)
). Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) In order to turn it off, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, effect mode information check processing (step A727) in the above special figure display processing.
, A736) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 74, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A77).
1). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining number of revolutions, which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display game until the change of the effect mode, is updated by -1 (step A772). Then, it is determined whether the remaining number of rotations of production is “0” (step A
773). When the production remaining rotational speed is not “0” (step A773; N),
The effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the remaining production rotation speed is “0” (
Step A773; Y), that is, when changing the production mode from the next special figure variation display game, the production mode information address table is set (step A774), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A774). Step A775).

And the effect mode number of the effect mode to transfer is acquired, it saves in the effect mode number area | region in RWM (step A776), the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to transfer is acquired,
Save in the effect remaining speed area in the RWM (step A677), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; Y), that is, when the state of the probability has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A782). An effect command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (
Step A783) and effect command setting processing (step A784) are performed.
Next, a time shortening variation number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step A785), and an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new production mode is a left-handed mode (step A787).
If it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If it is the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is terminated. To do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A791) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A792).

Next, a signal related to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) (for example, one big hit signal is ON (output with big hit + small hit), and four big hits are ON (output with big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), signals related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1
Fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, Special symbol 2 Fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, Normal symbol 1
High probability state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794).
. In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (Step A
795), save the number without time in the game state display number area (step A796),
The usual figure low probability flag is saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol determination flag region is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag region is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the high probability state display. Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in a short time state The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

Thereafter, the number of the production mode 1 is saved in the production mode number area (step A803),
The remaining effect rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806).
) In order to illuminate the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit), the right-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. The migration setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display mid-process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 76, in the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 1, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as the process number (step A811).
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A812).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (large hit + small hit is output) )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A).
814) A signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step A816), and an illegal monitoring period non-period flag is saved in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step A11) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). Then, an effect command setting process (step A903) is performed.

After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is acquired. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), short open (
The special winning opening opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for the second opening mode) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A907), and the special winning opening open process transition setting process (step A909) is performed.
To complete the fanfare / interval process.
If the number of rounds is not greater than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the special winning game opening timer area (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special game processing timer area. Save (step A908), process for setting transition process during opening of special winning opening (step A)
909) to complete the fanfare / interval process.

Here, in this embodiment, the 16R probability variation A (all long open) is used as the big hit pattern.
, 16R probability variation B (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), 4R random change (All short open)
Is set. The probability change is a jackpot in which the probability state after the end of the special gaming state becomes a high probability state, and the normal state is a jackpot in which the probability state after the end of the special gaming state becomes a low probability state. Therefore, the winning prize opening operation determination table includes 16R probability variation A data and release switching determination value “0”, 16R probability variation B data and release switching determination value “4”, 16R normal A data and release switching determination value “0”, The 16R normal B data, the opening switching determination value “4”, the 4R probability variation data, and the opening switching determination value “0” are stored in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
FIG. 78 shows a process transition setting process (step A909) during the big prize opening opening in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening open process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A91).
1) The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A912). after that,
A signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening is stored. The count area information is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the process of opening the special winning opening, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001).
If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A1003). It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). Prepare an interval command for the interval between rounds (
Step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.

When the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N)
In this case, the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006), and an interval command is prepared (step A1007).
Then, an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the big winning opening releasing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008).
An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step A1009), and an effect command setting process (step A101)
0) is performed, a winning prize remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the winning prize opening opening process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 80 shows the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) in the above-described large winning opening opening process. In the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball process (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A102).
3) Ends the winning ball remaining ball process transition setting process.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A
1101; N) sets a special winning opening operation determination table (step A1102), acquires an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information (step A1103), and sets a normal interval time (for example, 0.10). 1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105). If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A)
In 1105; Y), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening information is a rank-down effect system value (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect that informs that the subsequent round will be a short open round. Specifically, as a big hit pattern, 16R probability variation A (all long open),
16R probability variation B (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), 16R normal A (all long open)
, 16R Normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open) is selected, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the jackpot round And the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round. 16 selected jackpot patterns
If it is R probability variation A or 16R normal B (all long open), it will be informed that the long open will continue in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening will be opened in the 5R round and subsequent rounds. Further, if the selected big hit pattern is 16R probability variation B or 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), a rank down effect is performed in the round continuation notification effect and the short open is achieved. In the rounds after the 5th round, the big prize opening is opened with a short opening.

When the big prize opening information is not a rank-down effect system value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the winning prize opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
When the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, if the number of rounds is the value of a special performance round (
Step A1107; Y) For example, when the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time for rank-down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (Step A1108), and Step A
The process proceeds to 1109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one type, for example 4R and 8R
A plurality of types may be provided.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) is performed to process the winning ball remaining ball process. Exit.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1
101; Y) loads a flag from the special-purpose game mode flag save area for storing the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1111), and loads the loaded flag, the special winning opening information, and the stop symbol pattern. Set the ending time corresponding to (step A11
12) The set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1113). Thereafter, the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1
114) to finish the special winning opening remaining ball processing.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 82 shows fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A1121). A1122).
Next, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A112).
3) The fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 ends.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 83 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A1134), and the information on the round-number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). ), Information on the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area that stores the round number upper limit determination flag is cleared (step A113).
7) Clear the information of the big winning opening release information area storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening (step A1138), and end the big hit ending process transition setting process.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the current special gaming state is set to a high probability after the end of the special gaming state. It is determined whether the data is high probability data set when the state is reached (step A1201).

If it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1202), and if it is high probability data (step A1201; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1203). ), A probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A1204), and a command setting process (step A12).
05).

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A1207). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1208).
Next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new production mode number is prepared (step A1210),
The command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and command setting processing (step A1212) is performed. Then, special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1213), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 85 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A120 in the jackpot end process described above).
2). In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special figure low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1224). After that, the probability information command (
(Time reduction) is saved (step A1225), the initial value (eg, 100) of the time reduction fluctuation count is saved in the time reduction fluctuation count area (step A1226), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 100) for the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 86 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A120 in the jackpot end process described above).
3) was shown. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special figure high probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (
(High probability) is saved (step A1235), the time shortening variation frequency area is cleared (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.

That is, the specific control state (short time state) in which the game control device 100 extends the period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is open for a predetermined period after the special game state ends.
A specific game state generation control means capable of generating

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
FIG. 87 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A in the big hit end process described above.
1219). In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). .

Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, one big hit signal is OFF, three big hits are OFF, and four big hits are OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1).
243), a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, the condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, the special symbol 2 signal OFF
F) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1248), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, during the small hit fanfare process in the above-mentioned special figure game process (step A15)
Details will be described. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the small hitting fanfare mid-process, the small hitting medium process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hitting process transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hitting fanfare medium process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the small hit / medium process transition setting process, first, “8” relating to the small hit / medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A131)
2).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information of the big winning mouth count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning mouth is cleared (step A1316), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting middle control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit middle process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the middle hit process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit middle processing, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”).
It is determined whether this is the case (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. The hit processing ends.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting action end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1405), and the loaded flag has a high special figure probability. Whether it is a flag relating to (step A1406)
). Thereby, it is determined whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. In this case, it does not matter whether or not the time-short state is in effect.
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y
), A small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium process is terminated. If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (
Step A1409) is performed, and the small hitting / medium processing is terminated.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting action transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-described small hitting process will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hitting action transition setting process, a branching process (step A1411) is performed in accordance with the control pointer (control pointer during small hitting).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2”, or “4” in step A1411, the wait time (for example, 1500 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A1412). The off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.
If the control pointer is “1”, “3”, or “5” in step A1411, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in the case of this embodiment, 200 m after a small hit fanfare time of 300 msec.
The second opening and the 1500 ms closing are alternately performed, and the small hitting control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hitting control pointer is updated to “0”. At the end of the first 1500 msec closure (ie 2 from the first 1500 msec closure)
The control pointer during small hits is updated to “1” at the time of switching to 200 ms for the second time,
The small hitting control pointer is updated to “2” at the end of the second 200 msec release, and the small hitting control pointer is updated to “3” at the end of the second 1500 msec closing.
The small hit / medium control pointer is updated to “4” when the m-second release ends, and the small hit / medium control pointer is updated to “5” at the end of the third 1500 msec closure. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec release, the small hitting control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the elapse of the 1900 msec small hitting remaining ball time and the subsequent 100 msec small hitting ending time, the small hitting The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth 200 msec opening, it is closed for 2000 msec, so the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A140)
Details of 9) will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, in the small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process, first, “9” related to the small hit remaining sphere process is set as the process number (step A142).
1) Save the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1423), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The hit remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 92A, in the small hit remaining sphere process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the small hit end process transition setting process (step A15) in the small hit remaining ball process described above.
Details of 01) will be described. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in the small hit end process transition setting process, first, “10” relating to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A).
1511), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512).
).

Next, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
).
Next, the information on the winning prize count area is cleared (step A1515), the information on the small hitting middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 cleared) (step A1516), and the small hitting end process transition setting process is ended. .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure ( Step A1602).
When the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N
) Sets an effect mode information address table (step A1603), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of variation (at the time of stop symbol setting) (step A1604).

And the effect mode number of the effect mode to transfer is acquired, it saves in the effect mode number area | region in RWM (step A776), the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to transfer is acquired,
It saves in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RAM (step A1606), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

When the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1610). Production command setting processing (step A1611
)I do.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A161).
2) An effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a time shortening variation number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step A1614), and an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new production mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616).
), If it is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), step A1619
Move on to processing. If the mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and an effect command setting process (
After performing Step A1618), the process proceeds to Step A1619.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619).
), It is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to special drawing time reduction (in time reduction state) (
Step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special drawing time (step A1620; Y)
The special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated.
In addition, when the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special drawing time reduction (step A1620)
N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621), and the right-handed display LED (for example,
In order to turn off the first game state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1)
623) to complete the small hit end processing.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 in the small hit end process described above (step A162).
Details of 3) will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the special figure normal process transition setting process, first, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A1631), and the process number is set in the special figure game process number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, a signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, one signal of the big hit is turned OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal related to the end of the small hit (for example,
Save the special symbol 1 small hit signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A1)
634).
Next, the information in the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information in the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 95, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2001).
If the production serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N),
Command data (MODE) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step A2003).
).

Next, the status serial transmission buffer status is read (step A2004).
Then, it is determined whether or not the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2004).
If the production serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N),
Write the command data (ACTION) to the production serial transmission buffer (step A20
06), the effect command setting process is terminated.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as “command setting process”.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 96 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22 in the above-mentioned special-game process).
), A symbol variation control process (step B15) in the later-described general game process is shown. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the ordinary diagram) is changing (step A2).
101). In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the variation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( Stop) address, display table 1
An address for (variation) is defined.

When the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y)
Acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (step A21).
03). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the flashing control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the flashing control timer after the update is “0” (step A2105), and the flashing control timer after the update is “0”. If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

If the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (step A2106).
Then, the variable symbol number to be controlled is updated by +1 within the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number region to be controlled is acquired (step A2108).
Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111).
), The symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is not changing (step A2102).
N) obtains a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A
2110), and the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A21).
11) The symbol variation control process is terminated.

As the initial value of the blinking control timer saved in step A2106, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, the first
In the fluctuation control table of the special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer, and the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game). In FIG. 2, a value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer, and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the variation control table of the usual figure (ordinary variation display game). This initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the fluctuation time in the collective display device 50.

Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared in accordance with the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is set to 0 (variable symbol number upper limit determination value-1 ) Is sequentially updated in the range of In steps A2108 and A2111, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of this, a round of display is repeated.

Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the first special diagram (first special diagram variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 during-change display that is repeatedly displayed during the change display of the first special figure change-display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern eight times. Further, 2 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the second special diagram (second special diagram variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated alternately between 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 during-change display that is repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation display of the second special figure fluctuation display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. In addition, 4 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the ordinary diagram (ordinary variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 3.
Therefore, the display during normal map display repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the normal map change display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

Thus, by defining the flashing control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game process timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the usual game process timer has become “0” (step B4).

When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process of setting the usual game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the usual game process number (step B7).

In step B7, if the usual game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A usual-day process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “1” in step B7, a usual figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure display process is performed.

If the normal game processing number is “2” in step B7, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the normal power according to whether or not the time is short is set. Or, a process for displaying a normal diagram (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process for normal maps is performed.
Also, if the usual game process number is “3” in step B7, the usual process for setting the information necessary to continue the usual process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed. Processing (step B11) is performed.

If the normal game process number is “4” in step B7, the general electric power remaining ball process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game end process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “5” in step B7, the usual figure end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure process is performed.

Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15) ) To complete the usual game process.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the usual game process timer is not “0” (step B4;
N), that is, if it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game is in the right-handed gaming state (for example, during big hit, during small hit, during special drawing time shortage (during normal power support)). (Step B1
02).
When the game state is a right-handed game (step B102; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired, and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than an upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105).
If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after performing the effect command setting process (step B104), the number of ordinary drawings held is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105).

If the number of reserved common charts is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general charts is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general charts is calculated. (Step B107). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and gate switch monitoring processing is performed. Exit.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the winning state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the predetermined number of opening operations. It is determined whether or not there is (step B201). Then, when the normal map is being reached (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y).
), The count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (eg, “6”) (step B204), and the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y).
If it is determined, the value of the movement end (for example, “4”) is saved in the control pointer area during the normal game (step B205), the normal game process timer is cleared to 0 (step B206),
Ends the power-on winning switch monitoring process. In other words, if there is a public power prize that exceeds the upper limit during the normal hit state, the normal hit state is terminated at that point.

Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the map is not being hit (step B201; N
), When it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or when it is determined in step B204 that the general power count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B204; N). Finishes the general power prize winning switch monitoring process.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the usual-day routine process, first, it is determined whether the number of pending drawings is “0” (step B301). If the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step B201; Y)
) Performs the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B321), and ends the normal figure normal process. If the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) (
In step B302), the winning random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability that the winning result is normal in the usual figure variation display game is normal. It is determined whether the probability of the usual figure set higher than the probability (that is, the ordinary figure low probability) is high, that is, whether the state is in the short time state (step B304).

If the usual figure is not in high probability (step B304; N), a lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the usual figure low probability is set (step B305). If the usual figure is in high probability (step B)
304; Y) sets a lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of normal high probability (step B306).
Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307). If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307; N), the value of the hit random number is set to step B305 or B306. It is determined whether it is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B3
08).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B307; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B3)
08; Y) saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (step B309), sets the deviation stop symbol number (step B310), and saves the deviation symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B311). The stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B).
312), a hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B313), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B314). ), The stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315).

In the case of this embodiment, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure low probability is 0/251, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure high probability is 250/251, the upper limit determination value is “251”, and the low probability lower limit determination value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”.
Therefore, when the normal probability is low, the hit random numbers are all in the range of “0” to “250”.
Further, when the normal probability is high, the hit random number value is “1” to “250”, and the hit random number value is “0”.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), and the free area after the shift is set to 0.
Clear it (step B318), and update the number of reserved drawings by -1 (step B319). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the number of held maps 1 by one. I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be.
Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.
Then, the normal chart transition process transition setting process (step B320) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Usual map transition setting process 1]
In FIG. 101, the usual figure normal process transition setting process 1 in the usual figure usual process described above (step B32).
1) The normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B508) in the normal figure display process described later is shown. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B331), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B331). B332). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
In FIG. 102, the process for setting the process for changing the normal map in the normal process for the normal map described above (step B32).
0). In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B341), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B341). Step B342).
Thereafter, the normal time change time (for example, 500 ms. In the case of this embodiment, the normal time change time is common between the normal figure low probability state and the normal figure high probability state) in the normal time game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the normal map change display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and the normal map change display game changes A changing flag indicating that the change is in progress is saved in the usual change control flag area (step B345).
Then, the initial value of the flashing control timer (52 ms in this case), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal display, is saved in the normal flashing control timer area (step B346), and the normal map changing process transition setting process is performed. Exit.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process of changing the normal map (step B9) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the process for changing the normal map, the process for setting the process for changing the normal map display (step B401) is performed.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, a process for setting a transition to a process for displaying a normal map in the process for changing a normal map (step B401).
) Will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the general map display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the general map display process (step B411). The number is saved in the usual game processing number area (step B4).
12). After that, the normal time display time (for example, 600 milliseconds) which is the display time of the result of the normal time variable display game on the normal time display is saved in the normal time game processing timer area (step B413).
), A signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the normal diagram (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and the stop flag indicating that the normal diagram fluctuation display game is stopped Is saved in the usual figure variation control flag area (step B415), and the usual figure display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, in the normal map display process, first, a hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM is displayed.
The winning hit flag area is cleared (step B502), and it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B508) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information (for example, “0”). ”,“ 2 ”, or“ 4 ”) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (step B505). Next, a public power open time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B506). Thereafter, the normal process transition setting process (step B21)
1) is performed, and the processing for displaying a normal map is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
FIG. 105 shows a process transition setting process (step B507) during a normal map in the above-described normal map display process. In this normal process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B511), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B512). Thereafter, a test signal output data includes a signal relating to the hit of the normal symbol display game (for example, a normal signal per normal symbol is ON) and a signal relating to the start of normal electric operation (eg, the normal electric accessory 1 active signal is ON). In the area (step B513), in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid, the on-data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B514).

Further, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the number of winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period is stored. The information on the illegal prize amount area is cleared (step B516). Then, a flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the process for the normal map, first, the control pointer for the normal map is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded control pointer for the normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value during normal maps (step B602; N
) Updates the control pointer during the normal map increment by +1 (step B603), performs the general electric operation transition setting process (step B604), and ends the process during the normal map.
Further, when the value of the control pointer during the normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B602; Y)
Does not perform the process of updating the normal processing control pointer area in step B603 by +1, performs the normal power operation transition setting process (step B604), and ends the normal processing in normal map.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 107 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B60) in the above-described normal process.
4) was shown. The general electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and a control pointer (control pointer during normal figure).
Processing is branched according to the value of. In this ordinary power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B612,
In order to control the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37, the wait time after the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B612).
) In order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B613), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B614 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time that is the open time is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B614), and the ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B615). End the normal power operation setting process.

On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “4”, the process proceeds to step B616, where the open control of the normal variation winning device 37 is terminated and the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed.
"Is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B617), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B619). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B619), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, the wait time is 200 m in step B612.
In step B614, 1700 msec is saved as the ordinary power release time in step B614, and 600 msec is saved as the ordinary power remaining ball processing time in step B618.
Further, when the normal symbol stop symbol is “winning symbol 1”, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. In Step B506, “500 milliseconds” is acquired as the open time of the public power.
Therefore, after the elapse of the display time of 600 milliseconds, the ordinary power open time is “500 milliseconds”, so the ordinary power (ordinary variable winning device 37) is opened for 500 milliseconds, and thereafter the control pointer during normal drawing is “4”. Therefore, 600 msec of ordinary electric ball remaining time is set.
Also, if the normal symbol stop symbol is “winning symbol 2”, “2” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. In Step B506, “1700 msec” is acquired as the open time of the public power.
Therefore, after the display time of 600 milliseconds elapses, the power transmission release time is “1700 milliseconds”, so the power transmission is released for 1700 milliseconds, and then the control pointer is “2” during the normal map.
A wait time of 00 msec is set, and then the control pointer is updated to “3” during the normal map, so the general electric power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer during the normal map is updated to “4”. Therefore, a 600 msec normal power remaining ball processing time is set.
Also, if the normal symbol stop symbol is “winning symbol 3”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. In Step B506, “1700 msec” is acquired as the open time of the public power.
Therefore, after the elapse of the display time of 600 ms, the normal power release time is “1700 msec”, so the normal power is released for 1700 msec.
A wait time of 00 msec is set, and then the control pointer is updated to “1” during the normal map, so that the ordinary power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer is updated to “2” during the normal map. Therefore, a wait time of 200 milliseconds is set, and then the control pointer during the normal map is “
3 "is updated so that the ordinary electric power is released for 1700 msec. Next, the control pointer is updated to" 4 "during the normal time so that the remaining electric ball processing time of 600 msec is set.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), in the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, an end process shift setting process (step B701) is performed.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the normal figure end process transition setting process (step B70)
Details of 1) will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), in the normal figure end process transition setting process, first, the process number “5” related to the general figure end process is set (step B711).
), And saves the process number in the usual game process number area (step B712).

After that, the usual game ending time (for example, 100 milliseconds) is saved in the usual game game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal (for example, an operation end of the normal variation winning device 37) (for example,
The normal electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the general electric power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). . Then, the normal pointer control pointer area is cleared (step B716), and the normal drawing end process transition setting process is terminated.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B13) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B80 in the above-described normal figure end process)
Details of 1) will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, a process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B 811), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal signal per ordinary symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (during fraud monitoring period) is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above.
) Will be described in detail. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator, the special figure 2 hold indicator, the universal figure hold indicator, the first game state display unit, the second provided in the collective display device 50
Settings relating to driving of segment LEDs constituting the game state display section and the round display section are made.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is set to +1.
It is updated (step S501), and it is determined whether or not it is the output on timing depending on whether or not the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1 (step S502). In the present embodiment, when bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output on timing is 128 m.
Making a blinking cycle of seconds.
If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the general figure hold number display table 1 is set out of the general figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure hold indicator is defined. (Step S503) When it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N)
Sets the usual figure hold number display table 2 (step S504).
Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is acquired from the set number of reserved general map display table and saved in the segment area of the general map reserved display (step S505). In this embodiment, as long as the number of reserved drawings is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which of the reserved drawings display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506). If it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the number of the special figure 1 hold on which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Among the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set ( Step S508).
Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number display table is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display (step S509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510). If it is the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step S511), and if it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 is displayed.
The number-of-holds display table 2 is set (step S512).
Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold display (step S513).
Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display section is defined (
In step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display section (step S515).

Next, a second gaming state display unit 58 that lights up when a time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state.
The game state display table 1 in which the display mode is defined is set (step S516), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit (step S517). ). In the present embodiment, the first game state display unit composed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal times and turned on during special drawing hours (during normal power support).
After that, the game state display table 2 is set in which the display mode on the second game state display unit for notifying that the right-handed game state is more advantageous than the left-handed game (step S518).
), Display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area of the second game state display unit (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the second game state display unit composed of one LED is turned off when the player is normally hit (left-handed), and when the player is right-handed (in the case of this embodiment, during the big hit, during the small hit, during normal power support) ) Is lit.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is set to start or end.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (step S601).
). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (
Step S602), it is determined whether the timer has expired (Step S603)
. In the case of this embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 milliseconds or longer.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S).
604), the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S6).
06) A magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S6).
13). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, 8 interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to “0”. And
It is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step S603; N), the step S
The process proceeds to step 609.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the time of the fraud notification ends or is illegal from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S
612), it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (
Step S613).

If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, “Step S601; N” → “Step S608” → “Step S609” →
“Step S610; Y” → “Step S611” → “Step S612” → “Step S613; Y” is the normal route.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701;
Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, in the case of board fraud, the on-board radio sensor 62 is detected once. At this point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not turned on (step S701; N), that is, when no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is “0”.
If not, -1 is updated (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If the notification is not performed, a command for terminating the radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step S70).
7) Prepare a board radio wave fraud cancel flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S708),
It is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709).

When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared board radio fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area (step S710), and the production command A setting process is performed (step S711), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, “Step S701; N” → “Step S705” → “Step S706; Y”
“→” step S707 ”→“ step S708 ”→“ step S709; Y ”is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, a payout command transmission process (step S105)
, Winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S)
112), based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113), information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in the output buffer. Perform processing.

As shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, in the external information editing process, first, when a glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N), and when a body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N). The off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
If a body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is stored. The test signal output data area is saved (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 ( Step S807). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the main process is started by clearing the RAM, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step S808; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Move on to processing. Also,
When the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the process proceeds to the process of step S810 without performing the process of step S809. .

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), or the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S81).
2; Y), when the power transmission fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the special prize opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on-data of the security signal is output as external information. Save to the data area (step S816), save the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal to the test signal output data area (step S817), step S818
Move on to processing. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither the magnet fraud occurs (step S810; N), the board radio wave fraud does not occur (step S811; N), and the frame radio wave fraud does not occur (step S812; N).
If the power transmission fraud is not occurring (step S813; N), and the winning prize fraud is not occurring (step S814; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step S815), the process proceeds to step S818.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed (step S818), and a start opening signal editing process (step S819) for editing a winning signal at the start opening.
)I do.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S820). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S821).

When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is “0” (step S821; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area. In step S822, the external information editing process ends.
On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not “0” (step S821; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on-data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S821). S823), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described above (step S818).
Details will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) Processing to output to the device.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, unless the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832; Y), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is “0”.
Is determined (step S833).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by −1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area has a main prize ball. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the time (for example, 128 milliseconds) of the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (for example, 64 level) of the off state (for example, low level).
m seconds) and the on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). After that, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (
Step S837), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
If the main prize ball signal output count is “0” (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0” (step S832; N
) Determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S).
836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. Further, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step S8).
36; N) saves off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. A main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 for each of 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output for the number of output times that have been updated (set).
For the main award ball signal output for each schedule, the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, so that the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payments. In addition, even if a winning is made during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc. Even if the payout is made after the big hit, the Hallcon (Hall Computer) is accurate by the main winning ball signal output at the time of winning Information can be collected (judged).

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S819) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843).

If the start port signal output count is not “0” (step S843; N), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (step S844), and the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time (for example, 128) when the start port signal is on (for example, high level).
The on-state time (e.g., 128 msec) of the off-state (e.g., low level) time (e.g., 64 msec). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
If the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843; Y). In step S848, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0” (step S842; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846).
. Here, the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0”. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, an effect in the game and a control in the effect control device 300 that controls the effect will be described. 117 and 118 show an example of effects in the special game state. here,
The case where 16R probability variation B big hit including short opening occurred is shown.

After the big hit result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), a fanfare effect corresponding to the big hit type is performed, and then a round game is started. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the display device 41, a round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds,
A symbol display 41b for displaying a jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special symbol variation display game, a right-handed instruction display 41c for instructing a right-hand hit, and an acquired game ball number display 41d for indicating the number of winning balls acquired by long opening are displayed. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), when the game ball wins the special variable prize winning device 38 in the long open round and wins the prize ball, the prize ball number is displayed as the prize ball number display 41e. Is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and an interval is reached, an interval effect is performed as shown in FIG. 117 (d). Here, since the next round is also long open, an interval effect for long open is performed.

In addition, when the round game progresses and the mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected, the mode transition is performed as shown in FIG. 117 (e). A selection screen 41f is displayed. In this mode transition selection screen 41f, the first
The normal mode that makes up the mode and the delay mode that makes up the second mode can be selected, and the player makes a selection by moving the cursor imitating a finger by operating the effect button effect button 25 or the touch panel 29.

In addition, in the round interval effect that may be short-opened from the next time, that is, the interval effect after 4R ends here, a round-continuous effect 41g that informs whether or not long-opening continues after the next time is performed. . In this round continuation effect 41g, FIG.
), “Short” and “long” characters flash alternately, and the result is indicated by the finally lit character. Here, since the big hit type is 16R probability variation B, it is informed that the short is open. Has been. Furthermore, when it is informed that the short opening will occur, the interval effect is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 18 (b), a promotion effect 41h that prompts the user to aim at the special variable winning device 38 is performed. For example, when the big hit type is 16R probability variation A (all long open), in the round continuation effect 41g, it is notified that the “long” character is lit and long open.

As shown in FIG. 118 (c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in a round with a short opening. Further, an emphasis effect 41i is emphasized to emphasize that the special variable winning device 38 is open.
This emphasis effect 41i is displayed as if light is emitted from the special fluctuation winning device 38. The special variation winning device 38 includes decoration means for performing decoration by light emission, and the light emission timing, light emission intensity, light emission color, and the like are associated with the light emission mode by the decoration means and the display mode of the emphasis effect 41i. It may be synchronized with or may not be synchronized.

In addition, when a round with short opening is started, a short opening winning game ball number display 41j indicating the number of winning balls acquired with short opening separately from the acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of winning balls acquired with long opening. Is displayed. The round number display 41a displays the remaining number of releases. Here, there are 12 remaining rounds including the rounds currently being executed, and each round is released once.
It is displayed as opening twice. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), when the round with the short opening ends and the interval time is reached, the promotion effect 41h is continued, but the special variable winning device 38 is provided.
The emphasis effect 41i for emphasizing that is open is once ended, and when the next round is started as shown in FIG. 118 (e), the emphasis effect 41i is resumed.

When the final round is completed, an ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 118 (f) and 118 (g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (f), an acquired game ball number display 41j indicating the number of prize balls acquired by short opening is displayed on the acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls acquired by long opening. An effect in which the value is added is performed, and as shown in FIG. 118 (g), a total number display 41k is displayed for displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state.

In the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting a probability state after the end of the special game state, is performed. The contents of this state suggestion display are different depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and (1) to (1) to depending on the probability state after the end of the special gaming state as shown in FIG. The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. When the normal mode that constitutes the first mode is selected as shown in FIG. 119 (a), only the character (1) is selected when the high probability state is entered, and (2) when the low probability state is entered. Only characters) are selected. In addition, FIG.
When the delay mode that constitutes the second mode is selected as shown in b), the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the selection rate according to the probability state. Note that the probability state may be suggested not only by the character image but also by character information such as words.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main process shown in FIG. 120 and a timer interrupt process (not shown) are performed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 in order to perform the effects as described above. As shown in FIG. 120, in the main processing, first, processing at the start of the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1),
The CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interruption process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect contents is performed.

And setting of changeable range such as brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal, and LED by player
And hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for editing settings and control for drawing commands. ) To set the end of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 0 second (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to make a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second), V blank interruption (1/6
If 0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board rendering device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 121 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C202).
). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer,
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to a command area (analysis RAM area), and command analysis is performed in the command area. Thereby, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
You can move to make room. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 122 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y
) Determines whether the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C2).
34).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command for an operation related to a small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). And MO
If it is determined that DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239; Y), the symbol-related command processing (
Step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Also, if it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbolic commands (
In step C239; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of a single command such as a pending number command or an error command (step C241). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C24)
1; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (
In step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (step C243). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetched symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetched symbol system command processing (step C2)
44) to finish the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetched symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetched variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. In step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; N)
The received command analysis process ends.

Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the prefetch effect. Pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) for which the special figure fluctuation display game has not been executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of the change pattern (or what kind of variation pattern), the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a different manner from the normal display, or the display device 41 is rendered. This is an effect such as display. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing a change pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched in advance, and from the game control device 100 at the start winning prize It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 123 shows single command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information on the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261).
). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing for rewriting internal information with model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and single command processing is performed. Exit.

If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), RA indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized.
It is determined whether the command corresponds to the M initialization command (step C263). And M
When it is determined that the ODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263)
; Y), RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and single-shot command processing is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and R
Set AM initialization screen information. Furthermore, scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE returns a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been recovered from the power failure without initialization. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C265). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect upon power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y),
A customer waiting demonstration process is performed (step C268), and the single command processing is terminated. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the state of the P machine (pachinko machine) is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and the customer waiting scenario data is set to perform the customer waiting effect.

If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in FIG.
Step C269). Then, when MODE is in FIG. 1 suspension (step C269; Y
), A special figure 1 hold information setting process for performing a process of displaying the decoration start memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed (step C270), and the single-shot command process is terminated. When it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271). If the MODE is on the special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), a special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing a process of displaying the decoration start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C272), the single command processing is terminated. That is, the production control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decoration start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

In step C271, MODE is not special figure 2 suspension (step C271; N
) Determines whether MODE is probability information (step C273). And MOD
If E is probability information (step C273; Y), a probability information setting process for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single command processing is terminated.

In step C273, MODE is not probability information (step C273; N).
Then, it is determined whether MODE is error / invalid (step C275). And MO
If the DE is error / illegal (step C275; Y), an error / illegal setting process for performing corresponding processing such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In step C275, if MODE is not error / invalid (step C275;
N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing effect mode switching processing is performed (step C278), and the single command processing is terminated.

In step C277, if MODE is not effect mode switching (step C277).
N), it is determined whether MODE is a symbol stop (step C279). And M
If the ODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single command processing is terminated. If MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In determining whether the command is normal, it is determined, for example, whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a special figure that is currently changing.

If the command is not normal (step C280; N), the single command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C281). If all symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). The single command processing is terminated. Thereby, the change display of the corresponding decorative special figure change display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state. In addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
FIG. 124 shows the look-ahead design command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this pre-read symbol command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301). If the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetched symbol-related command relates to special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. 1 is saved in the prefetch symbol command area (step C302), a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetch symbol command processing is terminated.

Further, when the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is,
If the received prefetch symbol command is related to special figure 2 hold, the command is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step C303), and a prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag is set. After setting (step C304), the pre-read symbol system command processing is terminated. The reason why the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
FIG. 125 shows the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C246) in the above-described received command analysis processing. In this prefetch fluctuation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetch fluctuation command reception is awaited (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that reception is awaiting. When not waiting for the prefetch fluctuation command (step C31)
1; N) ends the prefetching variation command processing. On the other hand, when the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait is in progress (step C311; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

Thereafter, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the prefetch fluctuation command (prefetch fluctuation pattern command) received from the game control apparatus 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control apparatus 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) for setting a prefetch variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of retained symbols in the latest pending information is performed (step C313), and information on the special type of start memory corresponding to the prefetch variation command received this time A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set in accordance with the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). further,
A prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-in-prefetch conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C316).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of prior judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game The determination result may differ depending on the determination of time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the pre-reading notice effect without being influenced by the number of holds at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of holds. For example, there is a possibility of a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation without reach and a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation. It is converted into MODE divided according to matters to be considered in the setting of the prefetching notice effect, so that the process of the prefetching notice effect can be performed easily and reliably.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach.
The content of the latter-half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holds at the time of determination. However, for example, even in normal reach, the final stop symbol is set to be a stop that stops one frame before the reach symbol, a stop that stops one frame ahead, and a hit case.
Even in the same type of reach, there are various modes, and ACTs corresponding to the respective modes are set, so that the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number and reducing the processing load such as the check in the pre-reading notice effect processing.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C31).
7). If MODE and ACT after conversion are not other than 0 (step C317; N),
Since the command value is abnormal, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, the converted MO
If DE and ACT are both non-zero (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the prefetch variable command area corresponding to the latest hold information and the number of holds (step C318).
), Prefetch command consistency check processing (step C319) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal or not is performed.

If the command combination is not normal (step C320; N) as a result of the prefetch command matching check process (step C319), the prefetch variation command process is terminated. on the other hand,
If the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C321) for lottery execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed to determine whether a prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

When no pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C322; N), the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C322; Y
) Determines whether the pre-reading notice effect (that is, the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-read lottery process (step C321)) is an effect that starts immediately (step C3).
23). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. An effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice effect that is performed during the execution of a special figure fluctuation display game, which produces a specific effect or reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during the display, a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the current time, and the like. The timing of starting the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately is that the special figure fluctuation display game is ended if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. Applicable timing.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure change display game that executes a prefetch notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected prefetching notice effect is set (step C324), and the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.

[Design command processing]
FIG. 126 shows a symbol-based command process (step C) in the received command analysis process described above.
240). In this symbol system command processing, first, a special figure type corresponding to MODE (
The special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is set (step C351), the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved (step C352), and the symbol command processing is terminated.

The symbol types are: off symbol, 16R probability variation A big hit symbol, 16R probability variation B big hit symbol, 16
R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R probability variable big hit symbol, small hit symbol symbol, etc., and is associated with ACT data. Since the ratio of symbols varies between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to MODE data from a plurality of symbol type setting tables. And the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 127 shows the variable command processing (step C) in the received command analysis processing described above.
236). In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

If this special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. When the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (
Step C362), it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (Step C
363).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. Also, if the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3
63; N) discriminates the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols. Examples of symbol types include: abandoned symbol, 16R probability variable A big hit symbol, 16R probability variable B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R positive variable big hit symbol, small There are winning designs. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is the same as when the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A big hit symbol is received although the variation command (variation pattern command) of the deviation is received. It means a combination (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type) that conflicts with the above.

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, variation effect setting processing for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, during the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine), special figure changing is set (step C366)
). Here, during the special map change, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit or during a fanfare, etc.). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by −1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process is terminated.

[Variation production setting processing]
FIG. 128 shows the change effect setting process (step C36) in the above-described change command process.
5). In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code and special figure type and the presenting mode is set (step C382). In addition, since it is a fluctuation without reach, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and there is no need to particularly refer to the symbol type here. The production mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the production control device 300,
Of course, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, a time reduction mode, a latent mode, etc. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different are provided.

Next, referring to the first half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of MODEs and special figure types held is acquired (step C383).
. As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effects that appear during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of holds. Thereafter, a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice allocation group table (step C386).

On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, presentation mode and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. The lottery for the advance notice appearing is performed (step C386).

Next, the notice effect of the second half change is drawn. Note that the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special combination of symbols) in which a display area excluding a specific area out of a plurality of display areas of the special figure is a big hit) Is a variable display in a state in which the variable is displayed only in a specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second half notice distribution group table.
Then, the second half notice allocation group table address corresponding to the ACT is obtained by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for notice of appearance is performed (step C389).
).

After that, the contents of the variable effects corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390),
The contents of the production corresponding to the notice lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the variation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure variation display game are determined. Further, stop symbol setting processing for determining a stop symbol with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect etc.) of the special symbol variation display game and the notice content is performed (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the fluctuating effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C393).
Step C394). With these processes, it is possible to execute effects and notices in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to decrease the decoration start memory display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

Then, a sound number that is a BGM number and a decoration number that is a number indicating the type of effect produced by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C396), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display setting is performed (step C397). Furthermore, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the fourth symbol variation display setting corresponding to the special symbol type is set. (Step C39
8) The variation effect setting process is terminated.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 129 shows the jackpot command process (step C238) in the received command analysis process described above. In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hitting fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). When MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare display image corresponding to the type of jackpot or the jackpot is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set during fanfare. After setting (step C403), the big hit command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. If the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number-of-rounds display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set to the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting an effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and a big hit System command processing ends. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round.

When the MODE is an ending (step C410; Y), for example, when the high probability state is reached after the special gaming state ends, the big hit ends such as setting screen information for informing that the high probability state is set. Ending effect setting processing for setting screen information corresponding to a later gaming state is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set to ending (step C412), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. If MODE is not an ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C).
413). That is, it is determined whether or not the received command is a big winning mouth count command based on winning in the special variable winning device 38.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated. When MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to winning in the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

[Count effect setting processing]
FIG. 130 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the openable time is a short open round with a predetermined open time or less (step C421). In the present embodiment, the short open round has an openable time of 0.2 seconds, and the long open round has an openable time of 29 seconds.

If it is not a short open round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long open round, the acquired game ball number counter is updated based on the big winning count command (
Step C422), the display setting of the acquired game ball number display 41d based on the acquired game ball number counter is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process is ended. The acquired game ball number counter counts the number of winning balls to be paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the long open round. In step C422, the number of winning balls to be paid out is updated based on the winning. In step C423, the updated value is displayed.

If it is a short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the big prize opening count command (step C424), and the short opening acquisition game ball based on the short opening pattern counter is updated. Set the display of the number display 41j (Step C
425), the count effect setting process is terminated. The short opening pattern counter counts the number of winning balls to be paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening round. In step C424, the number of winning balls to be paid out is updated based on the winning. In step C425, the updated value is displayed.

As a result, the number of winnings in the special variable winning device 38 in the long opening and the number of winnings in the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening are separately counted and displayed. That is, the effect control device 300 has a winning determination means for determining whether the winning to the special variable winning device 38 is a first opening mode (long opening) or a second opening mode (short opening). Eggplant. Also,
The effect control device 300 determines the number of winning balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the first opening mode (long opening) and the special in the second opening mode (short opening) based on the winning determination by the winning determining means. Counting means for separately counting the number of winning balls based on winning in the variable winning device 38.

[Fanfare production setting processing]
FIG. 131 shows the fanfare effect setting process (step C402) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command is a fanfare command corresponding to any of 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal A, or 16R normal B.

If ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431; Y), the number of big hits is updated by +1 (step C432), and the display contents of the big hit fanfare effect are determined based on the probability state and the number of big hits (step C433). The number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on a normal gaming state that is not a high probability state or a short time state. That is, the so-called continuous number of times is counted. Thereafter, the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined content is performed (step C434), and it is determined whether the big hit includes a short opening (step C435). When short opening is not included (step C434; N), that is, when all rounds are long opening, hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. If short opening is included (step C434; Y), short opening big hit information is set (step C436), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. .

If the ACT is not a big hit fanfare (step C431; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to 4R probability change (surprise accuracy). When ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a hit from a continuous effect that is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

If it is not a win from the continuous effect (step C438; N), display setting of the sudden-specific effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C439), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect is set. The setting process ends. When the 4R probability change in the low probability state becomes a high probability state after the special gaming state, the rush-specific effect corresponding to the probability state performs an effect that informs or suggests that effect. Also, if the 4R probability changes in the high probability state, the high probability state continues after the special gaming state,
An effect that informs or suggests that effect is performed.

If it is a win from a continuous effect (step C438; Y), a random effect to be executed is selected by lottery from the sudden effect patterns related to the current changing effect (continuous effect) (step C440) and determined. The display setting of the surprise effect is set (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the case of 4R probability change from the continuous performance, the performance related to the continuous performance is performed even in the special game state. In the case of 4R probability variation, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

If the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C437; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to the small hit. If ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. A
When CT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether the winning is from a continuous effect that is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games (
Step C443).

If it is not a win from the continuous effect (step C443; N), the display setting of the small hit exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C444), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare is set. The effect setting process ends. In the case of a small hit, since the probability state does not change before and after the small hit, the small hit exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state performs an effect that informs or suggests that the probability state when the small hit occurs is maintained.

If it is a win from a continuous effect (step C442; Y), a small hit effect to be executed is selected by lottery from the small hit effect patterns related to the current changing effect (continuous effect) (step C445), Display setting of the determined small hit effect is performed (step C446), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the case of a small hit from a continuous effect, an effect related to the continuous effect is performed even in the special game state.

In the case of 4R probability change or small hit from the continuous performance, when the 4R probability change or small hit is derived (at the end of the special figure change display game that becomes a surprise or small hit), the result mode is not clearly shown. An effect is shown to indicate which is in a special gaming state based on probability change or small hits. For example, an effect in which an enemy character and a teammate character fight is performed as a continuous effect, and when the result mode is derived, the battle is not yet settled. Then, in the special game state, in the case of 4R probability change, an effect that the ally character wins (surprise effect) is performed, and in the case of a small hit, an effect that the enemy character wins (small hit effect) is performed.

[Round effect setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this round effect setting process, first, display setting for a right-handed instruction is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether the game state is a special game state based on a small hit or a sudden probability (4R probability variation) (step C462).

If the special gaming state is based on the small hit or the odds (step C462; Y), the display setting of the small hit / probable round effect is performed (step C474), and the process proceeds to step C475. Further, when the game state is not a special game state based on the small hit or the probability (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and the short open big hit information set in the case of the big win including the short open round (Step C464)
.

When there is no short-open big hit information (step C464; N), that is, in the case of a special game state with only a long open round, the display setting of the number of rounds is performed (step C465) and the round effect display setting of the long open pattern (Step C466). Next, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the long open pattern, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, are set (step C467).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the mode transition selection round is a mode in which a notification mode at the end of the special gaming state or an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state can be selected (step C468). If it is not the mode transition selection round (step C468; N), the round effect setting process ends.
If it is a mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process ends.

On the other hand, when there is short-open big hit information (step C464; Y), that is, in a special game state including a short open round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value that becomes a short open round (step C470). ). If the number of rounds is not a predetermined value that is a short open round (step C470; N), that is, if the round is a long open round, the process proceeds to step C465.

In addition, when the number of rounds is a predetermined value that becomes a short open round (step C470; Y)
That is, in the case of a round with a short opening, display setting of the round effect of the short opening pattern is performed (step C471), and the remaining opening number is calculated from the round number upper limit value information and the number of rounds (step C472). Then, the display setting of the remaining number of times of opening that is the number of times of opening by short opening is performed (step C473), and the display setting of the emphasis effect that prompts the player to aim for winning the special variable winning device 38 is performed (step C475). After that, a sound number which is a BGM number based on the emphasis effect, a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, etc. is set (
Step C476), the round effect setting process ends.

That is, in a round with a short opening, a small hit with a short opening, or a round with 4R probability variation, an effect different from the round with a long opening is performed. As mentioned above, special variable winning device 3
No. 8 makes it easy to retain the game ball in the opening / closing member 990, and even if it is short open, it is possible to aim for winning, so an emphasis effect 41i that prompts the player to aim for winning is performed.

[Interval production setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the interval effect setting process (step C408) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this interval effect setting process, first, a sound number which is the BGM number of the long opening interval, a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, etc. are set (step C481), and a big hit including a short opening round In step C482, it is determined whether there is short open jackpot information that is set.

When there is no short-open big hit information (step C482; N), that is, in the special game state of only the long open round, the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, FIG.
The long release interval as shown in 17 (d) is set. Further, when there is short open big hit information (step C482; Y), that is, in a special game state including a short open round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). The predetermined value here is the last round number that becomes long open, and is 4 in this embodiment.

If the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, if it is a round that will be short-opened from the next time, the display setting of the round continuation notification effect is performed (step C484).
), A sound number that is a BGM number based on the round continuation notification effect, and a decoration number that is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C485), and the interval effect setting process is terminated. Thereby, the round continuation notification effect as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B is set.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not a predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486). If the number of rounds is not greater than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the next round is a long opening, and the long opening interval remains set.

If the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), the display setting of the short opening interval is set (step C487), and the sound number that is the BGM number of the short opening interval, the decoration lamp, etc. A decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect, is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, FIG. 118 (d)
The short opening interval as shown in FIG. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed, but the enhancement effect 41i is not performed. However, the emphasis effect 41i may be performed as in the round, or the emphasis effect dedicated to the interval may be performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 134 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above jackpot command processing. In this ending effect setting process, first, jackpot type information, which is information of the jackpot type that triggered the occurrence of this special gaming state, is loaded (step C
491), the state suggestion display is set from the jackpot type information and the selection rate in the first mode (see FIG. 119 (a)) (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a mode transition flag (step C493). There are a first mode and a second mode in the production modes after the end of the special game state, and the player can select them.
In the first mode and the second mode, the contents of the state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting a probability state,
This is an effect mode in which the effect of the special figure variation display game is different. This effect mode can be selected on the mode transition selection screen 41 f displayed in the mode transition selection round, and the player makes a selection by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29.
When the player selects the first mode, the mode transition flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode transition flag is set.

When there is no mode transition flag (step C493; N), that is, when the first mode is set, the routine proceeds to step C495. In this case, the state suggestion display set in step C492 is displayed. When there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), that is, when the second mode is set, a state suggestion display based on the selection rate in the second mode (see FIG. 119 (b)) is set ( Step C494) and the process proceeds to Step C495.

Thereafter, the total number of acquired game balls is calculated from the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter (step C495), and display setting of the addition effect based on the total acquired game ball number is performed (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), and the short opening big hit information is reset (step C498).
The ending effect setting process ends. Through the above processing, the state suggestion display 41m corresponding to the effect mode selected by the player is displayed at the end of the special game state, and the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is displayed as the total number display 41k. .

FIG. 135 shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. 135 (a) to (c)
The right-handed instruction display 41c for instructing right-handing may be displayed so as to flow from the left to the right of the display screen. In this case, the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow at a position that does not overlap with the symbol display 41b for displaying the jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special symbol variation display game. The right-handed instruction display 41c may be displayed so as to flow at a position overlapping the symbol display 41b. However, the backside of the symbol display 41b is displayed so that the right-handed instruction display 41c flows, and the symbol display 41 is displayed.
b is always visible. The round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds and the emphasis effect 41i, which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may be hidden by the right-handed instruction display 41c or may not be hidden.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 135D to 135F, a promotion effect 41h that prompts the user to aim at the special variation winning device 38 may be displayed so as to flow toward the special variation winning device 38. In this case, when it overlaps with the symbol display 41b that displays the jackpot symbol derived in the decoration special symbol variation display game, as shown in FIG. 135 (d), the display is made so that the promotion effect 41h flows on the back side of the symbol display 41b. The symbol display 41b is always visible. Moreover, you may make it display so that the promotion effect 41h may flow in the position which does not overlap with the symbol display 41b. It should be noted that the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i, the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j, etc., which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may be hidden by the promotion effect 41h, or may not be hidden. Also good. Also, the display for operating the right-handed instruction display 41c as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (c) and the display for operating the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIGS. 135 (d) to 135 (f) are performed simultaneously. May be.

FIG. 136 also shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 136 (a), the operation unit 24 and the special variable prize winning are provided as the promotion effect 41h that prompts the user to aim at the special variable prize winning device 38 and the highlight effect 41i that emphasizes that the special variable prize winning device 38 is open. Device 38
May be used to instruct the operation unit 24 to turn largely to the right or to instruct the special variable winning device 38. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variable winning devices 38 are provided, it is possible to clearly indicate which special variable winning device 38 should be aimed. In addition, the light emission mode in the actual special variation winning device 38 positioned on the lower right side of the display device 41 and the light emission mode in the image of the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized. The special variable winning device 38 to be aimed at can be understood. Of course, the light emission mode of the operation unit 24 may be similarly synchronized.

The image may be a schematic animation or an actual special variation winning device 38.
It may be a video showing. In addition, the operation unit 24 displayed on the display device 41 and the special variable winning device 3
In the image of 8, it is not necessary to perform the display synchronized with the light emission effect in the actual operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38. In addition, the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be a still image.

Further, the character information and the arrow image included in the right-handed instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h may be displayed as described above. In this case, the operation unit 24
Alternatively, the front side of the image of the special variation winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side may be moved. Further, when the collective display device 50 is displayed on the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38, the display may be performed in synchronization with the display mode of the actual collective display device 50, or the display is not synchronized. Also good. Any display mode may be used for non-synchronized display mode. For example, a state in which all of the display modes are lit or extinguished, or a specific lighting mode (in the case of 7 segments, a big hit such as “7” is reminiscent). A specific number is turned on, and in the case of an aggregate of LEDs, a big hit is associated with a specific lighting mode when a big hit occurs.

Further, when the game state of right-handed is started, an image for instructing to turn the operation unit 24 to the right or instructing to aim at the normal variation winning device 37 may be displayed. . In addition, when a left-handed gaming state is started, an image for instructing to turn the operation unit 24 small to the right or instructing to win the winning device 90 may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), a remaining time display 41n for displaying the remaining time until the end of the final round may be performed. The condition for ending a round that is established in the case of a short opening is almost always when the openable time elapses rather than when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special variable winning device 38, and the round ends in a fixed time. To do. Therefore, when the subsequent rounds are short open, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by integrating the round time until the end of the final round and the interval time. By displaying the remaining time in this way, it is possible to give an impression different from that in the case of notifying by the number of remaining rounds and to improve the interest of the game. That is, it has a remaining time calculating means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special gaming state, and can notify the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculating means. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first opening mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or longer, and the second opening mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or less. Although described as short opening, it is not restricted to this, What kind of opening aspect may be sufficient if a 1st opening aspect and a 2nd opening aspect differ. In addition, as a gaming machine, a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on winning in the starting area has been described, but other gaming machines may be used. For example, so-called wings that can be awarded to an auxiliary gaming device based on a winning in the starting area and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a game ball won in the auxiliary gaming device flows into a specific area (Old two types) gaming machines may be used.

As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start prize port 36, the normal variable prize device 37, the second start prize port) 97) A game in which a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine 10 can convert a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and controls a special variable winning device 38 that is converted into an open state in a special game state, and effects related to the game. And an operation control means (effect control device 300), and the operation mode of the special variable winning device 38 in the special gaming state includes a first opening mode (long opening) and a second opening different from the first opening mode. Aspect A short open), there is, effect control means, so that the second in an open manner is performed, it is feasible to promote presentation 41h prompting the firing of the game ball towards special variation winning device 38. Therefore, the decrease of the game ball during the special game state is suppressed,
The fun of gaming can be enhanced.

In addition, a launch operation unit (operation unit 24) that is operated by a player to adjust the launch force of a game ball, a display device 41 that can display information related to the game, and a special variable winning device 38 are decorated with light emission. Display means for displaying the operation method of the launch operation unit necessary for launching the game ball toward the special variation winning device 38 as the promotion effect 41h. The display device 41 displays the decoration mode of the special variable winning device 38 by the decoration means. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand the contents of the promotion effect 41h.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 through which game balls can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start prize port 36, ordinary variable prize device 37, second start prize port 97).
A game machine 10 that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on a winning of a game ball to the player and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is provided with a special variable winning device 38 that is converted into the open state in the special game state, The operation mode of the device 38 includes a first opening mode (long opening), and the first mode.
There is a second opening mode (short opening) different from the opening mode, and a winning determination for determining whether the winning to the special variable winning device 38 is a winning in the first opening mode or the second opening mode. Means (production control device 300). Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the winning determination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the winning to the special variable winning device 38, and the special variable winning device 38 in the first release mode based on the winning determination by the winning determining means.
Counting means (effect control device 300) for separately counting the number of winning balls based on winning and the number of winning balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the second opening mode. Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the counting means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, an effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the effects related to the game is provided, and the effect control means is based on the result of counting by the counting means and a prize ball based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the first opening mode. It is possible to separately notify the number and the number of winning balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the second opening mode. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the count result that has not been notified at a predetermined timing after notifying only a part of the count result by the count means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of the addition effect.

As shown in FIG. 137, in this modification, it is possible to not immediately display the number of prize balls acquired by short opening on the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j. In the example shown in FIG. 137, FIG.
As shown in (a) and (b), a round with a short opening is performed, and as shown in FIG. 137 (b), a value equal to the number of winning balls acquired in the short opening is so far. It is displayed by the ball number display 41j. After that, 15 new prize balls were earned with short opening.
As shown in c), these 15 are not added to the short-opening acquired game ball number display 41j.

In the ending effect after the end of the final round, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the acquired number of game balls 41d indicating the number of winning balls acquired by long opening is shown the number of winning balls acquired by short opening. An effect is added in which the value in the short open acquisition game ball number display 41j is added, as shown in FIG. 137 (e).
The total number display 41k is displayed to display the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state as shown in FIG. At this time, the total number display 41k does not include the 15 prize balls that were not added in FIG. 137 (c). Thereafter, in the latter half of the ending effect, as shown in FIGS. 137 (f) and (g), an additional effect is performed in which 15 prize balls that have not been added are added to the total number display 41k.

Regarding the short opening round, the player is interested in how much game value (prize ball) can be acquired, and in addition to the value displayed in the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j, By performing an effect such as adding, it is possible to give the player a sense of gain and enhance the interest of the game.

[Count effect setting processing]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs a count effect setting process shown in FIG. 138 in place of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, in the case of a short open round (step C421), a count display lottery is performed for drawing whether the acquired winning ball number is immediately displayed on the short open acquired game ball number display 41j (step C601). ).

If the result of the count display lottery is to be displayed (step C602; Y), the processing of steps C424 and C425 is performed, and the number of acquired winning balls is displayed as a short-opening acquired game ball number display 41j.
To display immediately. Further, when it is determined that the display is not performed as a result of the count display lottery (step C602; N), the non-display counter is updated based on the winning prize count command (step C603), and the count effect setting process is ended. In this case, the number of winning balls won is counted by a non-display counter, but is not displayed at this time.

[Ending effect setting process]
Further, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 139 is performed instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. In this ending effect setting process, the re-total number is calculated from the total number of acquired game balls and the non-display counter (step C611), and an extra effect based on the re-total number is set (step C612). Then, the non-display counter is reset (Step C
612). By this processing, after the addition effects shown in FIGS. 137 (d) and (e), FIG.
The extra effects shown in f) and (g) are performed.

In addition, you may make it perform the extra effect which alert | reports the number of prize balls which has not been alert | reported yet only when predetermined conditions are satisfy | filled in a special game state. For example, in a round with a long opening,
An extra effect may be performed only when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 9) or more that can be won in one round occurs.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the processing related to the display of the state suggestion display 41m.

FIG. 140 shows an example of the effect in the special game state in this modification. FIG. 140 (a)
As shown in FIG. 2, when the round is short and the predetermined round is reached, an effect button operation effect in which the player operates the effect button 25 is started. This effect button operation effect changes the display mode of the state suggestion display 41m according to the operation result of the effect button 25.

In this effect button operation effect, a meter display 41p that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 and displays the operation status is displayed. The meter display 41p is a display in which a plurality of areas are vertically overlapped, and the display color is sequentially changed from the lower area in accordance with the length of time the player presses the effect button 25 and the number of times the effect button 25 is pressed. In this way, the operation status is notified.

If the player presses the effect button 25 for a predetermined time or longer or presses the effect button 25 for a predetermined number of times within the effective period and achieves the final condition, the meter display 41p is all displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (b). The display color of the area changes. And as shown in FIG.140 (c), in the ending effect, the state suggestion display 41m according to the effect mode which the player selected in the mode transfer selection round is displayed.

Also, if the player has long pressed the effect button 25 or pressed the effect button 25 within the effective period, but has not achieved the final condition, the meter display 41 as shown in FIG. 140 (d).
The display color of a part of p changes. Here, the final condition has not been achieved, but a predetermined intermediate condition has been achieved. As shown in FIG. 140 (e), a state suggestion display 41m partially hidden is displayed in the ending effect. The

Further, when the player does not operate the effect button 25 within the effective period, FIG.
As shown in 0 (f), the display color of all the areas of the meter display 41p does not change. As shown in FIG. 140 (g), the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed in the ending effect.
Note that the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed in the same manner even when the player presses the effect button 25 for a long time or presses the effect button 25 within the effective period but does not achieve the intermediate condition.

The state suggestion display 41m in which a part shown in FIG. 140 (e) is concealed is selected at the selection rate shown in FIG. 141 according to the probability state after the end of the special gaming state. These state suggestion displays 41m
Are partially concealed, but since the display modes are different, it is possible for a player who is accustomed to discriminate them. However, since each state suggestion display 41m can be selected in either the high probability state or the low probability state, it is difficult to clearly grasp the probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

[Direction button operation effect processing]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the effect button operation effect process shown in FIG. 142 in the effect button input process in the main process shown in FIG. In this effect button operation effect process, it is first determined whether or not an effect button operation effect is being executed (step C621). If the effect button operation effect is not being executed (step C621; N), the effect button operation effect process is performed. Exit. Also, when the production button operation production is being executed (
Step C621; Y) determines whether or not there is an operation of the effect button (Step C622),
If there is no operation (step C622; N), the effect button operation effect process ends.

When there is an operation of the effect button (step C622; Y), the operation input counter is updated corresponding to the operation mode of the effect button (step C623), and the meter display is set based on the operation input counter (step C624). ), The effect button operation effect process ends. In other words, the value of the operation input counter is updated every time the effect button 25 is pressed for a certain period of time or every time the effect button 25 is pressed shortly, and the meter display is displayed according to this value. Done.

[Ending effect setting process]
Further, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 143 is performed instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether the operation input counter is the upper limit value (step C631). If the operation input counter is the upper limit value (step C631; Y),
That is, when the final condition is achieved, the operation input counter is reset (step C63).
5) End the ending effect setting process. In this case, the state suggestion display 41m set in steps C491 to C494 is displayed.

If the operation input counter is not the upper limit value (step C631; N), it is determined whether the operation input counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (step C632). When the operation input counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (step C632; Y), that is, when the intermediate condition is achieved, a state suggestion display 41m based on the selection table selection rate (see FIG. 141) is set (step C
633), the operation input counter is reset (step C635), and the ending effect setting process is terminated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), a state suggestion display 41m partially hidden is displayed.

If the operation input counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step C632; N), that is, if the intermediate condition is not achieved, the state suggestion display is set to non-display (step C634).
Then, the operation input counter is reset (step C635), and the ending effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (g). That is, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) notifies the information regarding the game after the end of the special game state based on the operation mode of the operation unit (the effect button 25, the touch panel 29) by the player in the special game state. This means that the aspects are different.

Note that the state suggestion display 41m may gradually change from a completely hidden state to a completely visible state in accordance with the operation of the effect button 25 (in accordance with the value of the operation input counter).

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to give points according to the game result in the special game state.

FIG. 144 shows an example of effects in the special game state in this modification. FIG. 144 (a)
As shown in FIG. 144 (b), a short-opening round is performed, and one game ball is won in the special variable winning device 38 in this short-opening round. It can be acquired. When the character is acquired, an acquisition display 41q for notifying the type of the acquired character is displayed, and the acquired character is displayed on the total acquisition display 41r displayed by the character acquired in the special gaming state. 144 (
In b), it is informed that the star character has been acquired in the acquisition display 41q, and it is shown that one star character has been acquired in the total acquisition display 41r.

As shown in FIG. 144 (c), when one game ball wins again in the special variation winning device 38, one character is acquired. Here, the acquisition display 41q indicates that a peach character has been acquired, and the total acquisition display 41r indicates that one star character and one peach character have been acquired. The character to be acquired is selected for each prize according to the selection rate as shown in FIG. 144 (h).

As shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the ending effect, the type of character acquired in the total acquisition display 41r is displayed. Here, it is shown that seven star characters, one peach character, one note character, and one treasure chest character are acquired. Since one character corresponds to one winning in the special variable winning device 38, the total acquisition display 4
Corresponding to 1r, a short open acquired game ball number display 41j is displayed, and an addition effect added to the acquired game ball number display 41d is performed.

Furthermore, the privilege according to the acquired character is provided and accompanying notification display 41s which alert | reports provision of a privilege is performed. As shown in FIG. 144 (e), points are awarded when a peach character is acquired. This point can be used for the player to customize the game performance. Also, as shown in FIG. 144 (f), when a musical note character has been acquired, a special BGM is set as the BGM after the special gaming state ends. Also, as shown in FIG. 144 (g), when a treasure box character has been acquired, a special background is set as the background after the end of the special game state.

By giving a privilege in this way, even if it is short open, it can be made to aim for the prize to the special variable prize-winning apparatus 38, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by providing a game value different from the prize ball, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. That is, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) can give a game value different from the prize ball based on the winning to the special variation winning device 38.

[Count effect setting processing]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs a count effect setting process shown in FIG. 145 instead of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. In this count effect setting process, if it is a short open round (step C421), a character is selected based on the selection rate of the display icon table (see FIG. 144 (h)) (step C651), and the character display setting is made. Perform (step C652). Thereby, the acquisition display 41q and the total acquisition display 41r are performed as shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (c).

[Ending effect setting process]
Further, an ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 146 is performed instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. In this ending effect setting process, the point giving character (
Here, it is determined whether a peach character has been acquired (step C661). If no point-giving character has been acquired (step C661; N), the process proceeds to step C663. In addition, when the point granting character has been acquired (step C661; Y),
Points are awarded based on the number of acquisitions (step C662), and the process proceeds to step C663.

Next, it is determined whether a BGM character (note character here) has been acquired (step C663). If no BGM character has been acquired (step C663; N),
Control goes to step C665. If a BGM character has been acquired (step C
663; Y) sets a privilege BGM (step C664), and proceeds to step C665.

Next, it is determined whether a background character (here, a treasure box character) has been acquired (step C665). If no background character has been acquired (step C665; N), the ending effect setting process ends. If a background character has been acquired (step C665; Y), a privilege background is set (step C666), and the ending effect setting process ends.

[Main processing]
In addition, the main process shown in FIG. 147 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this main process, the effect point control process (step C671) for performing the process regarding an effect point is performed.

[Direction point control processing]
In FIG. 148, the effect point control process in the main process described above (step C671).
showed that. In this effect point setting process, first, it is determined whether there is a grant privilege selection operation flag that is set in a state where the player selects a grant privilege based on the points (step C691). As grant privileges that can be selected here, it is possible to generate effects that cannot normally be seen, such as special characters appearing in addition to privilege BGM and privilege background, and special reach can be generated. Things.

When there is a grant privilege selection operation flag (step C691; Y), step C702 is executed.
Migrate to When there is no grant privilege selection operation flag (step C691; N),
Status information is acquired (step C692). The state information is information indicating the state of the gaming machine such as during the execution of the special figure variation display game, during the special game state, or during the customer waiting state.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether or not the state is a trigger for resetting the accumulated point value (step C693). Here, it is assumed that the state in which the customer is waiting is a reset trigger. When the point accumulation value is not in a state of being triggered (step C693;
N) proceeds to step C694. If the point accumulation value is triggered (step C693; Y), the point accumulation value is reset (step C69).
4) Go to step C695.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether it is a state that is a trigger for resetting the granted privilege (step C695). The granted privilege is a privilege BGM or a privilege background. In addition, here, it is assumed that the state in which the customer is waiting is a reset trigger. If it is not in a state of being a trigger for resetting the granted privilege (step C695; N), the process proceeds to step C697. If the grant privilege is triggered (step C695; Y), the grant privilege is reset (step C696), and the process proceeds to step C697.

Next, it is determined whether the point exchange is possible based on the acquired state information (step C697). Here, it is assumed that the point exchange is possible when the customer is not waiting. When the point exchange is not possible (step C697; N), the effect point control process ends. If the points can be exchanged (step C697;
Y) determines whether the point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699). The point exchange condition is that the point accumulated value is not less than the minimum number of points necessary for the exchange set for each grant privilege. When this point exchange condition is not satisfied (step C699; N), the effect point control process is terminated. If the point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699; Y), it is determined whether there is a point exchange start operation (step C700).

The point exchange start operation is an operation of performing a predetermined operation on the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 and starting exchange of points and grant privileges. When there is no point exchange start operation (step C700; N), the effect point control process is terminated. Also,
When there is a point exchange start operation (step C700; Y), the grant privilege selection operation flag is set (step C701), and the effect point control process is ended.

On the other hand, when there is a grant privilege selection operation flag (step C691; Y), it is determined whether there has been a grant privilege determination operation (step C702). When there is no operation to determine the granted privilege (
Step C702; N) ends the effect point control process. Further, when there is an operation for determining the granting privilege (step C702; Y), the selected granting privilege is set (step C).
703), the grant privilege selection operation flag is reset (step C704), and the effect point control process is ended.

In addition, although it was a case where a point granting character was acquired as an opportunity to acquire points,
In other cases, points may be obtained. For example, when a prefetch effect is executed, points may be acquired according to the prefetch effect to be executed. Further, points may be obtained when a game is continued for a predetermined time, when a specific performance occurs, or when a prize is received at a prize opening.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to reduce the flow down speed of the game ball up to the opening / closing member 990.

As shown in FIG. 149, the flow path forming portion 9 of the opening / closing member 990 is disposed on the upper surface 617 of the guiding portion 616.
A protrusion 481 and a recess 482 similar to the protrusion 992 and the recess 993 provided in 91 are formed. Due to the protrusions 481 and the recesses 482, the game ball flowing down the upper surface 617 of the guide part 616 flows down to the left while meandering back and forth, and flows down more than without these protrusions 481 and the recesses 482. The speed is reduced. Thereby, the flow speed can be sufficiently lowered before reaching the opening / closing member 990 of the special fluctuation winning device 38, and the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 can be lengthened.

In the configuration of FIG. 149 (a), the game ball approaches the position closer to the player than in the configuration of FIG. 149 (b), so that the flow-down mode of the game ball toward the special fluctuation winning device 38 is easy to see.
The fun of gaming can be improved. In the configuration of FIG. 149 (b), the game ball can be prevented from colliding with the back surface of the cover glass of the glass frame 15, so that the cover glass can be protected and noise generated by colliding with the cover glass. Can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 150, a protruding portion 481 for meandering the game ball flowing down may be provided at a portion upstream of the opening / closing member 990 in the flow down channel 38f. In this way, the speed of the game ball flowing into the opening / closing member 990 can be reduced, and the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 can be further increased. Further, as shown in FIG.
A protrusion 481 and a recess 482 for meandering the flowing down game ball may be provided in a portion upstream of the opening / closing member 990 in 8f. Similarly, the speed of the game ball flowing into the opening / closing member 990 can be reduced, and the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 can be further increased.

In addition, although a vibration generate | occur | produces when a game ball meanders, you may provide the detection sensor which detects this vibration. Alternatively, a detection sensor that detects the presence of the game ball may be provided in a portion where the game ball meanders. Then, the production control device 300 uses the LED based on the detection signal from the detection sensor.
Make an effect such as flashing. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the game balls that meander and stay, and it can be shown that the game balls can flow into the special fluctuation winning device 38 in a short opening.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the configuration of the special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the special variation winning apparatus 38 of the present modification includes a guide channel 955 composed of a main body 970 and a rear wall member 960, a V channel 955a extending downward, and a right channel 955a. Branches into a discharge ball passage 955b extending in the direction of the head. A V door 501 that is slidable in the front-rear direction is provided at a position that is an inflow portion of the V flow path 955a. The V door 520 protrudes forward and blocks the flow into the V flow path 955a, and retreats backward to the V flow path 95.
It is convertible to the permissible state which permits inflow to 5a.

The game ball that has won the grand prize opening 38d and has flowed into the guide channel 955 is guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the through-hole 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, and formed in the main body portion 970. It is guided to the right by the rib 973 and reaches the branching portion of the V channel 955a and the discharge ball channel 955b. When the V door 520 is retracted rearward, it can flow into the lower V flow path 955a, and the game ball flowing into the V flow path 955a detects the game ball flowing into the V flow path 955a. After being detected at 460, the discharge is guided to the rear by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passed through the through portion 974, and guided to the back side of the main body portion 970 to discharge the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. It flows into the flow path. As will be described later, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the big hit symbol, but the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a in the special gaming state and the probability variation operation region A high probability state is set based on the detection by the switch 460.

On the other hand, in a state where the V door 520 protrudes forward, the game ball reaching the branching portion is the V door 52.
It is guided to the right through the upper surface of 0 and flows into the discharge ball channel 955b. Discharge ball passage 955b
The game ball that has flowed into the through hole 4 is guided to the right and is formed in the main body 970 through the front and rear through holes 4.
62 to the back side of the main body 970 and guided further downward to the discharge ball channel 955b.
After being detected by a remaining ball discharge switch 461 that detects a game ball flowing down, it flows into a discharge flow path for discharging the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. A rib 463 that guides the game ball flowing down the discharge ball channel 955 b to the rear through port 462 is formed on the rear surface of the rear wall member 960 and at a position facing the through port 462.

As shown in FIGS. 154 to 157, V for operating the V door on the back side of the main body 970.
A door unit 500 is provided. The V door unit 500 includes a V door 520, a lever solenoid 502 that drives the V door 520, and V according to the drive of the lever solenoid 502.
A link member 510 for operating the door 520 is provided.

The lever solenoid 502 is arranged so that the drive shaft 503 extends downward along the vertical direction. A first link member 511 of the link member 510 is connected to the distal end portion of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 is slidable in the vertical direction along with the operation of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 is provided with a bearing portion 512 that receives a connection shaft 514 provided at one end of the second link member 513 so that the connection shaft 514 moves up and down as the drive shaft 503 operates. It has become.

The second link member 513 is bent in a square shape, and a connection shaft 514 connected to the first link member 511 is provided at the end of the arm portion 517 extending from the bent portion to one side. Yes. Further, a connecting shaft 515 connected to the V door 520 is provided at an end portion of the arm portion 518 extending from the bent portion to the other side. A rotation shaft 516 is provided at the bent portion. The rotation shaft 516 is perpendicular to the extending direction of the arm portions 517 and 518 extending from the bent portion, and the connection shafts 514 and 515 are extended in parallel to the rotation shaft. The rotation shaft 516 is the main body 6.
The second link member 513 is pivotable about the pivot shaft 516. The second link member 513 is pivoted about the pivot shaft 516.

The V door 520 includes a door portion 521 that can extend to the V flow path 955a. The door 521 has an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined to the right when viewed from the front side, and the game ball is allowed to flow down to the right discharge ball channel 955b in a state of extending to the V channel 955a. ing. The door 52
The front end portion in the extending direction of 1 is an inclined surface that is inclined so that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. By forming the inclined surface in this way, when the door portion 521 is extended forward to the V channel 955a, the game ball existing at the inflow portion to the V channel 955a is released upward or downward. be able to.

An insertion portion 522 for inserting the connection shaft 515 of the second link member 513 is formed at the rear portion of the V door 520. The front-rear width of the insertion portion 522 is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the connection shaft 515, but the vertical width is sufficiently wider than the outer diameter of the connection shaft 515, and the connection shaft 515 is inserted into the insertion portion 5.
It is possible to move in the vertical direction within 22.

A slit-shaped guided portion 523 is formed on the bottom surface of the V door 520 along the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 154, in the portion of the main body 670 where the V door 520 is arranged,
A through-hole 467 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed, and the door portion 521 of the V-door 520 of the V-door unit 500 provided on the back side of the main-body portion 670 passes through the through-hole 467 and is on the front side of the main-body portion. It extends to the inflow portion of the V channel 955a. The through-hole 467 has a V door 5
A guide rib 465 extending along the front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the front-rear 20 in the front-rear direction is formed, and is slidably fitted to the guided portion of the V door 520.

In the V door unit 500 configured as described above, as shown in FIGS. 155 (a), 156 (a), and 157 (b), the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is most extended in the operating range. In the (OFF state), the first link member 510 is positioned at the lower end of the operating range, and the second link member 513 is in a state of being most counterclockwise when viewed from the right.
The connecting shaft 515 of the link member 513 is in a state positioned at the foremost end of the movement range. As a result, the V door 520 is pushed out to the front end of the movement range, and extends to the upper side of the V flow path 955a to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path 955a.

When the lever solenoid 502 is operated from this state to retract the drive shaft 503 (set to the ON state), the first link member 510 operates upward, and the second link member 513 moves clockwise rearward when viewed from the right. Rotate. Accordingly, the connection shaft 515 of the second link member 513 moves rearward, and the V door 520 moves rearward. Then, FIG. 155 (b), FIG. 156 (b), FIG.
As shown in FIG. 57 (c), when the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is most retracted in the operating range, the V door 520 is positioned at the rear end of the moving range, and the door portion 521 is set to V
The state is completely retracted from the flow path 955a, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the V flow path 955a. When the door 521 is extended above the V channel 955a to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V channel 955a, an operation opposite to the above is performed.

FIG. 158 shows a block diagram of the game control apparatus 100 in the gaming machine of this modification.
Probability change operation region switch 460 and remaining ball discharge switch 4 provided in special variable winning device 38
A game ball detection signal from 61 is input to the game control device 100. The lever solenoid is controlled by the game control device 100.

The big hit types in the gaming machine of this modification are 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal variation A,
16R normal B, 4R probability variation is set. The first round of each jackpot type is a probability change decision round. This probability variation determination round is a round in which it is determined whether or not a high probability state is reached after the special gaming state is ended depending on whether or not a game ball flows into the V channel 955a.
The probability change in the name of each jackpot type indicates that there is a high possibility that a game ball will flow into the V flow path 955a and that it is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. This indicates that there is a low possibility that a game ball will flow into the high probability state (probability variation state) after the special game state ends. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into the V channel 955a is determined, so that even if the big hit type is probable, the V channel 955a. If a game ball does not flow in, the high probability state is not obtained, and even if the big hit type is normal, if a game ball flows into the V channel 955a, a high probability state is obtained.

FIG. 159 shows the operation of the special variable winning device 38 that can be executed in each round in the special gaming state. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the V opening releases the special variable winning device 38 with the start of the round (t31). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 502 is turned on.
The N state (retracted state) is set, and the probability change operation region switch 460 is made valid.
When the lever solenoid 502 is OFF (the extended state), the door portion 521 covers the V flow path 955a and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 502 is ON, the door portion 521 has the V flow. Retreating from the path 955a, the game ball can enter. In addition, the state in which the probability variation operation region switch 460 is valid is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operation region switch 460 is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability variation operation region switch 460 is invalid is a state in which even if a game ball is detected by the probability variation operation region switch 460, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 502 is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off, the probability change operation region switch 460 becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that a game ball won immediately after the special variation winning device 38 is opened flows into the V flow path 955a.

When 200 ms elapses from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34).
). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t35).
, The special variable prize-winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended when either of the conditions that the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins is satisfied (
t39). Thereafter, the interval time and the winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t39),
When the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

In addition, after the second opening (t35) of the special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 502
Are also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability change operation region switch 460 is also effective (t36). The second opening of the special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 also continues for a long time. Become. Therefore, when the big hit type is probable, the high probability state is almost certainly obtained.

In addition, the lever solenoid 502 can be turned on for a predetermined time after the special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43).
The game ball that has flowed into the flow channel 8 can also flow into the V channel 955a. Note that the special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all the game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the large winning opening remaining ball processing time. In the case that the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the remaining ball processing time ends (t42).
When the operation ends in the F state, the probability change operation region switch 460 becomes invalid.

In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, the special variation winning device 38 is closed, and all the game balls won in the special variation winning device 38 are not discharged within the remaining ball processing time. And the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state (t4
3) When all the discharges are completed, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the discharge is completed.
At the same time, the operation is terminated, and the probability variation operation region switch 460 is disabled.

In addition, the special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all of the game balls won in the special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the large winning opening remaining ball processing time. In the case where the lever solenoid 502 is not completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (t43), the lever solenoid 502 is turned on at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (t43). The operation is ended in the OFF state. In this case, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t43).
When 100 ms elapses, the probability change operation region switch 460 becomes invalid (t44).

As shown in FIG. 159 (b), in the short opening, the special variable winning device 38 in the V opening.
The same opening as the first opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the round is ended based on the end of the opening (t54). The special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 502 is also short.
The possibility that a game ball flows into 55a is low. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the big hit type is normal.

Note that the operation of the lever solenoid 502 and the valid / invalid switching of the probability change operation region switch 460 are the same as in the case of V-opening as long as the game ball remains in the special variable winning device 38 (t56 to t63). ). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time for the remaining winning ball remaining ball has elapsed, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. When the operation is finished, the probability change operation region switch 460 becomes invalid. Further, the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (t
If all the game balls are not discharged by 62), the lever solenoid 502 is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (t62) and the operation is finished, and the lever solenoid 502 is turned off. 100 ms after entering the state (t62)
When the time has elapsed, the probability change operation region switch 460 becomes invalid (t63).

However, when the short circuit is opened, the lever solenoid 502 and the probability change operation region switch 460 are used.
159 is controlled only when the short is opened in the first round. When the short is opened in other rounds, the lever solenoid 50
2 is not operated, and the probability change operation region switch 460 remains invalid. In the case of the final round, the remaining sphere processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 159 (c), in the long release, the special variable prize-winning device 38 is released at the start of the round (t61), and a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls has elapsed or 25000 ms of available time has elapsed. If any of the conditions for winning is established, the special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t62). Thereafter, the interval time and the winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t62), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t63).
). If it is the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round,
Then the ending time is set. In this long open, the lever solenoid 502 remains in the OFF state, and the probability change operation region switch 460 also remains invalid.

In each jackpot type described above, V is released in the first round in the case of a probable jackpot.
In the case of a big hit, a short is opened in the first round. In the second and subsequent rounds, the 16R probability variation A and the 16R probability variation A are all long open, the 16R probability variation B and the 16R normal B are 2-4R long open, and the 5-16R short open. Moreover, in 4R probability change, all are short-circuit open. However, when the short circuit is opened after 2R, the lever solenoid 502 remains in the OFF state, and the probability change operation region switch 460 also remains invalid. Even in the case of a small hit, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 502 is kept in the OFF state, and the probability changing operation region switch 460 is also invalidated.

The first opening period (t31 to t32) of the door part 521 in the V opening and the opening period (t51 to t52) of the door part 521 in the short opening stay on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. It is a period in which it is difficult for the game balls that have been to reach the V flow path 955a.

As shown in FIG. 31A, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened comes into contact with the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990.
It bounces as shown in (b) and is guided in a direction away from the big winning opening 38d. That is, it is guided in a direction away from the V channel 955a forming the specific region. Further, the bounced game ball comes into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, etc., so that the time to reach the V flow path 955a is further increased. It has become. For this reason, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, it is difficult for the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 to reach the V flow path 955a. However, since the projecting portions 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990 are arranged with an interval through which the game balls can pass, the game balls that have fallen without coming into contact with the projecting portions 992 through this interval are V channels. There is a slight possibility of entering 955a. Of course, when the projecting portion 992 is arranged without leaving an interval through which a game ball can pass, or is provided in a rib shape continuously along the front end of the upper surface, the game on the opening / closing member 990 when opened. You may make it a ball | bowl always contact.

In addition, the first opening period (t31 to t34) of the special variable winning device 38 in V opening,
The opening period (t51 to t54) of the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening is a time during which even a game ball bounced in contact with the protruding portion 992 or the like can flow into the big winning opening 38d. ing. Thereby, even if it is short-opening, the inflow to the big winning opening 38d is possible. It should be noted that the opening period of the door portion 521 and the opening period of the special variable winning device 38 are set to be a design value that generates a high probability state set in the design stage of the gaming machine or a design value of a winning rate in a short opening. The setting is made in accordance with the structure of the special variable winning device 38 such as the opening / closing member 990.

[Probability switching area monitoring process]
In addition, the game control device 100 performs the probability variation operation region switch monitoring process shown in FIG. In this probability change operation region switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability change operation region switch 460 is valid (step A2401). The probability variation operation region switch 460 being active is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operation region switch 460 is treated as effective. If the probability variation operation region switch 460 is not valid (step A2401; N), the probability variation operation region switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the probability change operation region switch 460 is valid (step A2401; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 460 (step A2402).

When there is no input to the probability change operation region switch 460 (step A2402; N), the probability change operation region switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 460 (step A2402; Y), a probability change operation region passage command is prepared (step A2403), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A2404). Thereby, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the game ball flowing into the V channel 955a.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A2405). The V easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 4R probability variation. In the case of big hits with these symbols, V opening is performed, so that the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a almost certainly. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 16R normal A or 16R normal B which is not an easy V symbol, a short circuit is opened, so that a game ball rarely flows into the V flow path 955a.

When the jackpot symbol is an easy V symbol (step A2405; Y), the probability variation operation region normal passage information is set (step A2406), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation region passage information region (step A2408). ), The probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated. If the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A2405; N), the probability variation operation region irregular passage information is set (step A2407), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation region passage information region (step A2408). ), The probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Big hits end processing]
Then, instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG. 84, the big hit end process shown in FIG. In this jackpot end process, it is determined whether there is stochastic operation region passage information (probability variation operation region normal passage information or probability variation operation region irregular passage information) set when a game ball flows into the V flow path 955a (step A2411). And if there is no stochastic operating area passage information (
Step A2411; N) performs jackpot end setting processing 1 (step A1202). In this case, the high probability state is not obtained. When there is probability operation area passage information (step A2411; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1203). In this case, a high probability state is obtained. That is, the V channel 955a regardless of the jackpot symbol
When a game ball flows in, a high probability state is set.

[Lever solenoid control processing]
In addition, the game control device 100 performs a lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 502. As shown in FIG. 162, in this lever solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether or not the lever solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (-1 in this case) (step A2501). When the lever solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (
Step A2501; Y) ends the lever solenoid control process. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no-update code (step A2501; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A2502), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer has reached 0 (step A2503). .

If the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step A2503; N),
The lever solenoid control process is terminated. If the lever solenoid control timer reaches 0 (step A2503; Y), a lever solenoid control table is set (step A2504), and a table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A2504).
Step A2505). Then, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A2507), and the output data for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A2508). Thereafter, the probability variation operation region validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation region validity determination flag region (step A2).
509), the lever solenoid control process is terminated.

Through the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated every time a predetermined time elapses, and the lever solenoid 502 is turned ON / OFF as shown in FIG. Is set. When the operation of the lever solenoid 502 is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lever solenoid 502 is turned OFF and the probability variation operation region switch 460 is disabled by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer. . Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, −1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the operation is stopped.

It should be noted that the arrival of the game ball to the V channel 955a is delayed so that the first opening period (t31 to t32) of the door 521 in the V opening or the opening period (t51) of the door 521 in the short opening.
In order to make it difficult for the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened at time t52) to reach the V channel 955a, the guide channel reaching the V channel 955a 9
55 may be provided with a recess 471 to slow down the flow speed of the game ball.

For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), a game ball located behind the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960 and guided to the back side of the rear wall member 960 is guided to the V flow path 955a side. A plurality of concave portions 471 as shown in FIGS. 163 (b) and (c) are provided in the bent portion 470. Recess 4
The corner of 71 is preferably a curved surface so that it does not excessively prevent the flow of the game ball.

In addition, the concave portion 471 in FIG. 163 (c) has a wall surface on the flow-down direction side of the game ball that is inclined as compared with the concave portion in FIG. 163 (b), so that the outflow of the game ball from the concave portion 471 is facilitated. Can be prevented. In addition, the part which provides such unevenness is not limited to the bent part 470, but may be a part up to the V flow path 955a in the guide flow path. Further, the flow rate of the game ball may be decreased by increasing the number of bent portions before reaching the V channel 955a. That is,
The flow path leading up to the V flow path 955a is provided with a flow velocity reduction mechanism such as a recess 471 or a bent portion, and lowers the flow velocity and ball power of the game ball flowing down than when there is no flow velocity reduction mechanism,
The time until reaching the V channel 955a is lengthened. Further, a protrusion may be provided on the bottom surface of the flow path leading to the V flow path 955a so that the game ball jumps, and the arrival timing to the V flow path 955a may be delayed.

As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start prize port 36, the normal variable prize device 37, the second start prize port) 97) A game in which a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine 10 includes a special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state. The game ball can be won from the opening facing upward, and in the closed state it projects forward and closes the opening to make it impossible to win the game ball, and in the open state it retracts backward to open the opening. Entering a game ball An open / close member 990 that slides back and forth is provided so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the open / close member 990 in the closed state, and the open / close member 990 has an upper surface that allows the game ball to flow down. Thus, a projecting portion 992 projecting upward is provided. Therefore, since the rolling mode of the game ball changes at the protrusion 992,
The fun of gaming can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the specific area at an unintended timing, and to prevent the transition of the probability state different from the design value.

Further, the protruding portion 992 is provided at the front end portion in the sliding direction on at least the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. When the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the rolling mode of the game ball is changed by the protruding portion 992, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Also, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game is provided, the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a specific area (V flow path 955a) into which the game ball can flow, and the game control means is a special game device. Based on the flow of the game ball that has won the variable winning device 38 into the specific area, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball has not flowed into the specific area can be generated after the end of the special game state. The projecting portion 992 is formed such that when the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the game ball that contacts the projecting portion 992 is guided in a direction away from the specific area. Therefore, since it is guided in a direction away from the specific area, the player's feeling of anxiety can be raised and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The opening / closing member 990 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 992 at intervals on the upper surface, and when the opening / closing member 990 is converted to an open state, a game ball located on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is provided with the protrusion 992. So that it can flow down from the front end in the sliding direction.
2 will be arranged. Therefore, the rolling mode of the game ball at the time of converting the opening / closing member 990 to the open state becomes diverse, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the projecting portion 992 is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 can be contacted in the closed state, and the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 than when the projecting portion 992 is not provided. The time will be long. Therefore, the opening / closing member 9
Since the game ball stays on the upper surface 90 for a long time, the possibility of winning the special variation winning device 38 is increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the configuration of the gaming area 32.

As shown in FIG. 164, the game board 30 of the present modification is provided with a plate-shaped partition wall 531 between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31 from the upper side to the right side of the center case 40. The partition wall 531 is arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31 with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the outer peripheral wall 31. In addition, the partition wall 531 is connected to the game area 32 from the front surface of the game board main body.
Front / rear width (a cover glass covering the front of the game board 30 from the front of the game board main body 80 (transparent member)
14 extends to the front).

Further, the interval between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 formed on the outer periphery of the center case 40 is also equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and both sides of the partition wall 531 can flow down the game ball. A first flow-down region 541 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 and a second flow-down region 542 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 are formed.

The lower end of the partition wall 531 is connected to the upper end of the guide portion 616. In the gaming machine of this modification, the game ball can also flow down on the right side of the guide portion 616, and the first flow-down region 541 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 is a region on the right side of the guide portion 616. It is formed so as to guide the game ball to the out port 30a. The game balls flowing down the first flow area 541 are the normal start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the special variation winning device 38, and the general winning opening 35.
And, it is guided to the out port 30a without winning any of the winning devices 90. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the second flow-down area 542 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the restriction wall 613 are the normal start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, and the general winning opening 35.
There is a possibility that the winning device 90 will win. In this modification, the winning device 9 can be used even when the player is right-handed.
There is a possibility of winning 0, but in the case of right-handed, the winning device 90 may not be able to win.

It can be selected by adjusting the firing force which of the first flowing area 541 and the second flowing area 542 the game ball flows into. First falling area 541 and second falling area 5
The inflow port 42 is located above the center case 40, and the inflow port in the first inflow region 541 is located above the inflow port in the second inflow region 542. Therefore, the second flow down region 5
In order to aim at the inflow of the game ball to 42, it is necessary to make the firing force weaker than when the game ball flows into the first flow-down region 541.

In a conventional gaming machine, when making a left strike, the game is performed by adjusting the firing force. On the other hand, the game board 30 of this modification example.
Then, it is necessary to adjust the firing force so that it does not flow into the first downstream area 541 even when making a right strike, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the game state in which a right strike is made. Also,
When a player quits a game with a game ball left on the upper plate 21 at a game store,
The store clerk turns the operation unit 24 as much as possible to fire a game ball and flow the game ball into the first flow-down area 541, so that the game ball can be processed without winning a prize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, a part of the partition wall 531 is interrupted, and the first falling area 541 is obtained.
A communication portion 532 that communicates with the second flow-down area 542 may be provided so that the area where the game ball flows down may be changed. By doing in this way, the interest of a game can be heightened more.

By adjusting the distance between the end portions of the partition wall 531 divided by the communication portion 532, the height of the possibility that the area where the game ball flows down can be adjusted. For example, the area where the game ball flows down is rarely changed as a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, or the area where the game ball flows down frequently is changed as a sufficiently wide interval. can do. In addition, by providing a guiding unit 533 that guides the game ball toward the communication unit 532, the possibility that the region where the game ball flows down can be increased. In the example of FIG. 165, the guide wall 533 for guiding the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area 542 to the communication section 532 is formed by the restriction wall 613 of the center case 40, and the first flow-down from the second flow-down area 542 is performed. The possibility that the game ball moves to the area 541 is increased. Further, the communication unit 532 may be provided with an obstacle such as a windmill.

Further, the partition walls 531 divided by the communication portion 532 are all formed on the front surface of one base member 534. The base member 534 is disposed along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and is fixed to the game board main body 80 with screws. However, by providing a screw hole in the communication portion 532, the partition wall 531 is provided.
It is possible to perform the screwing work in a wide part without the gap, and the efficiency of the manufacturing work of the game board 30 can be improved.

FIG. 166 shows another example of the game board 30 provided with the partition wall 531. As shown in FIG. 166, there may be a possibility of winning a prize opening also in the first downstream area 541 and the second downstream area 542. With such a configuration, the rolling mode of the game ball in the right-handed gaming state can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the game board 30, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 3 are used as the special variable winning devices.
9 can be opened alternately. Further, only the first start winning opening 36 is provided in place of the winning device 90. The game method and the like are the same as those of the game board 30 of the first embodiment, and left-handed and right-handed are selected according to the game situation.

When the size of the center case 40 is reduced as in the game board 30, the outer peripheral wall 31
A large space is formed between the control wall 613 and the regulating wall 613. In this case, it is common to place obstacle members such as game nails and windmills in this space, but the timing and speed of the game ball reaching the right game area when making a right strike due to the presence of the obstacle member Variations will occur.
For this reason, it becomes difficult to stably reach the game ball on the right game area, and stable winning to the special variation winning device 38 and the normal variation winning device 37 is hindered, and the player's profit is reduced. There is a fear.

Therefore, by dividing this space into the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 by the partition wall 531, the first flow-down area 541 can stably reach the game area on the right side without any obstacle member. The second falling area 542 can be an area for enjoying the change in the rolling mode of the game ball by the obstacle member. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the profits of the player while enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 166, by providing the first flow-down area 541 on which no obstacle member is provided on the upper side, the first flow-down area is obtained when the operation ball 24 is turned to the maximum and the game ball is fired with the strongest firing force. It will flow into 541. The first falling area 541 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, so that the game balls heading leftward can be always received by the buffer portion 545 provided on the outer peripheral wall 31. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a strong launching force from colliding with a portion other than the buffer portion 545 and to prevent the game board 30 from being damaged.

In the case where the special variation winning device 38 such as the gaming machine of the first embodiment is provided, the game ball is always placed on the opening / closing member 990 in order to make the special variation winning device 38 win a prize even if the short opening. Needs to stay. In order to do this, it is necessary to make the game ball reach the special variation winning device 38 stably at a fixed timing.
It becomes possible by providing, and a player's profit can be ensured appropriately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167, a communication portion 532 may be provided in a range in which the game ball moves to the right. By doing so, a game ball that reaches the start end of the first flow-down region 541 but has a weak launching force falls from the communication portion 532 to the second flow-down region 542. As a result, the firing force that allows the first flow area 541 to flow to the end is limited to a narrower range, and the timing of the game ball that reaches the special fluctuation winning device 38 or the like can be further stabilized. it can. In this case, the game ball flowing down the second flow down area 542 has a lower winning rate for the special variable winning device 38 or the like than the game ball flowing down the first flow down area 541. It is preferable to be disadvantageous.

Further, a winning opening or a gate through which a game ball falling from above can be won may be provided at a position below the communication portion 532 in the second flow down region 542. By doing in this way, it flows into the winning opening and the gate only when the game ball is launched with a launching force that reaches the beginning of the first flow-down region 541 and dropping at a predetermined position of the communication portion 532. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In FIGS. 164 to 167, a plate-shaped partition wall 53 is provided between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the restriction wall 613.
1 has been formed, the first falling region 541 and the second falling region 542 are formed, but the first flowing region 541 and the second flowing region 542 are formed by a groove-shaped flow path forming member having a U-shaped cross section. May be formed. In this case, the groove-shaped flow path forming member may be disposed so as to open to the front side so as to constitute the side wall and the back wall of the flow-down region, or the groove-shaped flow path forming member may be disposed on the rear side. You may arrange | position so that it may distribute | arrange so that it may open and may comprise the side wall and front wall of a flow-down area | region. Moreover, you may make it form the 1st flow-down area | region 541 and the 2nd flow-down area | region 542 with a cylindrical flow-path formation member.

By doing in this way, it becomes possible to form the 1st falling area 541 and the 2nd falling area 542 by a single channel formation member, without using regulation wall 613 and outer peripheral wall 31 of center case 40. Thereby, the frequency with which a game ball collides with the regulation wall 613 etc. of the center case 40 can be reduced, and the members discarded when reusing the components of the game board can be reduced. Further, when the flow path forming member is damaged, only the flow path forming member needs to be replaced, and the repair cost can be reduced.

In addition, description of game contents, information for instructing not to stare at the same light from a short distance for a long time, and character information such as information indicating that an anti-fraud sensor is mounted should be written on the flow path forming member. In addition, a flow path forming member in which necessary character information is described may be used. In this way, it is possible to change the character information more easily than printing on the surface of the game board.

Also, a plurality of partition walls 531 are provided between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the restriction wall 613 to provide three or more parallel flow-down areas so that the player can select a flow-down area to flow down by adjusting the launch force. May be. In this case, a sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down in each flow-down area may be provided so that different effects are given to the player depending on the flow-down area in which the game ball flows down.

Moreover, although the starting end of the partition wall 531 is provided above the center case 40 and the part where the game ball is directed rightward, it may be provided rightward of the center case 40 and where the game ball is directed downward. . Further, although the partition wall 531 is provided above and to the right of the center case 40, it may be provided at other locations.

In addition, as a gaming machine provided with the partition wall 531, a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the winning in the starting area as described above has been described, but it can also be provided for other gaming machines. . For example, so-called wings that can be awarded to an auxiliary gaming device based on a winning in the starting area and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a game ball won in the auxiliary gaming device flows into a specific area (Old two types) gaming machines may be used. In this case, the possibility of winning a prize in the auxiliary gaming device and the possibility of winning in a specific area in the auxiliary gaming device may be different depending on the flowing area where the game ball flows down.

As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start prize port 36, the normal variable prize device 37, the second start prize port) 97) In the gaming machine 10 that executes the game based on the winning of the game ball to 97) and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the game result is a special result, the game board 30 includes:
An outer peripheral wall 31 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 32; a guide wall 491 that is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and that forms a guide path 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32;
A center case 40 provided substantially in the center of the game area 32,
A plate-like partition wall 531 is provided between the outer wall 31 and the outer peripheral wall 31, and a flow-down area (first flow-down area 541, second flow-down area 542) where game balls can flow down is formed on both sides of the partition wall 531. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to change the flow-down mode of the game ball and improve the interest.

The guide path 490 is provided on the left and right sides of the game area 32, and the partition wall 531 is provided on the left and right other sides of the game area 32, and the player adjusts the firing force to sandwich the partition wall 531. However, it becomes possible to select which of the flow-down areas respectively formed on both sides the game ball is allowed to flow into. Therefore, it is possible to select the flow area that the player is allowed to flow down, so that interest can be improved.

Further, the partition wall 531 has an upstream end in the rolling direction of the game ball positioned above the center case 40. Therefore, it is possible to select a flow-down region that flows down above the center case 40 that is easily visible to the player.

[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification includes a reflective surface 550.

As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine of this modification example has a center case 40 in the gaming area 32.
A reflective surface 550 is provided above and a part of a character string 551 for presenting information to the player is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550. As the character string 551 for presenting information to the player, a warning character such as a display for prompting not to stare at the same light for a long time from a short distance, information indicating that an anti-fraud sensor is mounted, and game content And explanation of the operation method.

Since the character string 551 is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550, the player's attention is drawn to the reflective surface 550 that gives an impression different from the surroundings.
When the user sees the character string 551, the character string 551 is naturally seen, and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. In particular, since the first few characters of the character string 551 overlap the reflective surface 550, it is easy to start reading, and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Of course, only the characters other than the head of the character string 551 may overlap the reflective surface 550. The entire character string 551 may overlap the reflective surface 550.

In addition, the position where the reflective surface 550 is provided and the position where the character string 551 is described are positions through which the game ball passes, and the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 are naturally seen in the process of following the game ball. Therefore, information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Here, a character string 551 is arranged at a portion where the game ball moves to the right, and the direction in which the character string 511 is read matches the movement direction of the game ball. This also allows the character string 551 to be read naturally. Of course, the moving direction of the game ball and the direction of reading the character string 551 may be different.

The reflective surface 550 is formed in a cell that is affixed to the front surface of the game board main body 80, and the character string 55.
1 is also printed in the cell. For example, it can be formed by processing the cell to have a metallic luster. Furthermore, a sheet-like lens may be stacked. Further, a reflective member such as a mirror may be disposed on the front surface of the game board main body 80, and the front surface may be covered with a transparent cell.

As a region where the reflective surface 550 is projected, it is preferable that the entire face of the player 552 can be projected while sitting in front of the gaming machine 10 and playing a game as shown in FIG. 169 (a).
Since the player's own face is reflected, the player's interest is attracted, and the chance to see the character string 551 can be increased by increasing the chance of seeing the reflective surface 550. Further, the upper body of the player 552 may be shown. Moreover, if the area | region of a player's right and left back can be projected, it can confirm that the store clerk came, for example in the case of replacement | exchange of a ball box.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the reflecting surface 550 may be configured to reflect the left and right rear areas of the player. In this case, it is preferable that the state of the lamp on the front frame provided in the gaming machine 553 of the island facility located behind the player can be visually recognized. By doing in this way, the state of the gaming machine 553 located behind the player can be confirmed without turning around. In addition, the light from the rear gaming machine 553 is reflected by the reflecting surface 550,
The reflective surface 550 is indirectly decorated, and the character string 551 can be more noticed. Further, if the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror, a wide area can be projected with a small reflecting surface. Of course, it may be a concave mirror.

In addition, it is preferable that light from the light emitting member of the gaming machine 10 or light from a game store is not directly reflected by the reflecting surface 550 to the player. Regarding the light from the light emitting member of the gaming machine 10, the arrangement of the light emitting member and the light emission direction are adjusted so that the light is reflected by the reflecting surface 550 and is not emitted to the front of the gaming machine 10. For light from the outside of the gaming machine 10 such as lighting of a game shop, the reflective surface 550 is made slightly downward, or light is incident on the reflective surface 550 by protruding the front periphery of the front frame 12 forward. It can cope by preventing.

Further, the position where the reflecting surface 550 is provided is not limited to the illustrated position. For example, the reflective surface 550 may be provided in the vicinity of the guide wall 491 and the character string 551 may be arranged along the guide wall 491. For example, the reflective surface 550 is provided in the vicinity of the outer peripheral wall 31, and the character string 551 is set to the outer peripheral wall 3.
You may arrange | position so that 1 may be followed. In addition, the reflective surface 550 is provided in the guiding portion 490 and the character string 55 is provided.
1 may be arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31 and the guide wall 491. In addition, a reflective surface 550 may be provided on an operating accessory, and character information may be superimposed on the reflective surface 550. Character string 551 in this case
For example, a character string (such as “Intense heat”) related to the production of the game.

Further, the reflection surface 550 may be a half mirror. In this case, a space is provided on the back surface side of the reflecting surface 550, and the space can be illuminated by the light emitting member. In this way, if the light emitting member is turned off to darken the space, the player can see the reflecting surface 550 as a mirror, and if the light emitting member is turned on to brighten the space, the player will see the reflecting surface 550. It will be in the state which can visually recognize space through.

Further, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be provided outside the game area 32 of the game board 30 or may be provided on the front frame 12. In addition, as a gaming machine provided with the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551, a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on winning in the starting area as described above has been described, but it is also provided for other gaming machines. Is possible. For example, so-called wings that can be awarded to an auxiliary gaming device based on a winning in the starting area and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a game ball won in the auxiliary gaming device flows into a specific area (Old two types) gaming machines may be used. Further, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be arranged in a portion that can be visually recognized by the player in the slot machine.

From the above, the player can visually recognize the gaming machine 10 that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A reflective surface 550 that reflects light is provided on the front surface, and a part of the character string 551 that presents information to the player is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550. Therefore, by attracting the player's attention by the reflecting surface 550, the player can be made aware of the presence of the character string 551, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Further, the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror. Therefore, more reflective surface 550
Thus, the player's attention can be attracted, and information can be effectively provided to the player. In addition, a wide range can be projected.

Further, the reflecting surface 550 can reflect at least the entire face of the player who is playing the game. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflective surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Further, the reflection surface 550 can reflect the left and right rear areas of the player. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflective surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player. Further, it becomes possible to confirm the state behind the player.

In addition, the game board 30 including the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the game area 32 is provided with the reflection surface 550, and the game ball can flow down in front of the reflection surface 550. . Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the reflective surface 550, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification has different opening times for the large winning opening for short opening.

Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, the big prize opening opening time for short opening (second opening aspect) is, for example, 0.2 seconds, and the large winning opening for long opening (first opening aspect) is opened. While the time is 29 seconds, for example, in the case of this modification, the big prize opening time for the short opening (second opening mode) is, for example, 1
. It is 8 seconds, and the opening time of the big prize opening for long opening (first opening mode) is, for example, 29 seconds. In other words, in the case of the present modification, the opening time (opening time) of the special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state (first special gaming state) is at least one game ball in one opening. It is set to a time (for example, 1.8 seconds) or more that can be awarded to the special variable winning device 38.
In the jackpot game state, if at least one game ball is not won by one opening of the special variable winning device 38, the jackpot game state is not advantageous to the player.
As in this modified example, “the opening time per one time of the special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state is set to be longer than the time at which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 by one opening. By doing, the jackpot gaming state becomes an advantageous state for the player regardless of the type of jackpot.

Here, when a game is played for a long time (for example, 10 hours or more), the short opening of the big prize opening occurs a plurality of times in the long-time game. An example of a time value at which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 in the open state is 1.8 seconds. That is, “a special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state”
Opening time of each time, at least one game ball in a single opening is a special variable winning device 3
“The time at which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 by one opening” of “Set to 8 or more times that can be won” is “Multiple short opening in long game” In other words, it is the time during which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 with at least one short opening.

FIG. 170 shows the operation of the special variable winning device 38 that can be executed in each round of the special gaming state.
In the case of this modification, the opening time for the large winning opening for short opening, that is, the opening time in the short opening round is 1.8 seconds, and the opening time for the large winning opening for long opening, that is, opening in the long opening round is possible. The time is 29 seconds. The short opening round includes a one-time short opening round in which one short opening is performed and a plurality of short opening rounds in which a plurality of short opening is performed.
Here, when the condition for whether the available time has elapsed or the predetermined number of game balls wins is satisfied, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. Prior to the time lapse condition being met, a round is highly likely to win a predetermined number of game balls. The short open round is a condition for winning a predetermined number of game balls. It can be said that it is a round with a high possibility that the condition of the elapse of the openable time will be established before performing.

As shown in FIG. 170 (a), in the first short opening round, the special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round and the effective period of the big winning opening switch 38a (depending on the big winning opening switch 38a). (Period in which the detection of the game ball is treated as valid) starts (t10
1).
When 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t102). Then, when the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds in the case of this modification) elapses from the end of the round, the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends (t103).
When the interval time (in this modification example, 0.1 second) elapses, the next round is started (t104).

As described above, in the one short opening round, the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds) is longer than the opening time (1.8 seconds) of the special variable winning device 38. Here, the remaining ball processing time is the time from the time when the opening / closing member 990 is converted from the open state to the closed state until the end of the effective period of the big winning opening switch 38a. Therefore, during the remaining ball processing time, the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, and the big prize opening switch 38a is valid (the state where the detection of the game ball by the big prize opening switch 38a is regarded as valid). It has become.

When the remaining ball processing time is short (specifically, when the value of the remaining ball processing time is equal to or less than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the opening time)), the special ball winning device 38 is largely closed. When the game ball flowing into the winning opening 38d is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990, it is highly likely that the valid period of the big winning opening switch 38a will end before the gaming ball passes through the large winning opening switch 38a. If the validity period of the big prize opening switch 38a expires before the game ball passes the big prize opening switch 38a, the detection of the game ball by the big prize opening switch 38a becomes invalid, so that the game ball becomes a big prize opening. In spite of flowing into 38d, it is not counted as a winning ball to the special variable winning device 38.

On the other hand, in the present modified example, the value of the remaining ball processing time is longer than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the opening time), so that the game that flows into the big winning opening 38d when the special variable winning device 38 is closed. Even if the ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990, it is highly likely that the validity period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends after the game ball passes through the big prize opening switch 38a. That is, even if a game ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990, the game ball is likely to be counted as a winning ball to the special variation winning device 38. Therefore, if a game ball that flows into the big prize opening 38d is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990 when the special variable prize winning device 38 is closed, the player is discouraged if the game ball is not counted as a winning ball. Contrary to the player's expectation, the game ball can be counted as a winning ball, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
In the present modification, hereinafter, game balls counted as winning balls to the special variable winning device 38 are referred to as “large winning balls”.

As shown in FIG. 170 (b), in the multiple short open round, with the start of the round,
The special variable winning device 38 is opened, and the effective period of the big winning opening switch 38a starts (t111).
When 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed (t11).
2) When two seconds have passed, the special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t113). The 1.8 second opening and the 2 second closing are alternately repeated (t111 to t116), and when the third opening is completed, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t11).
6). When the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds in this modification) elapses from the end of the round, the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends (t117), and further, the interval time (in this modification) , 0.1 seconds), the next round starts (t118).
).

Thus, in a plurality of short opening rounds, the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds) is longer than the opening time (1.8 seconds) of the special variable winning device 38 and the closing time of the special variable winning device 38. Shorter than (2 seconds).
When the remaining ball processing time is long (specifically, when the value of the remaining ball processing time is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the closing time)) When more game balls than the set number of balls flow into the big prize opening 38d, there is a possibility that the number of big prize balls will increase too much.

In the case of this modification, as in the first embodiment, the special variation winning device 38 can retain the game ball on the opening / closing member 990 while the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, so There is a high possibility that more game balls than the number of balls set as the number of winning balls will flow into the big winning port 38d.
When the value of the remaining ball processing time is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the closing time), a setting is made when a larger number of game balls flow into the grand prize opening 38d than the set number of balls. After a game ball more than the number of balls that have been passed through the big prize opening switch 38a, the big prize opening switch 38a
Is likely to expire. When the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a expires after a larger number of game balls than the set number of balls pass through the big prize opening switch 38a, the number of big winning balls increases, and the number of game balls won per round The number is likely to deviate greatly from the design value.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the value of the remaining ball processing time is shorter than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the closing time), so that more game balls than the set number of balls are the big prize opening. Even if it flows into 38d, there is a high possibility that the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a will end before more game balls pass through the big prize opening switch 38a. Accordingly, the number of winning prize balls does not increase too much, and it is possible to realize the number of acquired game balls (the number of acquired game balls per round) as designed.

Further, when the closing time is short (specifically, when the closing time value is equal to or less than a predetermined reference time value (here, the remaining ball processing time value)), it is arranged in the right game area. It is not possible to secure a sufficient time for aiming at the special variable winning device 38. Therefore, when the player notices the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 990 and starts right-handed, the number of game balls set as the number of large winning balls per round arrives at the special variable winning device 38. There is a high probability that multiple short-opening rounds will be completed before starting. The game balls of the set number of balls are the special variable winning device 3
If multiple short open rounds are completed before arriving at 8, there will be too few winning balls and 1
There is a high possibility that the number of acquired game balls per round will deviate significantly from the design value.

On the other hand, in this modification, since the value of the closing time is longer than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the remaining ball processing time), the special variation winning device 38 disposed in the right game area is aimed. Even if the player notices the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 990 and starts to make a right turn, the game ball of the set number of balls arrives at the special winning device 38. There is a high possibility that multiple short-opening rounds will be completed. Therefore, the number of winning balls is not reduced too much, and it is possible to realize the number of acquired game balls (the number of acquired game balls per round) as designed. Further, since the number of the big winning balls does not become too small, “the opening time per one time of the special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state is set to at least one game ball in the special variable winning device 38 in one opening. The meaning of "set more than the time that can be won in" is not spoiled.

In this modification, the opening time (1.8 seconds) in the one-time short opening round is the same as the opening time (1.8 seconds) in the plurality of short opening rounds. The closing time (2 seconds) is the same as the sum of the remaining sphere processing time (1.9 seconds) and the interval time (0.1 seconds).
This makes it difficult to understand the boundaries between rounds. In other words, since it becomes difficult to know whether it is in the middle of multiple short open rounds or in the middle of one short open round being repeated, for example, an effect that does not display the number of rounds on the display device 41 is executed. If
It is possible to enhance the production effect of the production.

As shown in FIG. 170 (c), in the long open round, the special variable winning device 38 is opened and the effective period of the big winning opening switch 38a starts with the start of the round (
t121).
When 29 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t122). Then, when the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds in the case of this modification) elapses from the end of the round, the effective period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends (t123),
Further, when the interval time (0.1 second in the case of this modification) elapses, the next round is started (t124).
Thus, in the long open round, the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds) is shorter than the open time (29 seconds) of the special variable winning device 38.

In the multiple short open rounds, the first open time, the second open time, and the third open time are not limited to the same time (for example, 1.8 seconds), and these three open times are At least one may be a different time.
Further, in the multiple short open rounds, the first closing time and the second closing time are not limited to the same time, and the two closing times may be different from each other.
In addition, the number of times the special variable prize-winning device 38 is opened is not limited to three in a plurality of short opening rounds, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a plurality of times.

Also, the opening time of the short opening round is not limited to 1.8 seconds, but it is longer than the time (for example, 1.8 seconds) in which at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 by one opening. If necessary, it can be changed as appropriate.
Also, the opening time of the long opening round is not limited to 29 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the remaining sphere processing time is not limited to 1.9 seconds, and can be changed as appropriate. The remaining ball processing time is such that when more game balls than the set number of balls flow into the big prize opening 38d, more game balls than the set number of balls pass through the big prize opening switch 38a. Big prize opening switch 3
It is preferably the time when the effective period of 8a ends. In addition, the remaining ball processing time is “the opening time per one time of the special variable winning device 38 in the big hit gaming state is longer than the time that at least one game ball can win the special variable winning device 38 in one opening. For example, a game ball having the set number of balls is a big prize opening 38d.
It is preferable that the valid period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends after the set number of game balls pass through the big prize opening switch 38a.
Further, the interval time is not limited to 0.1 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
In order to realize the operation of the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG.
In place of the special winning opening switch monitoring process shown in FIG. Since the process of steps A201 to A222 in the special winning opening switch monitoring process of the present modification is the same as FIG. 55, the description thereof is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 171, in the big prize opening switch monitoring process of the present modification, when the small hitting medium is not being processed (step A221; N), it is determined whether the big prize opening is being processed (step A223a). ). If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A223a; N
) Finishes the big prize opening switch monitoring process, and when the big prize opening is being processed (step A223a; Y), the value of the big hit opening operation end is saved in the big prize opening control pointer area (step A223a). A223b), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
In order to realize the operation of the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG.
Instead of the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG.
Perform processing during the interval. Since the processes of steps A901 to A903 and A909 in the fanfare / interval process of this modification are the same as those in FIG. 77, the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the fanfare / interval processing of this modification, after the processing of step A903, the big winning opening release information and the big hit processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step A910a), the big hit middle processing control pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step A910b).
In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 170, when opening and closing is repeated in one round (that is, in the case of multiple short open rounds), “0” is set as the initial value for the big hit mid-process control pointer. . In addition, when performing one release in one round (that is, in the case of one short release round or long release round), the big hit operation end value “4” is set as the big hit mid-process control pointer initial value. To do.

Next, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step A910c), and the process proceeds to step A909.
In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 170, the opening time set in step A910c is 1.8 seconds or 29 seconds.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
Further, in this modified example, instead of the big winning opening opening process transition setting process shown in FIG. 78, FIG.
The process for setting the transition to the special winning opening opening process shown in FIG. Since the process of steps A911 to A915 in the process for setting the transition to the special winning opening opening process of this modification is the same as that in FIG. 78, the description thereof is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 173, in the process for setting the transition to the large winning opening opening process of the present modification, step A
After performing the process of 914, a signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A916a), and step A
The processing shifts to 915.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
In order to realize the operation of the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG.
In place of the process for opening a special winning opening shown in FIG. Steps A1001, A1007, and A1009 to A10 in the process for opening the big prize opening of this variation
The processing of No. 11 is the same as FIG.
As shown in FIG. 174, in the big winning opening opening process of this modification, first, the big hit middle process control pointer is loaded and prepared (step A1012a), and the loaded value is the big hit action end value (in this modification). In the case 4), it is determined whether or not (step A1012b).

If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (step A1012b; N), the big hit operation transition setting process is performed (step A1012c), and the big hit middle processing control pointer is set to +
1 is updated (step A1012d), and the special winning opening open process is terminated. In this variation,
In the case where the current round is a plurality of short opening rounds and the third opening has not ended, it is determined in step A1012b that the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (step A1012b; Y)
Shifts to the process of step A1001.
If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), and an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed. If it is the final round (step A1001; Y), an ending command is prepared (step A1009), and an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed.

Next, the remaining ball processing time (1.9 seconds in the case of this modification) corresponding to the special winning opening information is set (step A1012e), and the set remaining ball processing time is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A1012f), the process proceeds to step A1011.

If the current round is a long open round as in the first embodiment, a remaining ball processing time for long closing is set, and the current round is a short open round (one short open loud,
In the case of multiple short open rounds, it is also possible to configure the remaining ball processing time for short closing.
Further, as in the first embodiment, when the current round is the final round, it is possible to set the final remaining sphere processing time.

[Big hit action transition setting process]
FIG. 175 shows the big hit operation transition setting process (step A1012c) in the above-described special winning opening opening process.
In the big hit operation transition setting process, first, a branch process using a big hit mid-process control pointer is performed (step A1013a).

If the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is 0 or 2, the wait time corresponding to the big hit mid-process control pointer (2 seconds in the case of this modification) is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1013b). . Note that different wait times (closure times) may be set depending on the pointer value.
Next, a signal related to closing of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1013c), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (Step A1013d), the jackpot movement transition setting process is terminated.

Also, when the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is 1 or 3, the special winning game opening timer area corresponding to the big hit mid-process control pointer (1.8 seconds in the case of this modification) is shown in the special game process timer area. (Step A1013e). It should be noted that a special winning opening opening time (opening time) may be set depending on the value of the pointer.
Next, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1013f), and the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (Step A1013g), the jackpot movement transition setting process is terminated.
As a result, the 1.8-second winning opening opening time (opening time) and the 2-second wait time (closing time) are alternately set. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. It is possible to alternately repeat the opening of seconds and the closing of 2 seconds.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Further, in this modified example, instead of the big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process shown in FIG.
The winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process shown in FIG. The processing of steps A1021 to A1023 in the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the present modification is the same as that in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 176, in the big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process of this variation, step A
After performing the processing of 1022, a signal related to closing of the special prize opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1024a), and the processing proceeds to step A1023. .

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
In order to realize the operation of the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG.
In place of the winning ball remaining ball processing shown in FIG. 7, the winning ball remaining ball processing shown in FIG. 177 is performed. Since the processing of steps A1101, A1109 to A1114 in the big winning opening remaining ball processing of the present modification is the same as FIG.
As shown in FIG. 177, in the big winning opening remaining ball processing of this modification, if it is not the final round (step A1101; N), the interval time corresponding to the big winning opening information and the current round number (this modification) In the example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1115a), and the process proceeds to step A1109.

In this modified example, since the rank-down effect (the effect of notifying that the round is a short open round) is not executed, the process of steps A1102 to A1108 is not executed in the big winning opening remaining ball process.
It should be noted that this modified example can also be configured to execute a rank-down effect.
In this modification, 16R probability variation A (all long open), 16R probability variation B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open multiple times), 16R probability variation C (1 to 4R is long open) as the big hit pattern , 5-16R is short open once), 16R normal A (all open long), 16R normal B (1-4R
Is long open, 5-16R is short open multiple times), 16R normal C (1-4R is long open, 5-16R
1 short open), 4R probability change (all short open once) is set. Accordingly, when the rank-down effect is configured to be executed, if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round as in the first embodiment, a normal interval time (0.1 second in the case of this modification) is set. Saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the number of rounds is the value of the special performance round (for example, 4R)
In the case of, in the special figure game processing timer area, the interval time for rank down effect (
For example, 3.6 seconds) is saved in the special game process timer area.

[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Moreover, in this modification, it replaces with the small hit middle process transfer setting process shown in FIG.88 (b), and FIG.
The small hitting / medium process transition setting process shown in FIG. Since the process of steps A1311 to A1317 in the small hitting / medium process transition setting process of the present modification is the same as FIG. 88 (b), the description thereof is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 178, in the small hitting / measuring process transition setting process of the present modification, step A131 is performed.
After performing the process of No. 4, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1318a), and step A1
The process proceeds to 315.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Further, in this modified example, instead of the small hitting action transition setting process shown in FIG. 90, the small hitting action transition setting process shown in FIG. 179 is performed. Step A in the small hit motion transition setting process of this modification
The processing of 1411 to A1415 is the same as that in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 179, in the small hitting motion transition setting process of this modification, step A1412 is performed.
After performing the processing of (1), a signal related to closing of the special winning opening (for example, a special electric accessory 1 opening signal
FF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1416a), and step A1
The processing shifts to 413.
In addition, after performing the process of step A1414, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example,
Save the special electric accessory 1 release signal to the test signal output data area (step A1)
417a), the process proceeds to step A1415.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Further, in this modification, instead of the small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process shown in FIG.
The small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process is performed. The processing of steps A1421 to A1424 in the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the present modification is the same as that in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 180, in the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process of the present modification, step A1
After performing the process of 423, a signal related to closing of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 release signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1425a), and the process proceeds to the process of step A1424. .

Here, in this modified example, in step A913 of the process for setting a process for opening a big prize opening during the fanfare / interval process (FIG. 172) (FIG. 173), a signal (for example, special electric The character 1 operating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area.
Also, step A1123 of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (FIG. 82) in the winning prize remaining ball process (FIG. 177) and the jackpot end process transition setting process (FIG. 83) in the winning prize remaining ball process (FIG. 177). ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (for example, the special electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is OFF) in step A1133.

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is displayed at the end of the fanfare / interval processing (that is, the big prize opening). It is set to ON at the start of the process during opening (immediately before the start), and is set to OFF at the end of the big winning opening remaining ball process. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the special electric player operating signal (for example, the special electric player 1 operating signal) is processed during the big winning opening opening processing and the big winning opening remaining ball processing. It turns on.

In addition, in step A1314 of the small hitting midway processing transition setting process (FIG. 178) in the small hitting fanfare middle processing (FIG. 88 (a)), for example, a signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) ON) is saved in the test signal output data area.
Further, the small hit end process transition setting process (FIG. 9) in the small hit remaining ball process (FIG. 92A).
In step A1514 of 2 (b), a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area.

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is displayed at the end of the small hit fanfare processing (ie, the small hit) It is set to ON at the start of the middle process (immediately before the start), and is set to OFF at the end of the small hit remaining ball process. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is displayed during the small hit processing and the small hit remaining ball processing. Turns on.

Further, in this variation, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 171), when the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), or when the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A202; Y) A process for determining whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 38a when the small hitting is being processed (step A203; Y) or the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A204; Y). (Step A206) is configured to be performed.

Therefore, a process for determining whether or not there is an input to the special prize opening switch 38a during a period in which the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is ON (step A2).
06). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 181, for example, the special winning combination switch 38a is valid during a period in which the special electric accessory operating signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is ON, and the special electric accessory 38a is activated. In-operation signal (for example, special electric accessory 1 in-operation signal)
During the period when is in the OFF state, the special winning opening switch 38a is disabled.

In this modification, as shown in FIGS. 173, 175, 178, and 179, a signal (for example, a special winning opening) is released immediately before saving on-data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. The electric accessory 1 release signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 175, 176, 179, and 180, a signal (eg, for example, a signal related to closing of the prize winning opening immediately before saving off data in the solenoid winning solenoid output data area)
The special electric accessory 1 release signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area.
Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 182, for example, the opening / closing member 990 is opened during a period in which the special electric accessory release signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1 release signal) is ON, and the special electric accessory release signal ( For example, during the period when the special electric accessory 1 opening signal) is in the OFF state, the opening / closing member 9
90 is closed.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present modification has a winning area (a big winning opening 38d) into which game balls can flow.
) And a variable prize device (special variable prize device 38) having an opening / closing member 990 that can be converted into a closed state that opens the prize area, and the game result is a special result. A game machine capable of generating a special game state in which the opening / closing member 990 performs a conversion operation (open / close operation) for converting between a closed state and an open state, and detecting means for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the winning area Mouth switch 38a), setting means (game control device 100) for setting an effective time value corresponding to an effective period in which detection of the game ball by the detecting means is effective (effective period of the big prize opening switch 38a), and an opening / closing member Control means capable of executing conversion control for controlling the conversion operation of 990 (
Game control device 100). The setting means sets the effective time value so that the effective period starts at the start of the conversion control by the control means, and the effective period ends after the end of the conversion control. The opening time value corresponding to the period in which 990 is in the open state (the opening time value of the special variable prize-winning device 38) is set to a plurality of predetermined opening time values (1.8 seconds and 29 in this modification). Seconds), and the multiple types of opening time values are all equal to or greater than a predetermined time value (1.8 seconds in the case of this modification), and the difference obtained by subtracting the opening time value from the effective time value. The remaining time value that is a time value (in the case of this modification, the value of the remaining sphere processing time) is configured to be a time value longer than the predetermined time value.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 of this modification, a predetermined signal (for example, a test fire test signal)
Is provided with signal transmission means (game control device 100) capable of transmitting to the external device,
An opening signal corresponding to the opening / closing member 990 being in the open state (for example, the special electric accessory 1 opening signal) and an effective corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the detection means (big winning opening switch 38a) A period signal (for example, a signal indicating that the special electric accessory 1 is operating) can be transmitted to the external device. And the control means (game control device 100) which can control the conversion operation of the opening and closing member 990
Is the opening time value corresponding to the transmission period of the opening signal (the value of the opening time of the special variable winning device 38)
Is selected from a plurality of predetermined opening time values (1.8 seconds and 29 seconds in the case of the present modification), and a valid period (large winning opening) in which detection of the game ball by the detecting means is effective Switch 38a
Setting means (game control device 100) for setting an effective time value corresponding to (effective period) of the effective period starts at the start of transmission of the effective period signal, and the effective period ends at the end of transmission of the effective period signal. The valid time value can be set as follows.

Therefore, since the remaining time value (the value of the remaining ball processing time) is longer than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the opening time), even if the game ball is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990, the game ball is specially changed. The possibility of being counted as a winning ball to the winning device 38 is high. Therefore, when a game ball that flows into the big prize opening 38d is sandwiched between the opening and closing members 990 when the special variable prize winning device 38 is closed, the player is discouraged if the game ball is not counted as a winning ball. Contrary to the player's expectation, the game ball can be counted as a winning ball, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Note that the opening / closing member 990 is not limited to a so-called velo-type electric accessory that opens and closes the large winning opening 38d by moving back and forth (sliding) in the front-rear direction, and can be changed as appropriate. It may be an attacker-type electric accessory that opens the special winning opening 38d by rotating in the direction.
In addition, the winning area is not limited to the large winning opening 38d, and can be changed as appropriate. That is, the variable winning device is not limited to the special variable winning device 38 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the normal winning device 37 may be used.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of this modification, the control means (game control device 100) converts the opening / closing member 990 during the period from the start to the end of the conversion control (that is, from the start to the end of one round). It is possible to execute the operation (opening / closing operation) a plurality of times, and in the conversion control in which the conversion operation of the opening / closing member 990 is executed a plurality of times (in the case of this modification, a plurality of short opening rounds), the opening / closing member 990 is closed. The closing time value (the value of the closing time of the special variable prize-winning device 38) corresponding to the period from when the state becomes the open state again to the remaining time value (the value of the remaining ball processing time in this modification) It can be configured to have a longer time value.
By configuring in this way, the closing time value becomes longer than a predetermined reference time value (here, the value of the remaining ball processing time), so that it is possible to secure a sufficient time for aiming at the special variable winning device 38. It is possible to achieve the number of acquired game balls (the number of acquired game balls per round) as designed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification converts the closing time value in conversion control (in the case of the present modification, multiple short open rounds) in which the conversion operation (opening / closing operation) of the opening / closing member 990 is executed a plurality of times. Can be configured to be the same as the time value corresponding to the period from the end of the control to the start of the next conversion control (in this modification, the sum of the remaining sphere processing time value and the interval time value). It is.
By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to understand the boundary between the conversion control and the next conversion control (that is, between rounds). For example, when performing an effect that does not display the number of rounds on the display device 41, It is possible to enhance the production effect of the production.

Here, in this modification, it is possible to execute each effect at the timing shown in FIG. 183, for example.
Specifically, along with the start of the round (in this example, the first round), the special variable winning device 38 is opened and the effective period of the big winning opening switch 38a starts (t131).
. Further, with the start of the round, an effect of displaying the number of acquired game balls and the number of consecutive games on the display device 41 and the effect of displaying the number of rounds on the display device 41 and the like (round number display effect) are started.

Further, for example, during the period from the start to the end of the special gaming state, an image imitating the special variation winning device 38 (large winning opening) is displayed on the display device 41 or the like. With the start of the round, the image opening / closing member 990 simulating the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) is opened, and the moving image in which the game ball wins the special variable winning device 38 is displayed on the display device 41 or the like. The effect to be displayed (a special prize opening opening display effect) is started.
In addition, with the start of the round, an effect of lighting the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 starts. While the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state, the brightness of the LED is “high”.
For example, it is notified that it is the timing when a large amount of game balls can be acquired.
Further, along with the start of the round, an effect of operating the accessory such as the board effect device 44 (an accessory operation effect) is started, and an effect of lighting an LED provided on the accessory is started.
While the accessory is operating, in order to attract attention to the accessory, the LED provided on the accessory
Set the brightness to high. In other words, during execution of the accessory action effect, the LE provided for the accessory
An effect of setting the brightness of D to “high” (high light effect) is also executed.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the round, the accessory operation effect ends, the accessory returns to the initial position, and the brightness of the LED provided on the accessory switches from “high” to “medium” (t
132).
When the big winning opening opening time has elapsed from the start of the round, the special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t133). Then, with the end of the round, the image opening / closing member 990 simulating the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) is closed, and the large winning opening opening display effect is ended.

As the round ends, the brightness of the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 is switched from “high” to “medium”. In the remaining ball processing period (period for counting the remaining ball processing time), by setting the brightness of the LED to “medium”, for example, the open / close member 990 is closed, but the big prize opening switch 38a is effective ( The detection of the game ball by the big prize opening switch 38a is treated as effective).
Further, along with the end of the round, the brightness of the LED provided in the accessory is switched from “medium” to “low”.

When the remaining ball processing time elapses from the end of the round, the effective period of the big prize opening switch 38a ends, the round number display effect, the L of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18 and the like.
When the effect of turning on the ED ends (t134) and the interval time further elapses, the next round starts (t135).
When the remaining ball processing time has elapsed from the end of the round, the effect of lighting the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 is not ended, but the luminance of the LEDs is changed from “medium” to “low”. It may be switched to “middle” or “high”.
In addition, as the effective period notification means, the winning opening opening time and the remaining ball processing time are notified by switching the luminance of the LED, but it is also possible to notify by color using an LED whose emission color can be changed. is there. Furthermore, it is also possible to notify each time by separate LEDs and notify by a plurality of indicators.

Here, when the round ends, an over-winning effect executable period in which an over-winning effect can be executed starts, and the over-winning effect can be executed with the end of the effective period of the big prize opening switch 38a. The period ends. The over-winning effect is an effect of notifying by sound or the like that an over-winning (so-called over-winning) has occurred when the number of counts in the big winnings exceeds the upper limit value and reaches a predetermined threshold value. In this modification, an over-winning effect for notifying the occurrence of over-winning is performed by sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b.
Further, in this modification, when the over winning effect is executed, the accessory operates,
The brightness of the LED provided in the accessory is configured to switch from “low” to “high”. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the occurrence of an overwinning not only by sound but also by an accessory or light.
That is, in this modification, when an over winning is detected (when it is determined that the number of large winning mouth counts exceeds the upper limit value and reaches a predetermined threshold), during the over winning effect implementation possible period, Over-winning effect by sound, action operation effect that moves the object, L provided in the object
A high light emission effect in which the brightness of the ED is set to “high” starts.

For example, as in the example shown in FIG. 183, when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period (a period for counting the interval time), that is, at the end of the over winning effect possible period (t 134). ), The over winning effect by sound is started immediately, and after the next round starts, the over winning effect ends (t136).
Thus, when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the occurrence of the over winning can be clearly notified by ending the over winning effect after the next round starts. At the same time, it can be reminiscent of whether the valid period of the special prize opening switch 38a continues during the interval period. In addition, during the round, it is preferable not to output the sound accompanying the winning so as not to disturb the over winning effect due to the sound.

In addition, when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period (t134), the accessory action effect for operating the accessory is immediately started, and after the next round starts, The object movement effect ends (t137).
Therefore, as described above, the accessory action production starts with the start of the round, but when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, it starts with the over winning. Continuing to the accessory action effect (that is, without returning the accessory to the initial position), the accessory action effect accompanying the start of the next round is executed.

In addition, when an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period (t134), a high light emission effect for immediately setting the luminance of the LED provided on the accessory to “high” is started, After the next round starts, the high light emission effect ends (t137).
Therefore, as described above, the high light emission effect is executed at the start of the round. However, when an overwin is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the high start that started with the overwin is performed. Continuing from the light emission effect (that is, without returning the luminance of the LED provided on the accessory to “low”), the high light emission effect associated with the start of the next round is executed.

On the other hand, when an over winning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the over winning effect started with the over winning is ended before the next round starts.
In addition, if an overwinning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the accessory action effect started with the overwinning ends before the next round starts and the role action is finished. The thing returns to the initial position, and the accessory action effect starts with the start of the next round.
In addition, if an over winning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the high-lighting effect started with the over winning is completed before the next round starts, The brightness of the LED provided in is returned to “low”, and a high light emission effect starts with the start of the next round.

As in the case where an over-winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the next round is also determined when an over winning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period. After the start, the over winning effect may be ended.
Similar to the case where an over winning is detected at the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period, the over winning is also detected when an over winning is detected before the boundary between the remaining ball processing period and the interval period. The accessory action effect and the high light emission effect accompanying the start of the next round may be executed following the accessory action effect and the high light emission effect that have started.

The effect control device 300, for example, during the interval period, based on the round command from the game control device 100 (see step A902), data for the round number display effect to be executed in the next round (that is, the next round Set the data for displaying the number of rounds.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is a gaming machine having a V switch (a probability change operation region switch 460 for detecting a gaming ball flowing into the V flow path 955a), the effect control device 300
When the next round is a probability change determination round (a round in which it is determined whether a high probability state is reached after the end of the special game state depending on whether or not a game ball flows into the V channel 955a), An effect of displaying an image such as “Aim at V!” On the display device 41 or the like may be executed during the interval period. At this time, the data for displaying the image may be set during the remaining sphere processing period immediately before the probability change determination round, or may be set during the interval period immediately before the probability change determination round.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is a gaming machine having a V switch, the production control device 300 is in the probability variation determination round and / or the probability variation determination round when the next round is a probability variation determination round. An effect that makes the special variation winning device 38 stand out may be executed during the last remaining ball processing period or interval period.
The effect that makes the special variable winning device 38 stand out is, for example, that the brightness of the LED provided in the special variable winning device 38 is set to “high” and other LEDs (other than the LEDs provided in the special variable winning device 38) are set. This is an effect of setting the brightness of the LED) to other than “high”. Special variation winning device 3
At the time of production that makes 8 stand out, for example, the brightness of other LEDs can be set to other than “high” by lowering the brightness of other LEDs by one step from the normal brightness. “Decrease from normal brightness by one step” means that when the normal brightness (the brightness when the effect that makes the special variable winning device 38 conspicuous is not executed) is “high”, it is set to “medium”. ”Is set to“ low ”, and“ low ”or“ 0 (none) ”is set to“ 0 (none) ”.

In addition, when the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is an ST type gaming machine with a limited number of special figure variable display games that can be executed in a high probability state, the effect control device 300 is executed in a high probability state. An additional effect is added during the interval period to add a predetermined number to the remaining number of possible special-figure display games (hereinafter referred to as “the number of remaining games”), and this additional effect is performed multiple times, and the remaining number of games is gradually increased. You may make it return to the regulation frequency.
Specifically, for example, when the remaining number of games is 70 and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, during the interval period between 5R and 6R, during the interval period between 10R and 11R, and between 15R and 16R During the interval, an effect of adding 10 times to the remaining number of games may be performed, and the remaining number of games may be gradually returned to the specified number (100 in this example). That is, the remaining number of games is displayed on the display device 41 or the like, and the remaining number of games is displayed from “70 times” to “80 times (= 70 times +) during the interval between 5R and 6R.
"10 times)", and the display of the remaining number of games is switched from "80 times" to "90 times (= 80 times +10 times)" during the interval period between 10R and 11R, and the interval period between 15R and 16R The remaining number of games is displayed from “90 times” to “100 times (= 90 times + 1).
0 times) ”may be performed. By performing such an effect, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the addition effect is performed a plurality of times, some of the addition effects may be performed during other periods instead of during the interval period.
Specifically, for example, when the remaining number of games is 70 and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the remaining number of games is counted during the interval period between 10R and 11R and during the interval period between 15R and 16R. At the time when the display of the remaining number of games is “0” (when the actual number of remaining games is 10),
Addition effect of adding 10 times to the number of remaining games, that is, display of the number of remaining games is “0”
An effect of switching from “10 times” to “10 times” may be performed. By performing such a production,
The fun of gaming can be improved.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machines 38 Special variable prize device (variable prize device)
38a Large prize opening switch (detection means)
38d Grand prize opening (winning area)
100 Game control device (setting means, control means, signal transmission means)
990 Opening and closing member

Claims (2)

A variable winning device having an open / close member that can be converted into a closed state in which a winning area into which game balls can flow and an open state in which the winning area is opened; In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which an opening / closing member performs a conversion operation for converting between the closed state and the open state, a detection means for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the winning area, and a game by the detection means Setting means for setting an effective time value corresponding to an effective period in which the detection of the sphere is effective; control means capable of executing conversion control for controlling the conversion operation of the opening / closing member; and a predetermined notification effect for the effective period Effective period notification means that can be notified by the control means, and the setting means starts the effective period at the start of the conversion control by the control means, and the effective period after the end of the conversion control. The effective time value is set so that the period is terminated, and the control means sets an opening time value corresponding to a period in which the opening / closing member is in the open state to a plurality of predetermined opening time values. A plurality of types of opening time values selected from among them are all equal to or greater than a predetermined time value, and a remaining time value that is a difference time value obtained by subtracting the opening time value from the effective time value is set to the predetermined time value A gaming machine characterized by a longer time value. The control means can execute the conversion operation a plurality of times from the start to the end of the conversion control. In the conversion control in which the conversion operation is executed a plurality of times, the opening / closing member is closed. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a closing time value corresponding to a period from the state to the opening state again is a time value longer than the remaining time value.